Home

Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series

1. Item of 075 AD75MLI QD75MLI E 42 192 342 42 192 342 Pr 29 Deceleration time 1 43 193 343 43 193 343 EN 44 194 344 44 194 344 Pr 30 Deceleration time 2 45 195 345 45 195 345 EMI 46 196 346 46 196 346 Pr 31 Deceleration time 47 197 347 47 197 347 limit Val 48 198 348 48 198 348 peed iimit value 49 199 349 49 199 349 Pr 33 JOG operation acceleration time 50 200 350 50 200 350 selection Pr 34 JOG operation deceleration time 51 201 351 51 201 351 selection Pr 35 Acceleration deceleration process 52 202 352 52 202 352 selection Pr 36 S pattern proportion 53 203 353 53 203 353 EN 54 204 354 54 204 354 Pr 37 Sudden stop deceleration time 55 205 355 55 205 355 Pr 38 Stop group 1 sudden stop selection 56 206 356 56 206 356 Pr 39 Stop group 2 sudden stop selection 57 207 357 57 207 357 Pr 40 Stop group 3 sudden stop selection 58 208 358 58 208 358 Pr 41 Positioning complete signal output 59 209 359 59 209 359 time 42 Allowable circular interpolation 60 210 360 60 210 360 enar Width 61 211 361 61 211 361 Pr 43 External start function selection QD75ML Pr 42 External command 62 212 362 62 212 362 function selection Pr 150 Restart allowable range when 64 214 364 64 214 364 servo OFF to ON 65 215 365 6
2. Pr 1 Unit setting 0 150 300 0 150 300 Pr 2 1 No of pulses per rotation Ap 1 151 301 1 151 301 Pr 3 1 Movement amount per rotation Al 2 152 302 2 152 302 Pr 4 Unit magnification Am 3 153 303 3 153 303 Pr 5 Pulse output mode 4 154 304 4 154 304 Pr 6 Rotation direction setting 5 155 305 5 155 305 mE 6 156 306 10 160 310 Pr 7 Speed limit value 7 157 307 11 161 311 8 158 308 12 162 312 Pr 8 Acceleration time 0 9 159 309 13 163 313 n 10 160 310 14 164 314 9 Deceleration time 0 11 161 311 15 165 315 12 162 312 6 156 306 Pr 10 Bias speed at start 13 163 313 7 157 307 Pr 11 Stepping motor mode selection amount 14 164 314 Pr 12 Backlash compensation amount 15 165 315 17 167 317 m u 16 166 316 18 168 318 Pr 13 Software stroke limit upper limit value 17 167 317 49 169 319 2 18 168 318 20 170 320 Pr 14 Software stroke limit lower limit value 19 169 319 21 471 321 Pr 15 Software stroke limit selection 20 170 320 22 172 322 Pr 16 Software stroke limit valid invalid setting 21 171 321 23 173 323 22 172 322 24 174 324 Pr 17 Command in position width 23 173 323 25 175 325 Pr 18 Torque limit setting value 24 174 324 26 176 326 Pr 19 M code ON signal output timing 25 175 325 27 177 327 Pr 20 Speed switching mod
3. Md 29 Current feed value 801 901 1001 801 901 4001 802 902 1002 802 902 1002 Md 30 Machine feed value 803 903 1003 803 903 1003 804 904 1004 804 904 1004 805 905 1005 805 905 1005 Md 32 Valid M code 806 906 1006 808 908 1008 Md 33 Axis error No 807 907 1007 806 906 1006 Md 34 Axis warning No 808 908 1008 807 907 1007 Md 35 Axis operation status 809 909 1009 809 909 1009 810 910 1010 810 910 1010 Md 36 Gurrent speed 811 911 1010 811 911 1011 812 912 1012 812 912 1012 Md 37 Ads Jeedrate 813 913 1013 813 913 1013 H 814 914 1014 814 914 1014 Md 38 Speed position switching control positioning amount 815 915 1015 815 915 1015 Md 39 External input output signal 816 916 1016 816 916 1016 Md 40 Status 817 917 1017 817 917 1017 818 918 1018 818 918 1018 Mea large value 819 919 1019 819 919 1019 820 920 1020 820 920 1020 Ma 42 Targetispeed 821 921 1021 821 921 1021 822 922 1022 Md 43 OP absolute position 823 923 1023 824 924 1024 824 924 1024 Md 44 Movement amount after near point dog ON 825 925 1025 825 925 1025 Md 45 Torque limit stored value 826 926 1026 826 926 1026 Md 46 Special start data instruction code setting value 827 927 1027 827 927 1027 Md 47 Special start data instruction parameter setting value 828 928 1028 828 928 1028 Md 48 Start positioning data No setting valu
4. Q68ADV Q68ADI Compatibility Precautions for replacement 10 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ The voltage current cannot be 0 to 20mADC mixed for one module Input resistance value 250Q 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 O High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Analog input range Digital Maximum Digital Maximum 9 output value resolution output value resolution As concept of gain value is 0 to 10V 2 5mV 0 to 16000 0 625mV changed refer to Analog 0 to 5V 0 to 4000 1 25mV 0 to 0 416mV A Digital Converter Module boh 1 to 5V 1 0mV 12000 0 333mV User s Manual and then 9 10 to 10V 2 5mV 16000 to 16000 0 625mV confirm the I O characteristics U 4000 to 4000 Msi cla 0 375mV 12000to12000 0 333mV settings 0 to 20mA 5uA 1 66uA 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 4 to 20mA 4uA 1 33uA Current B range 4000 to 4000 1 37pA 12000 to 12000 1 33uA settings O Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Ambient temperature 0 to Ambient temperature 0 to 55 55 C Analog input Ambient Ambient With Without With Without range A i t temperature i t t t temperature empera ure empera ure 5545 C ure 55 C drift drift drift drift compensation compensation compensation compensatio
5. IN ETHS Read write Name Read write decimal decimal 0 D A conversion enable disable channel 0 D A conversion enable disable 1 CH1 Digital value 1 CH1 Digital value 2 CH2 Digital value 2 CH2 Digital value 3 CH3 Digital value 3 CH3 Digital value 4 CH4 Digital value RIW 4 CH4 Digital value 5 CH5 Digital value 5 CH5 Digital value R W 6 CH6 Digital value 6 CH6 Digital value 7 CH7 Digital value 7 CH7 Digital value 8 CH8 Digital value 8 CH8 Digital value 9 Resolution of digital value 9 10 1 Setting value check code EM System area Not used 11 CH2 Setting value check code 11 CH1 Setting value check code 12 CH3 Setting value check code 12 CH2 Setting value check code 13 CH4 Setting value check code R 13 CH3 Setting value check code 14 CH5 Setting value check code 14 CH4 Setting value check code 15 CH6 Setting value check code 15 CH5 Setting value check code 16 CH7 Setting value check code 16 CH6 Setting value check code R 17 CH8 Setting value check code 17 CH7 Setting value check code 18 CH8 Setting value check code 19 Error code 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 21 Setting range CH5 to CH8 22 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification 23 Offset gain setting mode R W Gain specification 24 Offset gain adjusted value specification 25 to System area Not used 157 158 mi Mode switching setting R W 159 160 to System area Not us
6. Device Device Device Device Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No No XO Watchdog timer error YO XO Module READY YO Temperature drift X1 A D conversion READY Y1 X1 Y1 compensation flag X2 Error flag Y2 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X3 Y3 X4 Y4 X4 Nol d 4 Not used x5 Y5 x5 use Y5 X6 Y6 X6 Y6 X7 Y7 X7 Y7 _ Not used High resolution mode x8 Y8 8 Y8 status flag Operating condition Operating condition X9 Y9 Y9 setting completed flag setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA XA flag YA User range write request a Channel change XB YB XB YB Channel change request completed flag XC YC XC Not used Not used Maximum value Maximum value XD YD RFRP RTOP instruction XD _ minimum value reset YD minimum value reset for interlock signal when completed flag request Not used gt A616AD is used A D conversion XE YE YE Not used remote I O station completed flag XF YF Error flag YF clear request X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 Not used X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 Direct access request X18 Y18 signal X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C Not used X1D RFRP RTOP instruction Y1D X1E for interlock signal when Y1E A616AD is used in X1F Y1F remote I O station 2 8 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 2 4 Bu
7. Address Address Name Read write Name Read write Dec Dec 0 A D conversion enable disable setting 0 A D conversion enable disable 1 Averaging processing specification 1 CH1 Time count averaging setting 2 CH1 Averaging time count 2 CH2 Time count averaging setting 3 CH2 Averaging time count 3 CH3 Time count averaging setting 4 CH3 Averaging time count RIW 4 CH4 Time count averaging setting RW 5 CH4 Averaging time count 5 CH5 Time count averaging setting 6 CH5 Averaging time count 6 CH6 Time count averaging setting 7 CH6 Averaging time count 7 CH7 Time count averaging setting 8 CH7 Averaging time count 8 CH8 Time count averaging setting 9 CH8 Averaging time count 9 Averaging processing specification 10 CH1 Digital output value 10 A D conversion completed flag 11 CH2 Digital output value 11 CH1 Digital output value 12 CH3 Digital output value 12 CH2 Digital output value 13 CHA Digital output value 13 CH3 Digital output value 14 CH5 Digital output value R 14 CH4 Digital output value 15 CH6 Digital output value 15 CH5 Digital output value R 16 CH7 Digital output value 16 CH6 Digital output value 17 CH8 Digital output value 17 CH7 Digital output value 18 Write data error code 18 CH8 Digital output value 19 A D conversion completed flag 19 Error code 20 Resolution setting R W 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 21 Setting range CH5 to CH8 22 Offset gain setting mode Offset sp
8. Signal name Terminal connector side Used for replacement when the Q series large type base unit and conversion adapters manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd cannot be used due to the restrictions such as a system configuration and an installation location I O cables with solderless terminal of the existing module can be continuously used without being aware of the existing wire size by rewiring the I O cables with solderless terminal to the connector terminal block converter module and connecting them by dedicated cables This method therefore is helpful when there is not a sufficient space The following figure shows the wiring method for using the connector terminal block converter module Terminal number on symbol terminal block side A phase pulse input 24V A phase pulse input 12V B20 0 MD D A phase pulse input 5V 19 11 19 i B phase pulse input 24V A18 12 E B phase pulse input 12V B18 2 m B phase pulse input 5V A17 13 a Preset input 24V B17 3 CH1 Preset input 12V A16 14 Preset input 5V B16 4 CTRLCOM A15 15 Function start 24V B15 5 Function start 12V 14 16 Function start 5V B14 6 EQU coincidence output point No 1 _ A06 TE AC10TB EQU coincidence output p
9. Device Device Device i Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No XO Watchdog timer error YO Module READY YO Not used CH1 Output enable X1 D A conversion READY Y1 1 disable flag CH2 Output enable X2 Y2 Y2 disable flag X3 Y3 Not used Y3 X4 Y4 Y4 X5 Y5 Y5 X6 Y6 Y6 Not used XT YT YT High resolution mode X8 Y8 Y8 status flag Operating condition Operating condition X9 Y9 Y9 setting completion flag setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA YA User range write request status flag Channel change XB YB YB Channel change request Not used completion flag Setting value change Setting value change XC YC YC completion flag request Synchronous output Synchronous output XD YD YD Not used mode flag request XE YE Not used YE Not used XF YF Error flag YF Error clear request X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B Output enable X1C Y1C X1D Y1D Not used X1E 3 40 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 6 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memories and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A62DA S1 Q62DAN Address decimal 0 CH1 Digital value CH2 Digital value CH1 Up
10. 0 Conversion enable disable specification 0 Conversion enable disable specification 1 Averaging processing selection 1 CH1 Time count averaging setting 2 CH1 Averaging time count 2 CH2 Time count averaging setting R W 3 CH2 Averaging time count 3 CH3 Time count averaging setting 4 CH3 Averaging time count RIW 4 CH4 Time count averaging setting 5 CH4 Averaging time count 5 6 CH5 Averaging time count 6 _ System area Not used 7 CH6 Averaging time count 7 8 CH7 Averaging time count 8 9 CH8 Averaging time count 9 Averaging processing selection R W 10 CH1 Detected temperature value 16bit 10 Conversion completion flag 11 CH2 Detected temperature value 16bit 11 CH1 Measured temperature value 16bit 12 CH3 Detected temperature value 16bit 12 CH2 Measured temperature value 16bit R 13 CH4 Detected temperature value 16bit 13 CH3 Measured temperature value 16bit 14 CH5 Detected temperature value 16bit 14 CH4 Measured temperature value 16bit 15 CH6 Detected temperature value 16bit 15 16 CH7 Detected temperature value 16bit 16 System area Not used 17 CH8 Detected temperature value 16bit 17 18 CH1 Detected temperature value L 18 19 32bit H 19 Error code R 20 CH2 Detected temperature value L 20 Setting range 21 32bit H R 21 22 CH3 Detected temperature value L 22 23 32bit H 23 24 CH4 Detected temperature value L 24 25 32bit H 25 26 CH5 Detected temperature value
11. Pointer number 0 to 15 Md 24 Axis in which the warning occurred 689 to 749 1358 to 1418 Md 25 Axis warning No 690 to 750 1359 to 1419 gt Md 26 Axis warning occurrence Hour minutes 2 691 to 751 1360 to 1420 00750 Md 16 Axis warning occurrence Hour D E Md 27 Axis warning occurrence Second 100 ms 5 QD75MLI Md 17 Axis warning occurrence 692 to 752 1361 to 1421 Minutes second Md 28 Warning history pointer 753 1422 7 33 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Item of AD75MO Buffer memory address 75 QD75MLI Md 29 Current feed value 801 901 1001 801 901 1001 802 902 1002 802 902 1002 Md 30 Machine feed value 803 903 1003 803 903 1003 804 904 1004 804 904 1004 Feedrate 805 905 1005 805 905 1005 Md 32 Valid M code 806 906 1006 808 908 1008 Md 33 Axis error No 807 907 1007 806 906 1006 Md 34 Axis warning No 808 908 1008 807 907 1007 Md 35 Axis operation status 809 909 1009 809 909 1009 810 910 1010 810 910 1010 Md 36 Current speed 811 911 4014 812 912 1012 812 912 1012 Ma 37 813 913 1013 813 913 1013 Md 38 Speed position
12. Q68RD3 G Compatibility Precautions for replacement 3 wire type O 16 bit signed binary 2000 to 8500 A 32 bit output is not available Value up to the first decimal place x 10 Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997 IEC751 1983 As the compliance standards for the JPt100 applicable RTD differ change the JIS C 1604 1981 RTD to the one that can be used with Ni100 the Q68RD3 G DIN 43760 1987 200 to 850 C 180 to 600 C 60 to 180 C 1 0 1 C A The resolution reduces The conversion speed is fixed at 320ms 8 channels A 320ms regardless of the number of enable channels 8 channels module O 1mA O Dielectric withstand Insulation Isolated area Isolation method voltage resistance Between RTD input and programmable Transformer 500VACrms 10MQ or controller isolation minute more using power supply S00VDC insulation Between RTD Transformer 1000VACrms resistance input and channel isolation minute tester Detected per channel O 16 points A The number of occupied I O points I O assignment intelligent 16 points has changed to 16 points 40 pin connector x Wiring change is required A6CON4 x Prepare the AGCON4 separately 0 3 mm 4 44 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item Cables between module and RTD A68RD3N Make sure that the conductor resistance value between the Pt100 and A68RD3N is 100 or less per conductor All channels become the same specifications 10Q or l
13. nares 6 4 6 2 2 Function comparison sssssssssssseseseese 6 6 6 2 3 signal comparison to programmable controller CPU _ 6 7 6 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison nennen ener nennen 6 8 ADOIST M M 6 9 6 3 1 Performance comparison ener nsns sn nne n nennen 6 9 6 3 2 Function comparison epa e t ree Red ee AR gece 6 11 6 3 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU 6 12 6 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii 2222220000000000 nennen 6 13 CHAPTER 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 1to7 54 7 1 List of Positioning Module Alternative Models for Replacement 7 1 Ta ADTOD SS 7 2 6 EEE A 0 rca Bis 00 7 2 74 JADT5P1 S3 P2 S3 P9 S98 ida dim edil e de a te d e e at a duties 7 3 7 4 1 Performance comparison nah ale LA aa aa Aaa A TEA 7 3 7 4 2 Function comparison sssssssssssesesssese sn
14. Q64RD Conductor i 2 Y 1 Pt100 B1 b1 1 O SLD Conductor Q64RD al 2 1 Pt100 B1 b1 1 SLD 0 60A The recalculation of internal current f consumption 5VDC is required 0 17kg O 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 7 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available Item Description A68RD4N Q64RD Precautions for replacement Conversion enable disable Enables disables a detection of e specification of each channel temperature The setting ranges of time and count averages differ Sampling averaging processing Processes the detected temperature by Refer to the RTD Input Module selection specified method Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual to check the specifications Detected temperature value Stores temperature data in the buffer storage memory DISC I RRR This function detects connected platinum o For the Q64RD disconnection i i i RTD or cable breakage is detected per channel Specification of platinum RTD 7 E Specifies a platinum RTD type used Range switching function Switches the measured temperature range O Outputs a warning when the temperature Warning output function O exceeds the set temperature range Converts a measured temperature value Scaling function into a percent value in set width Perform the error correction by Corrects an
15. 0 Conversion enable disable specification 0 Conversion enable disable setting CH1 Time count moving average time 1 Averaging processing selection 1 constant setting CH2 Time count moving average time 2 CH1 Averaging time count 2 constant setting E CH3 Time count moving average time 3 CH2 Averaging time count 3 constant setting CH4 Time count moving average time 4 CH3 Averaging time count 4 RAW constant setting R W CH5 Time count moving average time 5 CH4 Averaging time count 5 constant setting CH6 Time count moving average time 6 CH5 Averaging time count 6 constant setting CH7 Time count moving average time 7 CH6 Averaging time count 7 constant setting CH8 Time count moving average time 8 CH7 Averaging time count 8 constant setting 9 CH8 Averaging time count 9 System area Not used 10 CH1 Detected temperature value 16bit 10 Conversion completion flag 11 CH2 Detected temperature value 16bit 11 CH1 Measured temperature value 12 CH3 Detected temperature value 16bit 12 CH2 Measured temperature value 13 CH4 Detected temperature value 16bit 13 CH3 Measured temperature value 14 CH5 Detected temperature value 16bit 14 CH4 Measured temperature value 15 CH6 Detected temperature value 16bit 15 CH5 Measured temperature value 16 CH7 Detected temperature value 16bit 16 CH6 Measured temperature value R 17 CH8 Detected temperature value 16bit 17 CH7 Measured temperature value 18
16. Q68AD G Address Name Read write Dec 46 System area Not used 47 Input signal error detection extended input signal error detection setting R W 48 Warning output setting 49 Input signal error detection flag 50 Warning output flag Process alarm R 51 Warning output flag Rate alarm 52 System area Not used 53 Scaling enable disable setting R W 54 CH1 Scaling value to R 61 CH8 Scaling value 62 CH1 Scaling lower limit value 63 CH1 Scaling upper limit value to 76 CH8 Scaling lower limit value 77 CH8 Scaling upper limit value to 86 CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value 87 CH1 Process alarm lower upper limit value 88 CH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value 89 CH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value to 114 CH8 Process alarm lower lower limit value 115 CH8 Process alarm lower upper limit value 116 CH8 Process alarm upper lower limit value 117 CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value R W 118 CH1 Rate alarm warning detection period to 125 CH8 Rate alarm warning detection period 126 CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value 127 CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value to 140 CH8 Rate alarm upper limit value 141 CH8 Rate alarm lower limit value CH1 Input signal error detection setting 142 value CH1 Input signal error detection lower limit setting value to 150 CH1 Input signal error d
17. 150 CH1 Conversion setting value for L RW 151 disconnection detection H to 156 CH4 Conversion setting value for L 157 disconnection detection H 158 M Mode switching setting 159 160 3 conductor type CH1 Factory L 161 default offset value H 162 3 conductor type CH1 Factory L 163 default gain value H 164 3 conductor type CH1 User range L 165 settings offset value H 166 3 conductor type CH1 User range L 167 settings gain value H 168 3 conductor type CH1 User range L 169 settings offset resistance value H 170 3 conductor type CH1 User range L RIW 171 settings gain resistance value H 172 4 conductor type CH1 Factory L 173 default offset value H 174 4 conductor type CH1 Factory L 175 default gain value H 176 4 conductor type CH1 User range L 177 settings offset value H 178 4 conductor type CH1 User range L 179 settings gain value H 180 4 conductor type CH1 User range L 181 settings offset resistance value 182 4 conductor type CH1 User range L 183 settings gain resistance value H to 254 4 conductor type CH4 User range L 255 settings gain resistance value H ay 4 41 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 4 42 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 6 A68RD3N Replacement to the Q68RD3 G 4 6 1 Performance comparison Item Measuring method A68RD3N 3 wire type Output temperature conversion valu
18. ciiiiiiiiiiiiiii2 emen 4 57 4 8 A68RDAN Replacement to the Q64RD G 4 61 4 8 1 Performance comparison nsien dn REI ANN ERR Rea ANE Ane VE 4 61 4 8 2 Functional compariSOfi z onto Rede Nea EXER ARTI KORR Ga qe EE RARE n Ae SASA 4 65 4 8 3 signal comparison to programmable controller CPU _ 4 66 4 8 4 Buffer memory address comparison sss eee 4 67 CHAPTER 5 MULTIPLEXER REPLACEMENT 5 1to5 11 5 1 AGOMX acces ime oe o i a a A A LAN D LR EX A RA FL E a BORA 5 1 5 1 1 Performance comparison nennen aa nennen nennen AAA sess nnns nennen 5 1 52 M 5 5 5 2 1 Performance Comparison SARAGOSA 5 5 big 5 9 A 12 5 3 1 Performance comparison P 4000060 aa 5 9 6 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 6 1to6 13 6 1 List of High Speed Counter Module Alternative Models for Replacement 6 1 62 ADOT alee De 6 4 6 2 1 Performance COMPARISON 3 o ier iie a
19. AD61 AD61S1 User s Manual IB 64576 13J307 15 Positioning Module Type AD70 User s Manual IB 68106 130356 16 Positioning Module AD72 User s Manual 1B 68008 130333 Positioning Module A1SD75P1 S3 P2 S3 P3 S3 17 SH 3608 13JH86 AD75P1 S3 P2 S3 P3 S3 User s Manual Positioning Module Type A1SD75M1 M2 M3 18 IB 66715 13JH85 AD75M1 M2 M3 User s Manual 19 GX Configurator AP Version 1 Operating Manual 1B 80031 13JN44 Appendix 3 3 Q series No Manual name Manual number Model code 1 MELSEC Q Catalog L 08033E 2 MELSEC Q Data Book L 08029E 3 Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual SH 080055 13JR03 Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog Digital Converter Module With 4 SH 080277 13JR51 Signal Conditioning Function User s Manual 5 Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual SH 080054 13JR02 6 Channel Isolated Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual SH 080281 13JR52 Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module With Signal 7 P SH 080647ENG 13JR96 Conditioning Function User s Manual 8 Channel Isolated Thermocouple Input Module User s Manual SH 080795ENG 13JZ26 Thermocouple Input Module Channel Isolated Thermocouple Micro 9 SH 080141 13JR30 Voltage Input Module User s Manual 10 RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual SH 080142 13JR31 11 High Speed Counter Module User s Manual SH 080036 13J
20. Q68RD3 Read write value H 40 CH7 Offset temperature setting value 41 CH7 Gain temperature setting value RIW 42 CH8 Offset temperature setting value 43 CH8 Gain temperature setting value 44 to 45 System area Not used 46 Warning output enable disable setting R W 47 Warning output flag Process alarm 48 Warning output flag Rate alarm R 49 Disconnection detection flag 50to 57 CH1 to CH8 Scaling value 58 Scaling valid invalid setting R W 59 to 61 System area Not used 62 CH1 Scaling range lower limit value RW 63 CH1 Scaling range upper limit value to 77 CH8 Scaling range upper limit value 78 CH1 Scaling width lower limit value R W 79 CH1 Scaling width upper limit value to 93 CH8 Scaling width upper limit value 94 CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value 95 CH1 Process alarm lower upper limit value R W 96 CH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value 97 CH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value to 125 CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value CH1 to CH8 Rate alarm warning detection 126 to 133 period R W 134 CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value 135 CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value to 149 CH8 Rate alarm lower limit value R W 150 to 157 System area Not used 158 to 159 switching setting R W 160 to 163 System area Not used 164 Conversion setting for disconnection
21. J2S amplifier J2S amplifier and MR J J2 J2S amplifier MR J2HBUSLIM O x O MR J2HBUSLIM A x MR HBUSLIM x x x MR J2CN1 MR J2CN1 A 1 MR HBCNS x x x 1 Connector set for making the cable by user Table 2 With the servo amplifier MR H Between QD75M and MR H Between AD75M and MR H Between MR H amplifier and SSCNET cable amplifier amplifier MR H amplifier MR J2HBUSLIM x x x MR J2HBUSLIM A O x x MR HBUSLIM x MR J2CN1 x x x MR J2CN1 A M O x x MR HBCNS x 1 Connector set for making the cable by user 7 42 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 6 AD70 7 6 1 Performance specifications comparison O Compatible A Partial change required Incompatible Precautions for QD73A1 replacement Number of control axes 1 axis 1 axis FEE Capacity 1 data 1 data Positioning data Sequence program Sequence program Position control mode Position control mode Mode Positioning two phase trapezoidal Positioning two phase trapezoidal positioning positioning Speed position control switch mode Speed position control switch mode Position control mode Position control mode System Absolute system incremental system Absolute system incremental system Speed position control switch mode Speed position control switch mode Incremental system Incremental system Position 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse co
22. Q68AD G Compatibility Precautions for replacement 10ms channel Sampling cycle O 20ms Voltage 15V current 30mA 8 channels module Up to 50 000 times Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply transformer isolation Between channels transformer isolation Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VACrms for 1 minute O Between analog input channels 1000VACrms for 1 minute Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 10MQ or more O Between analog input channels 500VDC 10MQ or more 16 points I O occupied points has changed to I O assignment intelligent 16 points 16 points 40 pin connector x Within 0 3mm x Wiring change is required x 0 46A The recalculation of internal current consumption 5VDC is required 0 16kg 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 8 2 Function comparison Item A D conversion enable disable Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the A D conversion for each channel By disabling the conversion for the channels that are not used the sampling time can be shortened A68ADN Q68AD G O With functions Without functions Precautions for replacement Sampling processing The A D conversion for analog input values is performed successively for each channel and the digital output value is output upon each conversion
23. __ 3 50t00 C SN DE 1 5 S 0 to 300 C 2 2 5 0 4 12 5 300 to 1600 2 2 0 C 0 3 9 5 1600 to 1760 a 7 lt 3 270to 200 C DEL 1L 5 2 Larger value of 0 5 or 0 5 Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 2 200 to 0 C 11 0 K of measured temperature of measured temperature 9 Larger value of 0 5 C or 0 25 Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 to 1200 C 9 0 C of measured temperature 0 02 of measured temperature 1200 to 1370 C C 1 5 270to 200 C 3S 3 Larger value of 0 5 or Larger value of 0 06 C or 200 to 0 C 2 8 5 0 5 of measured temperature 0 15 of measured temperature o Larger value of 0 5 C or Larger value of 0 06 C or P 0 to 900 C 6 75 0 25 of measured temperature 0 02 of measured temperature 900 to1000 C ae MIS LEE 3 210to 40 C DEL ___ 3 J Larger value of 0 5 C or Larger value of 0 06 C or 5 625 0 25 of measured temperature 0 02 of measured temperature mes 750 to 1200 C fw 3 NENNEN LEE 3 270 to 200 C LEN 3 Larger value of 0 5 C or Larger value of 0 06 C or 200 to 0 C 6 0 C 0 5 of measured temperature 0 1 of measured temperature Larger value of 0 5 C or Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 to 350 C 2 2 625 0 25 of measured temperature 0 02 of measured tem
24. connectors Included Not included Applicable ra 0 3m or less wire size Servo READY e Stop signal Near point dog signal External Upper signal input signal Lower limit signal Speed position switching 2 2 command Pulse frequency Pulse frequency ae Open collector Open collector C Positioning feedback pulse The specification has improved 100kpulse s or less 200kpulse s or less ik input Upward compatibility TTL 100kpulse s or less TTL 200kpulse s or less Differential 100kpulse s or less Differential 1Mpulse s or less Servo ON Speed command analog signal T 52 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 6 6 Precautions for the replacement of the AD70 by the QD73A1 The following shows precautions for the replacement of the AD70 by the QD73A1 Item AD70 QD73A1 Precautions Number of occupied slots 1 slot 2 slots 1 48 points Number of occupied I O Mas I O assignment I O assignment Special function module 2 points First half slot Empty 16 points 32 points points Second half slot Intelli 32 points Addresses are partly changed Buffer memory address Pao 3 New items are added due to the specification change Parameter setting of a CPU module Mode settin Hardware switch settin 4 a I O assignment gt Switch setting LED Items indicated with the LEDs differ
25. A68AD Q68ADVII Device Device Signal name No No XO Watchdog timer error YO X1 conversion READY Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X4 Y4 X5 Y5 X6 Y6 X7 Y7 X8 Y8 x9 Y9 XA YA XB YB XC YC XD YD Not used XE YE XF YF X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Y1D X1E Y1E X1F Y1F Signal name Not used Device Device Signal name Signal name No No XO Module READY YO Temperature drift x1 1 compensation flag X2 Y2 X3 Y3 x4 4 Not used x5 o Y5 X6 Y6 X7 Y7 High resolution mode X8 Y8 status flag x9 Operating condition Y9 Operating condition setting completed flag setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA User range write request flag Channel change XB YB Channel change request completed flag XC Not used Not used Maximum value Maximum value XD minimum value reset YD minimum value reset completed flag request A D conversion XE YE Not used completed flag XF flag YF clear request 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the Anal
26. Pointer number 0 to 15 Md 19 Axis in which the error occurred 624 to 684 1293 to 1353 Md 20 Axis error No 625 to 685 1294 to 1354 21 error occurrence Hour minute gt QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Md 11 Axis error occurrence 2 626 to 686 1295 to 1355 Hour Md 22 Axis error occurrence Second 100 ms QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Md 12 Axis error occurrence 627 to 687 1296 to 1356 Minutes second Md 23 Error history pointer 688 1357 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of AD75PO S3 PO S3 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Common for axis 1 2 3 Common for axis 1 2 3 4 Pointer number 0 to 15 Md 24 Axis in which the warning occurred 689 to 749 1358 to 1418 Md 25 Axis warning No 690 to 750 1359 to 1419 Md 26 Axis warning occurrence Hour minutes 5 QD75POIN QD75DON Md 16 Axis warning 69110791 1360 to 1420 occurrence Hour Md 27 Axis warning occurrence Second 100 ms QD75PEIN QD75DEIN Md 17 Axis warning 3692 to 752 1361 to 1421 occurrence Minutes second 28 Warning history pointer 753 1422 T 15 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Item of AD75PLI S3 Buffer memory address AD75PLI S3 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN
27. Special start stop Execute it separately for the start two times Indirect designation In the QD75MLI the start block area on the buffer memory is expanded to five blocks 0 to 4 Each start block can be directly designated with positioning start No 7000 to 7004 Block transfer Positioning data I F With the AD75MLI this interface is used to set positioning data Nos 101 to 600 that do not exist on the buffer memory Since all positioning data can be set in the buffer memory with the QD75MLI this function is deleted Start history during errors The contents are the same as the start history Therefore the QD75MLI stores only the start history System monitor data Module name OS type OS version These data were deleted because they can be displayed in system monitor Module s detailed information of GX Developer Refer to GX Developer Operating Manual f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 Changed function from AD75M1 AD75M2 AD75M3 In case of using the following functions with 75 make sure that there is no operation problems when converted to QD75MLI Changed functions Change description Software stroke limit function 1 The software stroke limit check of arc address is carried out only when a sub point is designated It is not carried out when a center point is designated 2 The software stroke limit check during speed control is carried out in the following case
28. the 6 extension base unit or shifting to the QD75M system 7 3 AD72 No Q series alternative model is available Consider mounting the existing module on the QAGLIB extension base unit replacing with two QD73A1 modules or shifting to the QD75 system Note that with two QD73A1 modules after the replacement the interpolation function cannot be performed Positioning AD75P3 S3 module f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 4 AD75P1 S3 P2 S3 P3 S3 7 4 1 Performance comparison O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Model QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75P4N Compat Precautions for AD75P1 S3 AD75P2 S3 AD75P3 S3 QD75D1N QD75D2N QD75D4N ibility replacement No of control axes 1 2 3 1 2 4 O No of positioning data 600 axis 600 axis items XT 3 4 axis 2 2 axis linear Position x O x linear interpolation control interpolation O interpolation available functions 2 axis circular x interpolation Position O O control Speed nm O O Positioning control system Speed position O switching control 7 3 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75P4N Compat Precautions for AD75P1 S3 AD75P2 S3 AD75P3 S3 QD75D1N QD75D2N QD75D4N ibility replacement lt
29. 16 bit signed binary Data part 12 bit Digital output 48 to 4047 2048 to 2047 Setting is enabled for each channel Input Analog Maximum Digital resolution output value to 10 2 5mV 1 4000 Ooi to 5 1 25mV 1 4000 oltage 1 to 5 1 0mV 1 4000 V 2 my 2000 to 2000 10 to 10 5 0mV 1 4000 I O characteristics 5 to 5 2 5mV 1 4000 maximum resolution 0 to 2000 0 to 20 10pA 1 2000 2000 to 0 0 to 20 1 4000 0 to 4000 Current 4 to 20 4pA 1 4000 2000 to 2000 mA 1000 to 3000 20 to 20 20 1 2000 1000 to 1000 0 to 4000 20 to 20 10pA 1 4000 2000 to 2000 When using A616AD only 0 to 10V 10 to 10V Range 0 3 5V to 5V 20 to 20mA Digital value 12 0 to 5V 1 to 5V Range 0 6 Overall accuracy 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA Digital value 24 When using combination with any of A60MX AGOMXR A60MXRN the accuracy of each range of A616AD is 0 3 Digital output value 12 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68ADV Q68ADI 10 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ 0 to 20mADC Input resistance value 250Q Compatibility Precautions for replacement The voltage current cannot be mixed for one module 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 163
30. 50 0 0050 70 0 0070 4 34 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item Cable between module and RTD A68RD3N Make sure that the conductor resistance value between the Pt100 and A68RD3N is 100 or less per conductor All channels become the same specifications 100 or less Conductor A68RD3N A Lay wiring so that the following conditions are met Pt100k 2 1 Conductor resistance value S 10 Q 2 Conductor resistance value 10 Q 3 Conductor resistance value S 10 Q b 3 SLD Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 94A Weight 0 43kg 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64RD G Compatibility Precautions for replacement The conductor resistance value must meet the condition of 1 2 lt 2kQ or less In the case of 3 conductor type the difference between 1 and 2 in the conductor resistance value must be 100 or less Q64RD G a1 2 TN Al Pt100 B1 b1 1 O SLD Conductor Q64RD G a1 2 Al Pt100 B1 b1 1 SLD 0 62A 0 20kg 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 5 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available Item Description A68RD3N Q64RD G Precautions for replacement Conversion enable disable Enables disa
31. A module change is made without the system being stopped Replaceable modules during online are a process CPU anda redundant CPU For the Q68AD G the resolution for voltage and current is 1 4000 in the normal resolution mode while the resolution for the voltage from 10 to 10V is 1 16000 and the resolution for the voltage in other ranges and current is 1 12000 in the high resolution mode 2 23 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 4 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module With Signal Conditioning Function User s Manual A68AD Q68AD G Device Device Signal name No No XO Watchdog timer error YO X1 A D conversion READY Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X4 Y4 X5 Y5 X6 Y6 XT X8 Y8 X9 Y9 XA YA XB YB XC YC XD YD Not used XE YE XF YF X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Y1D X1E 1 Walle Signal name Not used Device Device Signal name Signal name No No XO Module READY YO x1 Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 Not used
32. Offset gain setting mode 22 CH6 Digital value 22 5 Offset specification al Offset gain setting mode R W 23 CH7 Digital value R W 23 CM Gain specification 24 CH8 Digital value 24 Offset gain adjusted value specification 25 CH9 Digital value 25 26 CHA Digital value 26 27 CHB Digital value 27 28 CHC Digital value 28 29 CHD Digital value 29 System area Not used 30 CHE Digital value 30 31 CHF Digital value 31 32 32 to System area Not used to 47 47 3 17 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 16DAV Q68DAVN Address i Address J Name Read write Name Read write decimal decimal 48 CHO Setting value check code 48 49 CH1 Setting value check code 49 50 CH2 Setting value check code 50 51 CH3 Setting value check code 51 52 CH4 Setting value check code 52 53 CH5 Setting value check code 53 54 CH6 Setting value check code 54 55 CH7 Setting value check code 55 56 CH8 Setting value check code RAN 56 57 CH9 Setting value check code System area Not used i 58 CHA Setting value check code 58 59 CHB Setting value check code 59 60 CHC Setting value check code 60 61 CHD Setting value check code 61 62 CHE Setting value check code 62 63 CHF Setting value check code 63 to 157 158 159 Mode switching setting R W 160 to System area Not used 201 202 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value 203 CH1 Industrial shipment s
33. 21 21 Setting range CH5 to CH8 22 22 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification RIW 23 23 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification 24 24 25 25 26 System area Not used 26 System area Not used 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 CH1 Maximum value 31 31 CH1 Minimum value 32 32 CH2 Maximum value 33 33 CH2 Minimum value 34 Write data error code R W 34 CH3 Maximum value 35 CH3 Minimum value 36 CH4 Maximum value 37 CH4 Minimum value 38 CH5 Maximum value 39 CH5 Minimum value 40 CH6 Maximum value 41 CH6 Minimum value 42 CH7 Maximum value 43 CH7 Minimum value 44 CH8 Maximum value 45 CH8 Minimum value 2 17 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68ADVII Address Name Read write Dec 46 to System area Not used 157 158 Mode switching setting R W 159 160 to System area Not used 201 202 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value 203 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value 204 CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value 205 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value 206 CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value 207 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value 208 CH4 Industrial shipment settings offset value 209 CH4 Industrial shipment settings gain value 210 CH5 Industrial shipment settings offset value 211 CH5 Industrial shipment settings gain value 212 CH6 Industri
34. 50ms channel Isolation method Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels non isolation 1MQ resistor isolation Disconnection detection Available Number of temperature sensor input points 15 points module A60MXT AG0MXTN The A60MXT and A60MXTN can be mounted up to seven in total to one A616TD Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points External connection system 38 point terminal block External device connector sold separately Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59N cm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 5VDC 1 0A Weight 4 13 0 85kg 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68TD G H02 Q68TD G H01 270 to 1820 C Compatibility O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Precautions for replacement 16 bit signed binary Scaling value 16 bit signed binary 2700 to 18200 value up to the first decimal place x 10 Refer to Section 4 3 1 2 As they depend on the applicable thermocouple and thermocouple standard refer to Section 4 3 1 2 and check the specifications Use the thermocouple that can be used on the Q68TD G H02 H01 Refer to Section 4 3 1 2 2 As they depend on the applicabl
35. Analog input Normal resolution mode High resolution mode As concept of gain value is range Digital Maximum Digital Maximum changed refer to Analog output value resolution output value resolution 2 Digital Converter Module 0 to 10V 2 5mV 0 to 16000 0 625mV 0 to 5V 0 to 4000 1 25mV 0 416mV Users Manualliandithen o See 110 5V 10mV 0 333mV confirm the I O characteristics 9 10 to 10V 2 5mV 16000 to 16000 0 625mV 4000 to 4000 wer range d 0 375mV 12000t012000 0 333mV settings 0 to 20mA 5uA 1 66uA 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 4 to 20mA 4 1 33uA O Current B d id 4000 to 4000 1 37 12000 12000 1 3 settings Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Ambient temperature 0 to Ambient temperature 0 to 55 55 Analog input Ambient Ambient With Without With Without range i A t temperature i t i t temperature emper ure empora ure 2545 C empeg ure 25 5 drift drift drift drift compensation compensation compensation compensation 0 to 10V 101 0 3 0 4 0 1 us 48 digits 64 digits 16 digits 10V 0 to 5V Voltage 2 O 1 to 5V users oe 0 3 0 4 10 196 Semngs 412 digits 16 digits 4 digits 0 to 0 3 0 4 0 1 20 36 digits 48 digits 12 digits 4to Current 20mA users range settings The conversion speed of Q68ADV I to A68AD has become quick And then on 80us channel A68AD the noise that did not When
36. 3 18 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 4 A62DA Replacement to the Q62DAN 3 4 1 Performance comparison Item A62DA Maximum setting value Digital input Voltage 2000 Current 1000 Voltage 10 to 0 to 10VDC External load resistance value 500Q to 1MQ Analog output Current 4 to 20mADC External load resistance value 0Q to 600Q Current output is usable by 20 to 20mA Analog output Voltage Current 2000 10V 1000 5V 20 0 4mA 1000 12mA 2000 Digital input I O characteristics Voltage 5mV 1 2000 Current 20pA 1 1000 Maximum resolution Overall accuracy accuracy at maximum analog output value 1 voltage 0 1V current 0 2mA Within 15ms 2 channels Maximum conversion speed same time for one channel Note Time from when the digital input is written to when the specified analog voltage current is reached Voltage 12V Absolute maximum output Current 28mA Note Max output voltage and current restricted by output protection circuit Number of analog output points Number of writes to EIPPROM Output short protection 5 2 channels module 3 19 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q62DAN Compatibility Precautions for replacement ee According to the I O conversion 16 bit signed binary characteristics used m
37. 4 Y4 Not used X5 Y5 X6 Y6 High resolution mode XT YT status flag X8 Warming output signal Y8 X9 Operating condition Y9 Operating condition setting completed flag setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA User range write request flag Channel change XB YB Channel change request completed flag Input signal error XC Not used detection signal Maximum value Maximum value XD minimum value reset YD minimum value reset completed flag request A D conversion XE YE Not used completed flag Error flag YF Error clear request 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 4 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module With Signal Conditioning Function User s Manual A68AD Q68AD G Address Address Name Read write Name Read write Dec Dec 0 Number of channels 0 A D conversion enable disable 5 1 Average time Average number of times 1 Averaging processing specification 1 b Moving average Time constant settings e CH2 Average time Average number of times 2 CH1 Averaging time count 2 Moving average Ti
38. 7 8 7 4 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU 7 11 7 4 4 Buffer memory address comparison iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii 2200220000000000 7 12 7 4 5 Interface specifications comparison with external devices 7 20 CONECTA REUS hates 7 21 7 5 1 Performance comparison 2 eiit dels 7 21 7 5 2 Function comparison 7 24 7 5 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU 7 27 7 5 4 Buffer memory address comparison ccccccciccciccaccccccaccccsscacccesaaaosesaasosenananannananauuaa 7 28 7 5 5 Interface specifications comparison with external devices 7 40 126 JADTO S nsu 7 43 7 6 1 Performance specifications comparison cceceeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecacaeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeseciecaeeeeeess 7 43 7 6 2 F nction comparison 3 2 0 ee de QR EE ers 7 45 7 6 3 I O signals comparison to CPU module sse emm ennemis 7 49 7 6 4 Buffer memory address comparison cccccccccacccsscaccsseaaaaccanasssoaaasenasaassennaaeeananaanena 7 50 7 6 5 Interface specifica
39. Averaging processing For each channel A D conversion values are averaged for the set number of times or set amount of time and the average value is output as a digital value Moving average takes the average of the specified number of digital output values measured per sampling time The setting range of average time and count differ Refer to Q68AD G User s Manual and then confirm the specifications Primary delay filter A digital output value is smoothed according to the preset time constant Maximum and minimum values hold function The maximum and minimum values of the digital output values are retained in the module Resolution mode The resolution can be switched according to the application The resolution mode is batch set for all the channels Input signal error detection function The voltage current outside the setting range is detected Warning output function 1 Process alarm A warning is output if a digital output value falls outside the setting range 2 Rate alarm A warning is output if the varying rate of a digital output value falls outside the preset varying rate range Scaling function Conversion of A D conversion values to preset percentage values and loading into the buffer memory is available Programming steps for the scaling can be eliminated Online module change A module change is made without the system being stopped
40. Counter value y5 X5 EM Counter value large y5 CH1 P preset coincidence Point No 2 detection reset command x6 CH2 Counter value less Y6 X6 Cmi Counter value Y6 CH1 Counter function coincidence Point No 2 selection start command x7 CH2 External preset request x eH Counter value small Y7 CH1 Coincidence signal detection Point No 2 No 2 reset command CH2 Count lue CH2 Coincid ignal xe Y8 X8 ounter value large oincidence signa Point No 1 No 1 reset command x9 Y9 EM Counter value Y9 2 Preset command coincidence Point No 1 XA YA XA CHEZ Counter value small YA CH2 Coincidence signal Point No 1 enable command XB YB XB cH2 Exetel presetrequest YB CH2 Down count command detection EN CH2 Counter value large YC CH2 Count enable command Point No 2 xD YD xD Counter value YD CH2 coincidence Point No 2 detection reset command XE YE XE ooe Counter value small YE CH2 Counter functor Point No 2 selection start command CH2 Coincid ignal XF Fuse broken detection flag YF eine lanes sida No 2 reset command x10 Y10 CH1 Coincidence signal reset command X11 Y11 CH1 Preset command CH1 Coincidence signal X12 Y12 Not used output enable command X13 Y13 CH1 Down count command X14 Y14 CH1 Count enable X15 Y15 CH1 Present value read request x16 Y16 CH1 detection reset command x17 17 2 Coincidence signal reset command X18 Y18 CH2 Preset comm
41. Replaceable modules during online are a process CPU anda redundant CPU 1 For the A68ADN the resolution for voltage and current can be set to 1 4000 1 8000 1 12000 For the Q68AD G the resolution for voltage and current is 1 4000 in the normal resolution mode while the resolution for the voltage from 10 to 10V is 1 16000 and the resolution for the voltage in other ranges and current is 1 12000 in the high resolution mode 2 55 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 8 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module With Signal Conditioning Function User s Manual A68ADN Q68AD G Device Device Device Device Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No No XO Watchdog timer error YO XO Module READY YO X1 A D conversion READY Y1 x1 Y1 X2 flag Y2 2 Y2 X3 Y3 X3 Y Not used 3 X4 Y4 X4 Y4 Not used X5 Y5 X5 Y5 X6 Y6 X6 Y6 High resolution mode XT YT XT YT status flag 4 Not used X8 Y8 X8 Warming output signal Y8 Operating condition Operating condition X9 Y9 X9 Y9 setting completed
42. Sampling counter function m sampling time set The function allows storing the present value in the periodic pulse count present Periodic pulse counter function value and the previous value in the periodic pulse count previous value for each period time set 6 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 6 3 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the High Speed Counter Module User s Manual 06151 QD62 H02 Device Signal name Device Signal name No No g CH1 Counter value greater YO 1 Gell Counter value v1 coincidence 2 CH1 Counter value less Y2 x3 CH1 External preset request Y3 detection X4 CH2 Counter value greater Y4 X5 one Counter value Y5 coincidence X6 CH2 Counter value less Y6 x7 CH2 External preset request 7 detection Not used X8 Y8 9 Y9 XA YA XB YB XC YC XD YD XE ME x10 Y10 CH1 Coincidence signal reset command X11 Y11 CH1 Preset command CH1 Coincidence signal X12 Y12 Not used output enable command X13 Y13 CH1 Down count command X14 Y14 CH1 Count enable X15 Y15 CH1 Present value read request x16 Y16 CH1 extemal preset detection reset command X17 Y17 CH2 Coincidence signal reset c
43. X3 X3 Y3 X4 Y4 X4 Nol d 4 Not used x5 Y5 x5 use Y5 X6 Y6 X6 Y6 X7 Y7 X7 Y7 Not used High resolution mode X8 Y8 X8 Y8 status flag Operating condition Operating condition X9 Y9 Y9 setting completed flag setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA XA flag YA User range write request a Channel change XB YB XB YB Channel change request completed flag XC YC XC Not used Not used Maximum value Maximum value XD YD REFRP RTOP instruction XD _ minimum value reset YD minimum value reset Not used for interlock signal when completed flag request A68ADN is used in A D conversion XE YE YE Not used remote I O station completed flag XF YF Error flag YF clear request X10 Y10 Not used X11 Y11 X12 Y12 Error reset X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 Not used X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D instruction Y1D 1 for interlock signal when Y1E A68ADN is used in X1F Y1F remote I O station 2 48 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 7 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual A68ADN Q68ADVII
44. detection CH1 CH4 Conversion setting for disconnection 165 R W detection CH5 CH8 CH1 to CH8 Conversion setting value for 166 10173 disconnection detection 174 to 189 System area 190 CH1 Factory default offset value 191 CH1 Factory default gain value 192 CH1 User range settings offset value 193 CH1 User range settings gain value RW 194 CH1 User range settings offset L 195 resistance value H 196 CH1 User range settings gain L 197 resistance value H to CH8 User range settings gain resistance 253 R W 4 50 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 7 A68RD4N Replacement to the Q64RD 4 7 1 Performance comparison Item Measuring method A68RD4N 4 wire type Output temperature conversion value 16 bit signed binary 1800 to 6000 Value up to the first decimal place x 10 32 bit signed binary 180000 to 600000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 Applicable platinum RTD Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC 751 am2 JIS C1604 1989 DIN 43760 1980 JPt100 JIS C1604 1981 Measured Pt100 180 to 600 C 27 10 to 313 710 t t p JPt100 7180 to 600 C E 25 80 to 317 280 1 Accuracy accuracy at full scale Resolution 0 025 C Conversion speed 40ms channel Number of analog input points 8 channels module Output current for temperature detection 1mA Isolation method Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply
45. detection flag request CH6 Disconnection X8 Y8 Y8 CH4 Gain setting request detection flag x9 CH7 Disconnection Y9 Operating condition Y9 Operating condition detection flag setting completion signal setting request CH8 Disconnection Offset gain setting mode XA YA User range write request detection flag status flag XB YB Not used YB Disconnection detection XC YC YC signal Not used XD YD Interlock signal for the Warning output signal YD RFRP and RTOP Conversion completion XE ve ME instructions when the flag A68RD3N is used in XF YF Error flag YF Error clear request remote I O station X10 Y10 F Not used X11 Y11 X12 Not used Y12 Error code reset flag X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A Not used X1B Y1B X1C X1D_ Interlock signal for the Y1D X1E RFRP RTOP VANE instructions when the X1F A68RD3N is used in Y1F remote I O station 4 28 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 4 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memories and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A68RD3N Q64RD Address Address decimal Read write decimal Read write ecima ecima
46. igo Isolation Dielectric withstand Insulation Specific isolated area method voltage resistance Between the I O terminal and Photocoupler programmable controller power supply isolation 1780VrmsAC 3 cycles 500VDC Transformer Altitude 2000m 10MQ or more Between analog channels isolation 16 points is Q64AD GH cannot set to 0 point I O assignment intelligent 16 points with I O assignment 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm x Wiring change is required R1 25 3 A solderless terminal with sleeve can not be used x The recalculation of internal 0 89A A current consumption 5VDC is required 0 2kg 5 10 5 MULTIPLEXER REPLACEMENT 1 Analog output voltage to the A616AD processing analog input values of the AG0MX The I O characteristics and the maximum resolution are to be the same as in the specifications of the A616AD as below Analog input range Maximum resolution Digital output value 0 to 10 2 5mV 1 4000 to 5 1 25mV 1 4000 0 to 4000 Voltage V 1 to 5 1 0mV 1 4000 2000 to 2000 10 to 10 5 0mV 1 4000 5 to 5 2 5mV 1 4000 5 11 6 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 6 1 List of High Speed Counter Module Alternative Models for Replacement Production discontinuation Transition to Q series Product Model Remarks Restrictions 1 External wiring Terminal block wiring gt Connector wiring Cab
47. operation stop 1 Peripheral side emergency stop is deleted from the stop causes of Stop group 2 sudden stop selection Test mode fault in the stop causes of Stop group 3 sudden stop selection is changed to be in the stop causes of Stop group 2 sudden stop selection Stop QD75 peripheral is added to the stop causes of Stop group 3 sudden stop selection 3 Error code 100 Peripheral device stop during operation is deleted 4 Programmable controller CPU error occurrence is added to the stop causes of Stop group 2 Sudden stop selection N READY signal AD75PLI S3 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN OFF Normal READY Not READY WDT error ON Not READY WDT error Normal READY Manual pulse generator operation The No of connectable manual pulse generator is changed from 1generator 1axis to 1generator 1 module Axis operation status Step stopped is changed to Stopped and Step error occurring is changed to Error occurring Continuous path control AD75PLI S3 If the reference axis operates in reverse direction the control is internally changed into the continuous positioning control restart after deceleration stop QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Even if the reference axis operates in reverse direction with interpolation the control remains as the continuous path control In single axis operation the operation is the same as that of the AD75PLI S3 Near pass For the continuous path
48. output value resolution output value resolution 5V range Q68ADV can obtain 0 to 10V 2 5mV 0 to 16000 0 625mV A equivalent resolution or more 0 to 5V 0 to 4000 1 25mV 0 to 12000 0 416mV than A616AD b ting in 10 Vollace 15V 1 0mV 0 333mV lt n y setting in a 10 to 10V 2 5mV 16000 to 16000 0 625mV 2 to 10V range high resolution User range 4000 to 4000 mode or user range settings 0 375mV 12000 to 12000 0 333mV When using A616AD in 20 to 0 to 20mA 5uA 1 66uA 20 range use Q68ADI in Ho 20m 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 ECT Current T cm H 9H user range Ser rang 14000 to 4000 1 37pA 12000 to 12000 1 33uA settings 5 2 5 MULTIPLEXER REPLACEMENT Overall accuracy 0 3 Digital output value 12 Absolute Voltage 15V maximum input Current 30mA Analog input points 16 channels module Multiplexer element IC relay Isolation method Between the input terminal and programmable controller photocoupler isolation Between channels non isolated 1MQ resistor isolation Occupied I O points 16 points treated as empty slots 0 point setting is possible by I O assignment Connected terminal 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59Necm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 65A We
49. setting completion signal setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA YA User range write request status flag XB YB Not used YB Disconnection detection XC YC k YC signal Not used XD YD Interlock signal for the Warning output signal YD RFRP and RTOP Conversion completion XE EE YE instructions when the flag A616TD is used in XF YF Error flag YF Error clear request Not used remote I O station Detected temperature X10 Y10 value LED display request signal x11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 Not used X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D_ Interlock signal for the Y1D X1E RFRP and RTOP Y1E instructions when the 1 A616TD is used in Y1F remote I O station 4 8 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of buffer memories and sequence programs refer to the Thermocouple Input Module Channel Isolated Thermocouple Micro Voltage Input Module User s Manual A616TD Q64TD Address Address Read write Name Read write hex hex 00 Data format selection 00 Conversion enable disable setting 01 Error code storage 01 CH1 Time count averaging setting Error occurrence AGOM
50. 0 to 10 0 to 20 Oto 5 0to 5 0 to 20 1to 5 4 to 20 1to 5 10 to 10 20 to 20 10 to 10 5to 5 20 to 20 10 to 10 20 to 20 5to 5 5to 5 20 to 20 Overall accuracy 0 3 Digital output value 12 Absolute Voltage 15V maximum input Current 30mA Analog input points 16 channels module Multiplexer element Photo MOS relay Isolation method Between the input terminal and programmable controller photocoupler isolation Between channels photo MOS relay isolation Between channels dielectric withstand voltage 400VDC accuracy guarantee 400VDC Occupied I O points 16 points treated as empty slots 0 point setting is possible by I O assignment Connected terminal 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59Necm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 35A Weight 0 56kg 5 5 5 MULTIPLEXER REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64AD GH Compatibility Precautions for replacement 10 to 0 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ O to 20mADC Input resistance value 2500 A The minus current cannot be input An
51. 01 0 011 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Specifications Q64TD Measured temperature 1700 to 0 to 600 600 to 800 800 to 1700 range C 1820 Conversion accuracy at 3 0 2 5 25 0 5 C Temperature characteristics o 0 4 0 4 Measured temperature 1600 to 50 to 0 0 to 300 300 to 1600 range C 1760 Conversion accuracy at 2 5 2 0 25 0 5 C Temperature characteristics S 0 4 0 3 Measured temperature 1600 to 50 to 0 0 to 300 300 to 1600 range C 1760 Conversion accuracy at 2 5 2 0 25 0 5 C Temperature characteristics 3 0 4 0 3 Measured temperature 1200 to 270 to 200 200 to 0 0 to 1200 range C 1370 Conversion accuracy at Larger value of 0 5 or 0 5 Larger value of 0 5 C or 25 0 5 C of measured temperature 0 25 of measured temperature Temperature characteristics Larger value of 0 06 C or Larger value of 0 06 C or C 0 2 of measured temperature 0 02 of measured temperature Measured temperature 270 to 200 200 to 0 0 to 900 900 to 1000 range C Conversion accuracy at Larger value of 0 5 or 0 5 Larger value of 0 5 C or 25 0 5 C of measured temperature 0 25 of measured temperature Larger value of 0 06 C or Temperature characteristics Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 15 of measured
52. 12mA 1000 10V 2000 Voltage 5mV 1 2000 Current 20pA 1 1000 Maximum resolution Overall accuracy Accuracy in respect to maximum digital 1 20 output value Maximum conversion speed Max 2 5ms channel Response time Voltage 15V Absolute maximum input d current 30mA N 19 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68AD G Compatibility Precautions for replacement 10 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ or more o 0 to 20mADC Input resistance value 250Q 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Input Analog input range Digital Maximum Digital Maximum output value resolution output value resolution 0 to 10V 2 5mV 0 to 16000 0 625mV 0 to 5V 0 to 4000 1 25mV 0 416mV 0 to 12000 1 to 5V 1 0mV 0 333mV As concept of gain value is Volt E 1 i de 1000 to 4500 1 0mV 3000 to 13500 0 333mV A changed refer to Q6BAD G Expanded mode User s Manual and then 10 to 10V 2 5mV 16000 to 16000 0 625mV 4000 to 4000 confirm the I O characteristics Users range setting 0 375mV 12000 to 12000 0 333mV 0 to 20mA 5uA 1 66 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 4 to 20mA 4uA 1 33pA
53. 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q62DAN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between output channels non isolation Between external power supply and analog output transformer isolation Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or 16 points A The number of occupied I O points I O assignment intelligent 16 points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block x 2 x 9 316 0 75mm Wiring change is required R1 25 3 Sleeved solderless terminal cannot be used 0 33A 24VDC 20 15 Ripple spike 500mVp p or less 0 15A 2 5A 250us or less O 0 19kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 6 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available Analog output HOLD CLEAR function Description Retains an analog value before Output enable signal turns off when the Output enable signal is off A62DA S1 Q62DAN Precautions for replacement 1 Refer to Analog output status combination list in the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual to check the execution status of output 2 For the Q62DAN this function is set with the intelligent function
54. 30248 30348 Gain changing selection 30149 30249 30349 Gain changing condition 30150 30250 30350 Gain changing time constant 30151 30251 30351 Ratio of load inertia moment to servomotor 30152 30252 30352 inertia moment 2 Position loop gain 2 changing ratio 30153 30253 30353 Speed loop gain 2 changing ratio 30154 30254 30354 piece integral compensation changing _ _ _ 30155 30255 30355 ratio Maker setting 30156 30256 30356 Maker setting 30157 30257 30357 Maker setting 30158 30258 30358 Maker setting 30159 30259 30359 Optional function C 30160 30260 30360 Machine resonance suppression filter 30161 30261 30361 Maker setting 30162 30262 30362 Maker setting 30163 30263 30363 Maker setting 30164 30264 30364 Maker setting 30165 30265 30365 Maker setting 30166 30266 30366 T 31 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of AD75MO Common for axis 1 2 3 Md 1 In test mode flag 450 1200 Md 2 Module name 451 z Md3 ost 452 453 qum 454 455 i Md 4 OS versi pi version m 457 Md 5 Clock data hou
55. 48 Warning output flag 49 Disconnection detection flag 50 to 53 CH1 to CH4 Scaling value R 54 CH1 Measured temperature L 55 value 32bit H to 60 CH4 Measured temperature L R 61 value 32bit H 62 CH1 Scaling range lower limit value L 63 i _ RW 64 CH1 Scaling range upper limit value L 65 H to 76 CH4 Scaling range upper limit L 77 value H R W 78 CH1 Scaling width lower limit value 79 CH1 Scaling width upper limit value to 85 CH4 Scaling width upper limit value 86 CH1 Warning output lower lower L 87 limit value H 88 CH1 Warning output lower upper L 89 limit value H R W 90 CH1 Warning output upper lower L 91 limit value H 92 CH1 Warning output upper upper L 93 limit value H to 116 CH4 Warning output upper upper L 117 limit value H 118 CH1 Offset temperature setting value L RW 119 H 120 CH1 Gain temperature setting value L 121 H to 132 Gain temperature setting value L 133 H R W 134 Extended averaging processing selection 13 0 System area Not used 147 Conversion setting for disconnection 148 R W detection 149 System area Not used 150 CH1 Conversion setting value for L RW 151 disconnection detection H 4 68 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64RD G Address Name Read write decimal to 156 CHA Conversion setting value for L 157 disconnection detection H 158 Mode switching setting 159 160 3 c
56. 850 950 1050 850 950 1050 Md 101 Real current value 851 951 1051 851 951 1051 T 34 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of AD75MO AD75MO QD75MLI A 852 952 1052 852 952 1052 Md 102 Deviation counter value 853 953 1053 853 953 1053 854 954 1054 854 954 1054 RETO MORTO n 855 955 1055 855 955 1055 104 Motor current value 856 956 1056 856 956 1056 Md 105 Auto tuning 857 957 1057 857 957 1057 Md 106 Load inertia ratio 858 958 1058 858 958 1058 Md 107 Position loop gain 1 859 959 1059 859 959 1059 Md 108 Speed loop gain 1 860 960 1060 860 960 1060 Md 109 Position loop gain 2 861 961 1061 861 961 1061 Md 110 Speed loop gain 2 862 962 1062 862 962 1062 Pr 111 Speed integral compensation 863 963 1063 863 963 1063 Md 112 Servo amplifier software No 864 869 964 969 1064 1069 864 869 964 969 1064 1069 Md 113 Parameter error No 0 to 15 870 970 1070 870 970 1070 Md 114 Parameter error No 16 to 31 871 971 1071 871 971 1071 Md 115 Parameter error No 32 to 47 872 972 1072 872 972 1072 Parameter error No 48 to 63 873 973 1073 Parameter error No 64 to 75 874 974 1074 875 975 1075 Maker setting 876 976 1076 Md 116 Servo status 873 973 1077 877 977 1077 Md 117 R
57. A68AD S2 Upgrade to Q68AD G sssssssssssseeeeee e enne 2 35 2 6 1 Performance comiparisOn wicks ucciso ttr het oe ek cp e Red Let ERA Ln BR Lg nd e sand de dared d Deana amp 2 35 2 6 2 Function Comparison ACH 2 39 2 6 3 signal comparison to programmable controller CPU 2 40 2 6 4 Buffer memory address comparison 2 41 2 7 A68ADN Upgrade to Q68ADV Q684ADI sse eene nnne nennen 2 43 2 7 1 Petrtormance compariSOn sao enero e e RO KR XE cals 2 43 2 7 2 F nctlon comparison er eee e e duse du ee ee a ee an eue 2 47 2 7 3 signal comparison to programmable controller CPU sse 2 48 2 7 4 Buffer memory address comparison sssssssssssseseeeeene eee nnne 2 49 2 80 AG8AD Upgrade to Q68AD G E e d HI LAU D e da 2 51 2 8 1 Performance comparison orbe tete i iade 2 51 2 8 2 Function comparison ssssssssssssssessesesee nn nenne nennen nens 2 55 10 2 8 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU 2 8 4 Buffer memory address comparison iiiiiiiiiiiiiii icr 2220020000000000 0 000000004 CHAPTER 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 1 to 3 66 3 1 List of Analog Outpu
58. A6CONZ2 24 to 28 AWG separately approx 0 08mm A6CON3 28 AWG twisted wire 30 AWG single wire SSCNET connection type Refer to Section 7 5 5 3 The connector Maximum extension distance 30m A configuration of bass of SSCNET differs Internal current QD75M1 QD75M2 QD75M4 i 0 7A or less O consumption A 5VDC 0 40 0 40 0 40A When QD75MLI carries out the flash write 26 times from the Flash ROM write count Max 100 000 times Max 100 000 times L ee Programe error occurs The error reset enables to perform the flash write T 22 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible ti P ti f AD75M1 AD75M2 AD75M3 QD75M1 QD75M2 QD75M4 Pn eeu bility replacement 32 point 32 point points s j I O assignment special 32 points I O assignment intelligent 32 points No of module occupied slots 1 1 O Weight 0 35kg 0 15kg 0 15kg 0 16kg O When using both the speed position switching control and the external start input START signal int ted into CHG I O signal for oie integrated into A the external start signal external to the interrupt module devices and start using the direct output External command signal External start or CHG signal Speed position switching signal speed position switching selectable with parameters Connection via programmable contro
59. Absolute system gt 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 lt Absolute system gt 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 13421772 8 to 13421772 7 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 1342 17728 to 1342 17727 inch 0 to 359 99999 degree 0 to 359 99999 degree 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse 134217728 to 134217727 pulse Incremental system 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 13421772 8 to 13421772 7 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch Positioning range 2 18424 7128 to 1342 17727 inch 5447483648 to 2147483647 pulse O 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 degree 1 1342 17728 to 1342 17727 degree 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse 134217728 to 134217727 pulse In speed position switching control 0 to 214748364 7 um 0 to 13421772 7 um 0 to 21474 83647 inch 0 to 1342 17727 inch 0 to 21474 83647 degree 0 to 1342 17727 degree 0 to 2147483647 pulse 0 to 134217727 pulse 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 0 to 359 99999 degree 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse Incremental system 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 degree In speed position switching control INC mode position speed switching control 0 to 214748364 7 um 0 to 21474 83647 inch 0 to 21474 83647 degree 0 to 2147483647 pulse In speed position switching control ABS mode 0 to 359 99999 degree 0 01 to 6000000 00
60. An operating ambient temperature variation indicates a deviation of the operating ambient temperature from the 25 5 range 3 A measured temperature value is stored in the buffer memory at every 320ms 640ms regardless of the number of conversion enable channels 4 15 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 Applicable thermocouple and measured temperature range accuracy A616TD Measurement range number Allowable input voltage range mV Measured temperature 100 to 1500 100 to 1800 100 to 1800 100 to 1800 B B PtRh30 range C PtRh6 Accuracy at 25 C 0 5 Temperature drift C 0 013 Measured temperature 0 to 1000 0 to 1700 0 to 1700 0 to 1700 range C R R PtRh13 Pt Accuracy at 25 C 0 4 Temperature drift C 0 011 Measured temperature 0 to 1200 0 to 1700 0 to 1700 0 to 1700 range C S S PtRh Pt PtRh10 Pt Accuracy at 25 C 96 0 4 Temperature drift C 0 011 Measured temperature 200 to 250 0 to 500 0 to 1000 0 to 1300 range C K K NiCr Ni NiCr NiAl Accuracy at 25 C 0 4 0 3 0 3 0 5 Temperature drift C 0 011 0 01 0 01 0 013 Measured temperature 200 to 150 0 to 300 0 to 600 0 to 1000 range C E E NiCr CuNi Accuracy at 25 C 96 0 4 0 3 0 3 0 4 Temperature drift C 0 011 0 01 0 01 0 011 Measured temperature 200 to 200 0 t
61. Analog output g omp External load resistance value 2kO to 1MQ Digital value resolution Analog 1 4000 1 8000 1 12000 output value 4000 8000 12000 10V characteristics Digital 2000 4000 6000 5V input 0 0 0 OV value 2000 4000 6000 5V 4000 8000 12000 10V When offset value OV gain value 10V settings Maximum 1 4000 2 5mV resolution of 1 8000 1 25mV analog value 1 12000 0 83mV Overall accuracy accuracy at maximum analog output value 1 0 100mV Conversion speed Within 40ms 8 channels same time for one channel Note Time from when the digital input is written to when the specified analog value is reached Absolute maximum output 12 to 12V Note Max output voltage restricted by output protection circuit Number of analog output points 8 channels module Number of writes to EPROM Output short protection Isolation method Between the output terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels non isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59N cm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal c
62. C 0 02 of measured temperature temperature Measured temperature 210 to 40 40 to 750 750 to 1200 range C Larger value of 0 5 C or Conversion accuracy at 0 25 of measured 25 0 5 C temperature n Larger value of 0 06 C or Temperature characteristics C 0 02 of measured temperature Measured temperature 270 to 200 200 to 0 0 to 350 350 to 400 range C Conversion accuracy at Larger value of 0 5 or 0 5 Larger value of 0 5 C or 25 0 5 C of measured temperature 0 25 of measured temperature Temperature characteristics Larger value of 0 06 C or Larger value of 0 06 C or C 0 1 of measured temperature 0 02 of measured temperature Measured temperature 1250 to 270 to 200 200 to 0 0 to 1250 range C 1300 Conversion accuracy at 25 0 5 C Larger value of 0 5 or 0 5 of measured temperature Larger value of 0 5 C or 0 25 of measured temperature Temperature characteristics C Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 2 of measured temperature Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 02 of measured temperature 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 2 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available Temperature conversion function Description Imports temperature data A616TD Q64TD Precautions for replacement Conversion enable disable function Sets whether to enable disable a c
63. CH1 Detected temperature value L 18 CH8 Measured temperature value 19 32bit H 19 Error code 20 CH2 Detected temperature value L R 20 Setting range 1 Input type CH1 4 21 32bit H 21 Setting range 2 Input type CH5 8 22 CH3 Detected temperature value L 22 Setting range 3 Offset gain setting 23 32bit H 23 System area Not used 24 CH4 Detected temperature value L 24 Averaging processing selection CH1 CH4 25 32bit H 25 Averaging processing selection CH5 CH8 Offset gain setting mode Offset 26 CH5 Detected temperature value L 26 re 32bit H specification i 27 27 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification 28 CH6 Detected temperature value L 28 CH1 Offset temperature setting value 29 32bit H 29 CH1 Gain temperature setting value 30 CH7 Detected temperature value L 30 CH2 Offset temperature setting value 31 32bit H R 31 CH2 Gain temperature setting value R W 32 CH8 Detected temperature value L 32 CH3 Offset temperature setting value 33 32bit H 33 CH3 Gain temperature setting value 34 Write data error code R W 34 CH4 Offset temperature setting value 35 Conversion completion flag R 35 CH4 Gain temperature setting value Specification of platinum RTD type 36 CH5 Offset temperature setting value 37 CH5 Gain temperature setting value 38 CH6 Offset temperature setting value 4 49 CH6 Gain temperature setting value 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Address decimal
64. CH1 Time count averaging setting 2 CH1 Averaging time count 2 CH2 Time count averaging setting R W 3 CH2 Averaging time count 3 CH3 Time count averaging setting 4 CH3 Averaging time count RIW 4 CH4 Time count averaging setting 5 CH4 Averaging time count 5 6 CH5 Averaging time count 6 _ System area Not used 7 CH6 Averaging time count 7 8 CH7 Averaging time count 8 9 CH8 Averaging time count 9 Averaging processing selection R W 10 CH1 Detected temperature value 16bit 10 Conversion completion flag 11 CH2 Detected temperature value 16bit 11 CH1 Measured temperature value 16bit 12 CH3 Detected temperature value 16bit 12 CH2 Measured temperature value 16bit R 13 CH4 Detected temperature value 16bit 13 CH3 Measured temperature value 16bit 14 CH5 Detected temperature value 16bit 14 CH4 Measured temperature value 16bit 15 CH6 Detected temperature value 16bit 15 16 CH7 Detected temperature value 16bit 16 System area Not used 17 CH8 Detected temperature value 16bit 17 18 CH1 Detected temperature value L 18 19 32bit H 19 Error code R 20 CH2 Detected temperature value L 20 Setting range 21 32bit H R 21 22 CH3 Detected temperature value L 22 23 32bit H 23 24 CH4 Detected temperature value L 24 25 32bit H 25 26 CH5 Detected temperature value L 26 27 32bit H 27 28 CH6 Detected temperature value L 28 29 32bit H 29 30 CH7 Detected temperature value L 30 31 32bit H 31 32 CH8 Detected tem
65. CH7 User range settings gain value 232 CH8 User range settings offset value CH8 User range settings gain value 66 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 1 List of Temperature Input Module Alternative Models for Replacement Production discontinuation Transition to Q series Product Model Model Remarks Restrictions 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Changed 4 modules are required when one A616TD and one A60MXT N are used Q64TD 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications change 4CH module A616TD 5 Functional specifications Not changed 1 External wiring Connector wiring and cable size are changed AGOMXT N 2 Number of slots Changed 2 modules are required when one A616TD and one A60MXT N are used Q68TD G H02 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory Q68TD G H01 addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications change 8CH module 5 Functional specifications The disconnection detection function is equipped only in the Q68TD G H02 Transformer isolation is provided between channels 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Changed 2 modules are required 3 Program The number of occupied
66. Conversion speed the maximum of 2 5ms channel sampling cycle 10ms channel response speed 20ms and I O characteristics 5 Function specifications Changed Non insulation gt insulation between channels 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Production discontinuation Product Model 1 External wiring 2 Number of slots Transition to Q series Remarks Restrictions Cable size is changed Not changed Occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory address are changed 4 Performance specifications change Input signals Either V or input and increase in current consumption 5 Function specifications Not changed 3 Program Q68ADV Q68ADI Analog input module A68ADN 1 External wiring 2 Number of slots 3 Program Q68AD G 1 Cable size is changed Terminal block wiring connector wiring Not changed Occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory address are changed 4 Performance specifications change Conversion speed 20ms channel sampling cycle 10ms channel response speed 20ms channels 5 Function specifications Changed Non insulation insulation between The Q68AD G cannot be mounted on the series large type base unit Q3LIBL QeLIBL Q55BL EJ Point The existing wiring for the A QnA series modules can be connected directly to the Q series modules using the upgrade tool conversion adapto
67. Current 4 to 20mA Expanded mode 1000 to 4500 4uA 3000 to 13500 1 33uA Users range setting 4000 to 4000 1 37 12000 12000 1 33pA 0 1 Normal resolution mode 4digit High resolution mode 0 to 10V 10 to 10V 16digit O High resolution mode Other than the above ranges 12digit Temperature coefficient 71 4ppm C 0 00714 C 10ms channel The conversion speed of Sampling cycle Q68AD G to A68AD has become slow If fast A conversion speed is required 20ms for control the Q64AD is recommended Voltage 15V o current 30mA 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A68AD Analog input points 8 channels module Maximum number of writes for E2PROM Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels non isolated Isolation method Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Occupied I O points upi i i I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 38 point terminal block E 0 75 to 2mm Applicable wire size Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59N cm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption Hardware version K or later 0 39A 5VDC Hardware version J or earlier 0 9A Hardware version K or later 0 3kg Weight Hardware version J or earlier 0 6kg 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Comp
68. H R 16 48 Periodic pulse count previous L 17 49 value H 18 50 L Periodic pulse count present value L 19 51 H 20 52 L Ring counter minimum value Zi H R W 22 54 L Ring counter maximum value 28 8 24 56 to to System area Not used 63 6 13 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT POSITIONING MODULE REPLAC EMENT 7 1 List of Positioning Module Alternative Models for Replacement Production Transition to Q series discontinuation Positioning module Remarks Restrictions Not changed 2 An external power supply 15VDC is not required Changed 1 slot gt 2 slots 1 External wiring 2 Number of slots 3 Program Buffer memory assignment and change of the setting AD70 QD73A1 method 4 Performance specifications change Upward compatibility 5 Function specifications Partly changed LED indication and function setting method Replacing QD75 system is recommended 071 51 52 When replacing the existing AD71 51 52 57 with QD75P QD75D refer to one 57 Technical Bulletin FA A 0060 Procedures for Replacing Positioning Module AD71 with QD75 Mount AD70D to the QAGLIB type extension base unit AD70D None p Otherwise replacing with the QD75M system is recommended AD72 None Replacing with two QD73A1 modules or QD75 system is recommended 1 External wiring Connector and manual pulsar wir
69. I O points I O signals and buffer memory Q64RD addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications change 4CH module 5 Functional specifications Not changed 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Changed 2 modules are required Temperature 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory input module A68RD3N Q64RD G addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications change 4CH module 5 Functional specifications RTD Ni100 compliant and transformer isolation is provided between channels 1 External wiring Connector wiring and cable size are changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory Q68RD3 G addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications change Resolution and conversion speed 5 Functional specifications 32 bit output is not available RTD Ni100 compliant and transformer isolation is provided between channels 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Changed 2 modules are required 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory Q64RD addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications change 4CH module 5 Functional specifications Not changed A68RD4N 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Changed 2 modules are required 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory Q6
70. JIS C1604 1981 180 to 600 C Pt100 Measured 27 10 to 313 710 te t 180 to 600 C emperature JPt100 o range 25 80 to 317 280 Ni100 1 Accuracy accuracy at full scale Resolution 0 025 C Conversion speed 40ms channel Number of analog input points 8 channels module Output current for temperature detection 1mA Isolation method Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between platinum RTD input and channel non isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Disconnection detection Batch detected at all channels Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points External connection system 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable solderless terminal A 61 V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64RD G 3 4 wire type Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compatibility Precautions for replacement 16 bit signed binary 2000 to 8500 Value up to the first decimal place x 10 32 bit signed binary data 200000 to 850000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997 IEC751 1983 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 Ni100 DIN 43760 1987 As the
71. L 26 27 32bit H 27 28 CH6 Detected temperature value L 28 29 32bit H 29 30 CH7 Detected temperature value L 30 31 32bit H 31 32 CH8 Detected temperature value L 32 33 32bit H 33 System area Not used 34 Write data error code R W 34 35 Conversion completion flag R 35 36 Specification of platinum RTD type R W 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Warning output enable disable setting R W 4 29 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64RD Address decimal Warning output flag Read write Disconnection detection flag CH1 Scaling value CH2 Scaling value CH3 Scaling value CH4 Scaling value CH1 Measured temperature value L 32bit H CH2 Measured temperature value L 32bit H CH3 Measured temperature value L 32bit H CH4 Measured temperature value L 32bit H CH1 Scaling range lower limit value L H CH1 Scaling range upper limit value L H CH2 Scaling range lower limit value L H CH2 Scaling range upper limit value L H CH3 Scaling range lower limit value L H CH3 Scaling range upper limit value L H CH4 Scaling range lower limit value L H CH4 Scaling range upper limit value L H R W CH1 Scaling width lower limit value CH1 Scaling width upper limit value CH2 Scaling width lower limit value CH2 Scaling width upper l
72. O O deceleration Acceleration time and deceleration time Acceleration time and deceleration time No of tt can be set independently can be set independently atterns Acceleration 4 patterns each 4 patterns each O deceleration Setting Changeover between 1 to 65535ms 1 1 to 8388608ms time range to 8388608ms possible Sudden stop Changeover between 1 to 65535ms 1 1 to 8388608ms deceleration to 8388608ms possible Electronic gears backlash Electronic gears backlash Compensation A Refer to 3 3 3 compensation near pass compensation near pass For details of Error display 17 segment LED Error LED x diagnostic use GX Developer The start history History data storage Start Provided during error is Provided 4 types 16 items module O error warning 3 types 16 items module integrated into the start history Es Flash ROM Flash ROM Data storage destination battery less backup battery less backup 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT AD75P1 S3 AD75P2 S3 AD75P3 S3 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75P4N Compat QD75D1N QD75D2N QD75D4N Precautions for ibility replacement Connection connector 10136 3000VE Soldering type supplied A6CON1 Soldering type straight out type sold separately 10136 6000EL Crimping type sold separately A6CON2 Cri
73. Online module replacement 3 31 Replaces a module without stopping the System Replaceable modules during online are the Process CPU and the Redundant CPU 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 5 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A62DA Q64DAN Device Device Device i Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No XO Watchdog timer error YO Module READY YO Not used CH1 Output enable X1 D A conversion READY Y1 1 disable flag CH2 Output enable X2 Y2 Y2 disable flag CH3 Output enable X3 Y3 Y3 Not used disable flag CH4 Output enable X4 Y4 Y4 disable flag X5 Y5 Y5 X6 Y6 Y6 XT Y7 Not used High resolution mode X8 Y8 Y8 status flag Operating condition Operating condition X9 Y9 Y9 setting completion flag setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA Not used YA User range write request status flag Channel change XB YB YB Channel change request completion flag Setting value change Setting value change XC YC YC completion flag request Not used Synchronous output Synchronous output XD YD YD mode flag req
74. QD73A1 s zero gain adjustment Changed function from the AD70 Though the functions of the AD70 and the QD73A1 are same the setting methods and buffer memory addresses for the functions are partly changed To use following functions changes or corrections of the programs or setting methods are required For details refer to the user s manual for the QD73A1 Changed function Change description Major positioning control Program corrections of the QD73A1 are required because buffer memory addresses for the positioning address positioning speed and positioning pattern differ from those of the AD70 AD70 For Velocity position axis travel distance change area the value is reflected during speed control Speed position control switch Setting value 0 to 2147483647 valid within the stroke range mode speed control QD73A1 operation For New speed position movement amount the value is cleared to 0 when the next operation starts and reflected when Speed position switching command signal is turned on Setting value 1 to 2147483647 valid within the stroke range AD70 The speed change is requested by writing a new speed value in Velocity change area of the buffer memory Speed change function QD73A1 The speed change is requested by writing a new speed value in the buffer memory and writing 1 to Speed change request buffer memory address 91 To use the speed change function an ad
75. The life of an aluminum electrolytic capacitor even if not used under a normal temperature decreases approximately at 1 4 speed of the case when it is energized App 2 Appendix 3 Related Manuals Appendix 3 1 Replacement Handbooks 1 Transition Guide No Manual Name Manual Number Model Code 1 MELSEC A QnA Series Transition Guide L NA 08077E 2 Transition from MELSEC A QnA large type to series handbook No Manual Name Manual Number Model Code Transition from MELSEC A QnA Large Type Series to Q Series 1 L 08043ENG Handbook Fundamentals Transition from MELSEC A QnA Large Type Series to Series 2 L 08046ENG Handbook Intelligent Function Modules Transition fi MELSEC A QnA L T Series to Q Seri 3 ition from QnA Large Type Series to Q Series L 08048ENG _ Handbook Network Modules Transition from MELSEC A QnA Large Type Series to Q Series 4 L 08050ENG Handbook Communications 5 Transition from MELSEC A0J2H Series to Series Handbook L 08060ENG 6 Transition from MELSECNET MINI S3 A2C I O to CC Link Handbook L 08061ENG Transition from MELSEC I OLINK to CC Link LT Handbook L 08062bENG Transition from MELSEC I OLINK to AnyWire DB A20 Handbook LO8263ENG Transition of CPUs in MELSEC Redundant System Handbook 8 L 08117ENG Transition from Q4ARCPU to QnPRHCPU 3 Transition Examples No Manual Name Manual Numbe
76. User range settings offset value CH1 User range settings gain value CH2 User range settings offset value CH2 User range settings gain value 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 5 A62DA Replacement to the Q64DAN 3 5 1 Performance comparison Item A62DA Maximum setting value Digital input Voltage 2000 Current 1000 Voltage 10 to 0 to 10VDC External load resistance value 500Q to 1MQ Analog output Current 4 to 20mADC External load resistance value 0Q to 600Q Current output is usable by 20 to 20mA Analog output Voltage Current 2000 10V 1000 5V 20 0 4 1000 12 2000 Digital input I O characteristics Voltage 5mV 1 2000 Current 20 1 1000 Maximum resolution Overall accuracy accuracy at maximum analog output value 1 voltage 0 1V current 0 2 Within 15ms 2 channels Maximum conversion speed same time for one channel Note Time from when the digital input is written to when the specified analog voltage current is reached Voltage 12V Absolute maximum output Current 28mA Note Max output voltage and current restricted by output protection circuit Number of analog output points Number of writes to EPROM Output short protection 2 channels module 3 27 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPL
77. W Offset gain adjusted value specification System area Not used Mode switching setting R W System area Not used Pass data classification setting R W System area Not used CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value Industrial shipment settings offset value Industrial shipment settings gain value CH1 User range settings offset value CH1 User range settings gain value R W CH2 User range settings offset value CH2 User range settings gain value CH3 User range settings offset value CH3 User range settings gain value User range settings offset value CH4 User range settings gain value 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 6 A62DA S1 Replacement to the Q62DAN 3 6 1 Performance comparison Item A62DA S1 Digital input 0 to 4000 Analog output Voltage 0 to 10VDC External load resistance value 5000 to 1MQ Current 4 to 20mADC External load resistance value 00 to 6000 Current output is usable by 0 to 20mA I O characteristics Output range Digital input Analog output 4000 10V 0 OV 4000 5V or 20mA 0 OV or 0mA 4000 5V or 20mA 0 1Vor 4mA 0 to 10V 0 to 5
78. X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 Not used X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Interlock signal for the Y1D X1E RFRP RTOP Y1E instructions when the X1F A616TD is used in Y1F 4 19 remote I O station 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of buffer memories and sequence programs refer to the Thermocouple Input Module Channel Isolated Thermocouple Micro Voltage Input Module User s Manual A616TD Q68TD G H02 Q68TD G H01 Address Address A Name Read write Name Read write hex hex 00 Data format selection 00 Conversion enable disable setting CH1 to CH8 Time count moving average R W 01 Error code storage 01 to 08 time constant setting Error occurrence AGOMXLICONNECT No R W 02 09 System area Not used storage Thermocouple type setting error channel 03 0A Conversion completion flag number storage 04 Current sampling period storage R to 12 CH1 to CH8 Measured temperature value 05 to OE System area Not used 13 Error code R CH1 to CH8 Setting range Thermocouple OF Conversion enable A616TD 14 to 15 type disable specification R W yp 10 to 17 Multiplexer module 16 Se
79. YE Not used completed flag Error flag YF Error clear request 2 40 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 6 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module With Signal Conditioning Function User s Manual A68AD S2 Q68AD G Address Address Name Read write Name Read write Dec Dec 0 Used channel specification 0 A D conversion enable disable Lae CH1 Average time Average number of times 1 Averaging processing specification 1 b Moving average Time constant settings e CH2 Average time Average number of times 2 CH1 Averaging time count 2 Moving average Time constant settings 0n CH3 Average time Average number of times 3 2 Averaging time count 3 Moving average Time constant settings m CH4 Average time Average number of times 4 CH3 Averaging time count 4 i RIW Moving average Time constant settings R W aa CH5 Average time Average number of times 5 CH4 Averaging time count 5 Moving average Time constant settings CH6 Average time Average number of times 6 CH5 Averaging time count 6 Mov
80. between the AD70 and the QD73A1 5 External wiring The existing connectors can be used 6 7 The AD70 counts the feedback pulse M Operation of when Servo The QD73A clears the deviation counter outputs the voltage proportional to the 8 READY signal is off to 0 and outputs OV deviation counter 1 Note the following because the number of occupied slots increases for the QD73A1 1 Check that the base unit has empty slots of 1 slot or more If the base unit does not have an empty slot an additional extension base unit is required 2 The module occupying 2 slots cannot be mounted on the Q series large type base unit Because the same base unit of the existing module is used for the QD73A1 when mounting the QD73A1 on the Q series large type base unit use 2 base units by adding an extension base unit 2 Configure the I O assignment setting of parameters in either of following ways so that addresses of the QD73A1 remain the same as the AD70 even after the replacement 1 Set Empty 0 point to the first half slot 2 Set the same address of the AD70 to the second half slot of the QD73A1 in the start XY setting 3 Changes or corrections of the programs are required For details refer to the MELSEC Q QD73A1 Positioning Module User s Manual 4 The method of mode setting which is required for the positioning is changed from a hardware switch to the switch setting in I O assignment of PLC parameter Configure the same sett
81. channels used x 80 us 1 channel 160 Averaging processing For each channel A D conversion values are averaged for the set number of times or set amount of time and the average value is output as a digital value The setting range of average time and count differ Refer to Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual and then confirm the specifications Maximum and minimum values hold function The maximum and minimum values of the digital output values are retained in the module Temperature drift compensation function Errors arising from changes in the ambient temperature of the module are automatically compensated for to improve conversion accuracy The temperature drift compensation function can be performed at A D conversion time for all channels 160us Resolution mode The resolution settings of 1 4000 1 12000 or 1 16000 can be selected according to the application The resolution mode setting is applicable to all channels Online module change 2 15 A module change is made without the system being stopped Replaceable modules during online are a process CPU anda redundant CPU 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 3 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual
82. comparison to programmable controller CPU 3 48 3 7 4 Buffer memory address comparison eese nane 3 49 3 8 t ted 3 51 3 8 1 Performance comparison cecceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeccaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesecnesaeeneess 3 51 3 8 2 Functional COMPAPLISON oc eene EY ege e eder e dee e Leu ER ibe 3 55 3 8 3 signal comparison to programmable controller CPU 3 56 3 8 4 Buffer memory address comparison sss ener 3 57 3 9 SAOBDAV 3 59 3 9 1 Performance comparison ire teer dea es 3 59 3 9 2 Functional Comparison setate eer tbc cao vanes e eed da RR Ronda d eR Rd Rena 3 63 3 9 3 signal comparison to programmable controller CPU 3 64 3 9 4 Buffer memory address comparison cccccciceccciscacccsscasccssnanasseeaaasaauaasseuesanannenanauuaa 3 65 CHAPTER 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 1to4 70 4 1 List of Temperature Input Module Alternative Models for Replacement 4 1 4 2 A616TD Replacement to the Q64TD nnne nnn nnns 4 3 4 2 1 Performance com
83. control only the near pass function is available Positioning address pass is not conducted 2 axis interpolation 2 axis linear interpolation 2 axis fixed feed Circular interpolation T 9 The interpolation target axis can be randomly set with a positioning identifier 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Changed functions Step function Change description 1 Step stopped is changed to Stopped and Step error occurring is changed to Error occurring in the axis operations status parameters 2 The restart command for step start information 02H is deleted 3 The step operation is restarted with the restart command Command in position function The command in position width is expanded AD75PLI S3 1 to 32767000 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN 1 to 2147483647 Positioning start No 7004 to 7010 block start designation and 8000 to 8049 indirect designation are deleted block start data With QD75PLIN QD75DLIN number of blocks has been change to 5 7000 to 7004 With the AD75PLI S3 this data is called Positioning start information Start history The configuration of start information and start No is changed so that the start No can be directly checked Basic parameter1 IPr 5 Pulse output mode When the programmable controller is turned ON or the programmable controller CPU module is reset the valid value is only the first value after the programmable controlle
84. conversion speed 50ms channel Isolation method Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels non isolation 1MQ resistor isolation Number of temperature sensor input points 15 points module AGOMXT AGOMXTN The A60MXT and A60MXTN can be mounted up to seven in total to one A616TD Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points External connection system 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59N cm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 5VDC 1 0A Weight 0 85kg 1 Calculate the accuracy in the following method Accuracy 7 Conversion accuracy Temperature characteristics x Operating ambient temperature variation Cold junction compensation accuracy An operating ambient temperature variation indicates a deviation of the operating ambient temperature from the 25 5 C range 4 3 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64TD Compatibility Precautions for replacement 270 to 1820 C 16 bit signed binary Scaling value O 16 bit signed binary 2700 to 18200 value up to the first decimal place 10 As the applicable ther
85. count RIW 4 CH4 Time count averaging setting RW 5 CH4 Averaging time count 5 CH5 Time count averaging setting 6 CH5 Averaging time count 6 CH6 Time count averaging setting 7 CH6 Averaging time count 7 CH7 Time count averaging setting 8 CH7 Averaging time count 8 CH8 Time count averaging setting 9 CH8 Averaging time count 9 Averaging processing specification 10 CH1 Digital output value 10 A D conversion completed flag 11 CH2 Digital output value 11 CH1 Digital output value 12 CH3 Digital output value 12 CH2 Digital output value 13 CHA Digital output value R 13 CH3 Digital output value 14 CH5 Digital output value 14 CH4 Digital output value 15 CH6 Digital output value 15 CH5 Digital output value R 16 CH7 Digital output value 16 CH6 Digital output value 17 CH8 Digital output value 17 CH7 Digital output value 18 18 CH8 Digital output value 19 19 Error code 20 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 21 21 Setting range CH5 to CH8 22 22 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification RIW 23 23 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification 24 24 25 25 26 System area Not used 26 System area Not used 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 CH1 Maximum value 31 31 CH1 Minimum value 32 32 CH2 Maximum value 33 33 CH2 Minimum value 34 Write data error code R W 34 CH3 Maximum value 35 A D conversion completed flag R 35 CH3 Minimum value 36 CH4 Maximum value 37 CH4 Minimum value 38 CH5 Maximum value 39 CH5 Minimum value 40 CH6 Maximum value 41 CH6 Minimum value 4
86. first half slot is Empty 16 points nA The first half slot is Empty 16 points T H WDT error H W error X00 X10 Zero gain adjustment data writing request Y1A Module READY X01 X11 Zero gain adjustment change request Y1B OPR request X02 X12 Set value change request Y1C OPR complete X03 X13 OPR start Y10 Y20 BUSY X04 X14 Absolute positioning start Y11 Y21 Positioning complete X05 X15 Forward start Y12 Y22 In position X06 X16 Reverse start Y13 Y23 Excessive error X07 X17 Forward JOG start Y14 Y24 Error detection X08 X18 Reverse JOG start Y15 Y25 Overflow X09 X19 Speed position mode restart Y16 Y26 Underflow X0A X1A Stop Y17 Y27 Servo READY X1B Error reset Y18 Y28 Near point dog X0C X1C Overflow reset Y19 Y29 External stop X0D X1D Underflow reset Y1A Y2A Upper limit signal X1E Speed position switching enable Y1C Y2C Lower limit signal XOF X1F PLC READY Y1D Y2D OPR start complete X20 YOO Y10 to to Absolute positioning start complete X21 v19 Forward start complete Y1B Y1D for the incremental positioning and the X22 to speed position control switching Mseiprehibiieo YAE Y1F Reverse start complete for the incremental positioning and the X23 Y2E Y2F speed position control switching Synchronization flag X24 Zero gain adjustment data writing complete X2A flag Zero gain adjustment change complete flag X2B Set value change complete flag X2C Operating
87. input and channel non isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Disconnection detection Detected per channel Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points External connection system 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable solderless terminal h 23 V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64RD Compatibility Precautions for replacement 3 4 wire type O 16 bit signed binary 2000 to 8500 Value up to the first decimal place x 10 32 bit signed binary 200000 to 850000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 Pt100 As the compliance standards for the JIS C 1604 1997 IEC751 1983 applicable platinum RTD differ JPt100 change the platinum RTD to the one JIS C 1604 1981 that can be used with the Q64RD 200 to 850 C 180 to 600 C Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 0 25 accuracy relative to maximum value Ambient temperature 25 5 0 08 O accuracy relative to maximum value 0 025 C 40ms channel O Consider replacement with multiple 4 channels module A Q64RD 1mA O Isolated area Isolation method Wu d bus d Between platinum De Photocouple
88. itch to PLC ter of OPR control Available 2 method Available 2 method D ree CPU module The function is the same though the setting method is changed JOG operation Absolute system 4 4ms Incremental system 4 5ms Absolute system 1 2ms Incremental system 1 2ms The specification has Starting time JOG operation 4 3ms JOG operation 1 2ms improved OPR near point dog method 4 4ms OPR near point dog method 1 2ms Upward compatibility OPR count method 5 1ms OPR count method 1 2ms M function x x T 43 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible QD73A1 Compat ibility Precautions for replacement Internal current consumption The recalculation of internal 5VDC 5VDC 0 3A 5VDC 0 52A A current consumption 5VDC is required Th isti t wiri Applicable connector Refer to Section 7 6 5 Refer to Section 7 6 5 ex S can be used without change Ext Itage An ext lyi xterna supply vo 15VDC 0 2A 15VDC 0 02A E erna power supply is current terminal block not required 32 points 48 points d slots 2 slots Number of occupied I O Number of I O slots 1 slot occupied p The number of occupied slots oints VO assignment 32 points special I O assignment First half 16 points empty A 12 9 HE slot Second half 32 points intel
89. lower limit value 5D CH2 Warning output upper upper limit value 5E CH3 Warning output lower lower limit value RW 5F CH3 Warning output lower upper limit value 60 CH3 Warning output upper lower limit value 61 CH3 Warning output upper upper limit value 62 CH4 Warning output lower lower limit value 63 CH4 Warning output lower upper limit value 64 CH4 Warning output upper lower limit value 65 CH4 Warning output upper upper limit value 66 to 75 System area Not used 76 CH1 Offset temperature setting value 7T CH1 Gain temperature setting value 78 CH2 Offset temperature setting value 79 CH2 Gain temperature setting value RW 7A CH3 Offset temperature setting value 7B CH3 Gain temperature setting value 7C CH4 Offset temperature setting value 7D CH4 Gain temperature setting value 7E to 9D System area Not used 9E to 9F Mode switching setting AO CH1 Factory default offset value A1 CH1 Factory default gain value A2 CH1 User range settings offset value A3 CH1 User range settings gain value A4 CH1 User range settings thermal L A5 EMF offset value H A6 CH1 User range settings thermal L AT EMF gain value H A8 CH2 Factory default offset value R W A9 CH2 Factory default gain value AA CH2 User range settings offset value AB CH2 User range settings gain value AC CH2 User range settings thermal L AD EMF offset value H AE CH2 User range settings thermal L AF EMF gain value H BO CH3 Factory default offset value B1 CH3 Factory default ga
90. name Signal name No No XO Module READY YO Temperature drift x1 1 compensation flag X2 Y2 X3 Y3 x4 4 Not used x5 o Y5 X6 Y6 X7 Y7 High resolution mode X8 Y8 status flag x9 Operating condition Y9 Operating condition setting completed flag setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA User range write request flag Channel change XB YB Channel change request completed flag XC Not used Not used Maximum value Maximum value XD minimum value reset YD minimum value reset completed flag request A D conversion XE YE Notused completed flag Error flag YF Error clear request 2 32 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 5 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual A68AD S2 Q68ADVII Address Address Name Read write Name Read write Dec Dec 0 Used channel specification 0 A D conversion enable disable 1 Averaging processing specification 1 CH1 Time count averaging setting 2 CH1 Averaging time count 2 CH2 Time count averaging setting 3 CH2 Averaging time count 3 CH3 Time count averaging setting 4 CH3 Averaging time
91. no possible function for replacement Special start stop Execute it separately for the start two times Indirect designation In the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN the start block area on the buffer memory is expanded to five blocks 0 to 4 Each start block can be directly designated with positioning start No 7000 to 7004 Block transfer Positioning data I F With the AD75PLI S3 this interface is used to set positioning data Nos 101 to 600 that do not exist on the buffer memory Since all positioning data can be set the buffer memory with the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN this function is deleted Start history during errors The contents are the same as the start history Therefore the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN stores only the start history System monitor data Module name OS type OS version These data were deleted because they can be displayed in system monitor Module s detailed information of GX Developer Refer to GX Developer Operating Manual T 8 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 Changed function from AD75P1 S3 P2 S3 P3 S3 In case of using the following functions with AD75PL1 S3 make sure that there is no operation problems when converted to QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Changed functions Change description Software stroke limit function 1 The limit check of arc address is carried out only when a sub point is designated It is not carried out when a center point is designated 2 The soft
92. of software the same level of settings are available because the function is upward compatible LED Refer to 2 1 Example of an additional program using a buffer memory address for the speed change function Mode switch Change command DO K1 K80 Change into H1 due to change of the number of occpied slots Create the above due to the speed demand 2 Details of LEDs are shown in the table below T 47 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT LED name AD70 QD73A1 Remarks RUN RUN Minor error ERR 1 ERR Used for both minor errors and major errors Major error ERR 2 Encoder phase A oA oA Encoder phase B B B Encoder phase Z Pz oZ BUSY BUSY BUSY _ ZERO The contents indicated with ZERO of the QD73A1 differ from the ones indicated with ZERO of the AD70 Gain adjustment status GAIN Servo READY SV RDY Can be checked with an input signal X1B Near zero point dog DOG Can be checked with an input signal X1C Stop STOP Can be checked with an input signal X1D Upper limit LS FLS Can be checked with an input signal X1E Lower limit LS RLS Can be checked with an input signal X1F In Position IN POS Can be checked with an input signal X16 Error counter polarity POLE Can be checked with buffer memory addresses 106 107 The LED POLE of the AD70 indicates ON when the deviation cou
93. of the value Q64RD Replaceable modules during Replaces a module without stopping the Online module replacement O online are the Process CPU and system the Redundant CPU 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 4 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A68RD3N Q64RD Device Device Device i Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No XO Watchdog timer error flag YO Module READY YO Not used CH1 Offset gain setting CH1 Offset setting X1 READY flag Y1 Y1 status signal request CH2 Offset gain setting X2 Write data error flag Y2 Y2 CH1 Gain setting request status signal x3 CH1 Disconnection CH3 Offset gain setting 2 Offset setting detection flag status signal request CH2 Disconnection CH4 Offset gain setting X4 Y4 Y4 CH2 Gain setting request detection flag status signal CH3 Disconnection CH3 Offset setting X5 M Y5 detection flag request CH4 Disconnection X6 Y6 Not used Y6 CH3 Gain setting request detection flag Not used CH5 Disconnection CHA Offset setting XT Y7 Y7
94. photocoupler isolation Between platinum RTD input and channel non isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Disconnection detection Batch detected at all channels Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points External connection system 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable solderless terminal A 51 V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64RD Compatibility Precautions for replacement 3 4 wire type O 16 bit signed binary 2000 to 8500 Value up to the first decimal place x 10 32 bit signed binary data O 200000 to 850000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 Pt100 As the compliance standards for the JIS C 1604 1997 IEC751 1983 applicable platinum RTD differ JPt100 change the platinum RTD to the one JIS C 1604 1981 that can be used with the Q64RD 200 to 850 C 180 to 600 C Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 0 25 accuracy relative to maximum value Ambient temperature 25 5 0 08 o accuracy relative to maximum value 0 025 C 40ms channel O Consider replacement with multiple 4 channels module A Q64RD 1mA O Isolated area Isola
95. programmable Connection controller CPU corresponding serial with n The connecting Direct connection communication module Q peripheral shape differs corresponding MELSECNET H remote devices Peripheral module devices AD75TU cannot be data setting used AD75TU Use GX Configurator QP Gx Available GX GX Configurator AP GX Configurator QP A Configurator Configurator differs iffers 1 With AD75PLI SS Nos 1 to 100 data items axis of positioning data can be set using the buffer memory and Nos 1 to 600 data axis can be set with QD75PLIN QD75DLIN The positioning data in the buffer memory is not backed up 2 Indicates the standard mode stepping motor mode about AD75PLI S3 3 The near pass function is valid only during the continuous path control AD75PLI S3 Selected with parameters QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Standard function QD75PLIN QD75DLIN does not have address pass mode When being asked for passing the positioning address continue with continuous running However it will stop once 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 4 2 Function comparison 1 Deleted function from AD75P1 S3 P2 S3 P3 S3 When using the following function on AD75PLI S3 change the program Deleted functions Stepping motor mode Precautions for replacement The setting is not required when using stepping motor due to it s performance gain Fast machine OPR With the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN there is
96. programmable controller power supply 500VDC 10MQ or more O Between analog input channels 500VDC 10MQ or more 16 points I O occupied points has changed to I O assignment intelligent 16 points 16 points 40 pin connector x Within 0 3mm2 x Wiring change is required x The recalculation of internal current 0 46A A consumption 5VDC is required 0 16kg O 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 6 2 Function comparison Item A D conversion enable disable Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the A D conversion for each channel By disabling the conversion for the channels that are not used the sampling time can be shortened A68AD S2 Q68AD G O With functions Without functions Precautions for replacement Sampling processing The A D conversion for analog input values is performed successively for each channel and the digital output value is output upon each conversion Averaging processing For each channel A D conversion values are averaged for the set number of times or set amount of time and the average value is output as a digital value Moving average takes the average of the specified number of digital output values measured per sampling time The setting range of average time and count differ Refer to Q68AD G User s Manual and then confirm the specifications Primary delay filter A digital output value is smoothed according to the preset ti
97. range of the counter Counting range of the AD61 and AD61S1 differs from that of the QD62 H01 and QD62 H02 To make the counting range same as that of the module before replacement review the program AD61 AD61S1 0 to 16 777 215 24 bit unsigned binary QD62 H01 QD62 H02 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 32 bit signed binary Wiring to the module External wiring method of the AD61 and 151 differs from that of the QD62 H01 and QD62 H02 AD61 AD61S1 Wiring using a terminal block QD62 H01 QD62 H02 Wiring using a connector In module replacement continuous use of the I O signal wire with solderless terminal that has been used for the AD61 or AD61S1 requires the change of the external wiring method as in a b a Using the upgrade tool a conversion adaptor The existing wiring for AD61 and AD61S1 can be connected directly to the series modules using the upgrade tool a conversion adaptor manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd MELSEC A QnA MELSEC Q Product Conversion adaptor series module series module AD61 QD62 H01 igh ERNT AQTD61 High speed counter module AD61S1 QD62 H02 Q b For contact information for inquiries on the upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd refer to Section 2 1 6 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT c Using the connector terminal block converter module
98. request 48 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 7 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memories and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A62DA S1 Q64DAN Address Address Name Read write Name Read write decimal decimal 0 CH1 Digital value 0 D A conversion enable disable 1 CH2 Digital value 1 CH1 Digital value 2 CH1 Voltage upper limit check code RAW 2 CH2 Digital value R W 3 CH2 Voltage lower limit check code 3 CH3 Digital value 4 CH1 Current upper limit check code 4 CH4 Digital value 5 CH2 Current lower limit check code 5 to System area Not used 10 11 CH1 Setting value check code 12 CH2 Setting value check code 13 CH3 Setting value check code 14 Setting value check code 15 to System area Not used 18 19 Error code R 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 21 System area Not used Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Offset gain setting mode R W Gain specification 24 Offset gain adjusted value specification 25 to System area Not used 157 158 159 160 to System area Not used 199 200 Pass data classification setting R W 201 System area Not used 202 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value 203 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value 204 CH2 Industrial
99. resistance value must be 100 or less Q64RD Conductor al T 2 V A1 Pt100 B1 D b1 SLD Conductor Q64RD al 2 Al Pt100 B1 b1 1 SLD 0 60A 0 17kg 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 4 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available Item Description A68RD3N Q64RD Precautions for replacement Conversion enable disable Enables disables a detection of e specification of each channel temperature The setting ranges of time and count averages differ Sampling averaging processing Processes the detected temperature by Refer to the RTD Input Module selection specified method Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual to check the specifications Detected temperature value Stores temperature data in the buffer storage memory A 3 4 Detects a disconnection of connected Disconnection detection O platinum RTD or a cable Specification of platinum RTD d i Specifies a platinum RTD type used Range switching function Switches the measured temperature range O Outputs a warning when the temperature Warning output function O exceeds the set temperature range Converts a measured temperature value Scaling function into a percent value in set width Perform the error correction by Corrects an error in temperature conversion Error correction function O O the offset gain setting
100. status of the speed position _ control switch mode X10 X25 to X29 Use prohibited 2 to xip 2 2 1 The XY number same as the AD70 be used for the QD73A1 by setting Empty 0 point to the Unused area of the QD73A first half slot Empty 16 points in I O assignment of PLC parameter 2 A Use prohibited area is reserved for the system use and cannot be used by a user If it is turned on off through a sequence program the normal operation of the module cannot be guaranteed T 49 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT J 7 6 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required because the assignment of buffer memory differs between the modules For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the MELSEC Q QD73A1 Positioning Module User s Manual area shows the differences between the AD70 and the QD73A1 Buffer memory address Item AD70 QD73A1 et 0 0 Stroke limit upper limit 1 1 m 2 2 Stroke limit lower limit 3 3 Fixed parameter Numerator of command 4 4 pulse multiplication Electronic gear Denominator of command pulse 5 5 multiplication 20 20 Speed limit value 21 21 Acceleration time 22 22 Variable parameter Deceleration time 23 23 In position range 24 24 Positioning mode 25 25 40 40 OP address 41 41 42 42 OPR speed OPR dat
101. the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction Do not drop or apply shock to the battery to be installed in the module Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If the battery is dropped or any shock is applied to it dispose of it without using Before handling the module touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction A 5 Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details on battery regulations in EU member states refer to the MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Transportation Precautions CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries follow the transportation regulations Refer to QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for details of the controlled models CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii w
102. to 10V 1851 0 3 0 4 0 1 10 48 digits 64 digits 16 digits 10V 0 to 5V Voltage 9 1 to 5V User 0 3 0 4 10 196 Semngs 412 digits 16 digits 4 digits 0 to ETS CIGIS E16 digna EE 0 3 0 4 0 1 20mA 36 digits 48 digits 12 digits 4 to Current 20mA User range settings A616AD is the accuracy in respect to the full scale and Q68ADV I is the accuracy in respect to maximum digital output value 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item Maximum conversion speed A616AD When using only A616AD 1 When using a combination with AGOMX 1 When using a combination with AGOMXR 1 Sampling processing time 7 0 Direct access processing When using a combination with AGOMXRN 1 Sampling processing time 7 0 Direct access processing Unit ms channel Absolute maximum input Voltage 15V Current 30mA Analog input points 16 channels module Maximum number of writes for E PROM Isolation method Between the input terminal and programmable controller photocoupler isolation Between channels non isolated 1MQ resistor isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59N cm Applicable solderl
103. to 20mADC Input resistance value 250Q 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 O High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Input Analog input range Digital Maximum Digital Maximum output value resolution output value resolution to 10V 2 5mV 0 to 16000 0 625mV 0 to 5V 0 to 4000 1 25mV 0 416mV 0 to 12000 1 to 5V 1 0mV 0 333mV As concept of gain value is Volt is 1000 to 4500 1 0mV 3000 to 13500 0 333mV changed refer to Q68AD G Expanded mode User s Manual and then 10 to 10V 2 5mV 16000 to 16000 0 625mV um 4000 to 4000 confirm the I O characteristics Users range setting 0 375mV 12000 to 12000 0 333mV 0 to 20mA 5uA 1 66 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 4 to 20mA 4uA 1 33pA Current 4 to 20mA 1000 to 4500 4uA 3000 to 13500 1 33uA Expanded mode 2 M Users range setting 4000 to 4000 1 37 12000 to 12000 1 33pA 0 1 Normal resolution mode 4 digits High resolution mode 0 to 10V 10 to 10V 16 digits O High resolution mode Other than the above ranges 12 digits Temperature coefficient 71 4ppm C 0 00714 C 2 36 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A68AD S2 Maximum conversion speed Max 2 5ms channel Response time Absolute maximum input Voltage 15V Current 30mA Analog input points 8 channels module Maximum number of writes for E PROM I
104. values are averaged for the set number of times or set amount of time and the average value is ROO TOROS output as a digital value o Vi i i SES The setting range is as shown below Averaging processing by the number of times 4 to 62500 Averaging processing by time 2 to 5000ms A The maximum and minimum values of the Maximum and minimum digital output values are retained in the O values hold function module Errors arising from changes in the ambient temperature of the module are automatically Temperature drift compensated to improve conversion accuracy compensation function The temperature drift compensation function can be performed at A D conversion time for all channels 160us The resolution settings of 1 4000 1 12000 or 1 16000 can be selected according to the Resolution mode application O The resolution mode setting is applicable to all channels The CPUs corresponding to online A A module change is made without the system Online module change O module replacement are process CPU 2 7 being stopped and redundant CPU modules 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 2 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual A616AD Q68ADVII
105. 0 3kg Hardware version J or earlier 0 6kg 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68ADV Q68ADI Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compatibility Precautions for replacement The conversion speed of Q68ADV I to A68AD S2 has become quick And 80us channel then on A68AD S2 the noise that did When there is temperature drift compensation the time calculated by adding 160 us not import on Q68ADV I can be will be used regardless of the number of channels used imported as analog signal In this case use the averaging processing function to remove the effect of noise 15V 30mA O 8 channels module Max 100 000 times Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation O Between channels non isolated Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20 or more 16 points I O occupied points has changed to I O assignment intelligent 16 points 16 points 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm x Wiring change is required R1 25 3 A solderless terminal with sleeve can not be used x The recalculation of internal current 0 64A 0 64A A F consumption 5VDC is required 0 19kg 0 19kg O 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 5 2 Function comparison Item A D conversion en
106. 0 4490 to 4499 4740 to 4749 4990 to 4999 26199 27199 28199 1 With the QD75MLI the positioning data buffer memory addresses are Nos 1 to 600 2 With the 75 it is called block start data 3 With the QD75MLI the block start data and condition data in L the area are called start block 0 There are five start blocks 0 to 4 T 38 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of AD75MO AD75MLI QD75MO EE Start No 8001 4750 Positioning tad Indirect Start No 8002 4501 4751 5001 S designation to to to to to to to information Start No 8050 4549 4799 5049 T 5050 30000 Programmable controller Condition judgment target o CPU memory area data of the condition data 5099 30099 Target axis 5100 Head positioning block No 5101 No of read write data items 5102 Read write request 5103 Read write block 5110 to 6109 T 39 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT J 7 5 5 Interface specifications comparison with external devices For the external interface specifications the following shows the differences between AD75MLI and QD75MLI 1 Comparison of electrical specifications O Compatible A Partial change required TT compati Differences as Interface specifications Precautions for replacement bility OFF current 1 5mA 1 0mA Check whether the OFF cur
107. 16 777 215 2147483648 to 2147483647 values change of sequence program is required Type UP DOWN preset counter ring counter function Counter Minimum count pulse 5 width 20us set input rise time to 5 us or less 10us 10us 2 Duty ratio 1 2 phase input 9 5096 Magnitude Comparison 24 bit unsigned binary 32 bit signed binary comparison range E between o Set value count value 5 CPU Comparison a Set value count value AD61 QD62 result Set value gt count value H01 12 24VDC 3 6mA Preset 5 12 24VDC 2 to 5mA 5VDC 5mA On QD62 H01 as the external External Count 12 24VDC 3 6mA input specifications differ input disable 5VDC 5mA confirm the external devices Function specifications RA 5 12 24 VDC 2 to 5mA start Ti ist ink t tput 2 Transistor ransis even ype outpu External Coincidence points channel output output apen collector output 12 24VDC 0 5A point 5 12 24VDC 0 5A dei 2A common Int t ti nternal current consumption 0 3A 5VDC Weight 0 5kg 0 11kg 6 4 6 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 1 numbers of the modules mounted to the right of the QD62 H01 change because the number of I O occupied points for the AD61 are different from the QD62 H01 Set the start I O number for the module mounted to the right of the QD62 H01 to the same number for the module before the replacement in the I O assignment tab of the
108. 16 CH6 Digital output value 17 CH8 Digital output value 17 CH7 Digital output value 18 Write data error code 18 CH8 Digital output value 19 A D conversion completed flag 19 Error code 20 Resolution setting R W 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 21 Setting range CH5 to CH8 22 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification 23 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification A i ification CH1 t 24 veraging process specification o RW CH4 25 Averaging process specification CH5 to CH8 26 27 System area Not used 28 29 30 CH1 Maximum value 31 CH1 Minimum value 32 CH2 Maximum value 33 CH2 Minimum value R 34 CH3 Maximum value to 44 CH8 Maximum value 45 CH8 Minimum value 2 57 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68AD G Address Name Read write Dec 46 System area Not used 47 Input signal error detection extended input signal error detection setting R W 48 Warning output setting 49 Input signal error detection flag 50 Warning output flag Process alarm R 51 Warning output flag Rate alarm 52 System area Not used 53 Scaling enable disable setting R W 54 CH1 Scaling value to R 61 CH8 Scaling value 62 CH1 Scaling lower limit value 63 CH1 Scaling upper limit value to 76 CH8 Scaling lower limit value 77 CH8 Scaling upper limit value to 86 CH1 Process alarm lower l
109. 2 2 2 Function comparison O With functions Without functions A D conversion enable Specifies whether to enable or disable the A D conversion for each channel 5 By disabling the conversion for the channels i that are not used the sampling time can be shortened The sampling processing time changes depending on the number of channels used number of channels set to A D conversion enable and whether with or without the temperature drift compensation The A D conversion for analog input values is fancti unction p performed successively for each channel Sampling processing a Without temperature drift the digital output value is output upon each compensation function processing conversion time number of channels used x 80 us 1 channel b With temperature drift compensation function processing time number of channels used x 80 us 1 channel 160us Sequence program separately from normal sampling processing can specify channels to carry out the A D conversion and outputting the direct access request can perform direct A 3 n Q68ADV I does not have Direct Direct access processing D conversion of specified channels MU access processing function When inputting channel specification with sampling processing and direct access processing simultaneously the direct access request is prioritized For each channel A D conversion
110. 2 CH7 Maximum value 43 CH7 Minimum value 44 CH8 Maximum value 45 CH8 Minimum value 2 33 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68ADVII Address Name Read write Dec 46 to System area Not used 157 158 Mode switching setting R W 159 160 to System area Not used 201 202 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value 203 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value 204 CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value 205 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value 206 CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value 207 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value 208 CH4 Industrial shipment settings offset value 209 CH4 Industrial shipment settings gain value 210 CH5 Industrial shipment settings offset value 211 CH5 Industrial shipment settings gain value 212 CH6 Industrial shipment settings offset value 213 CH6 Industrial shipment settings gain value 214 CH7 Industrial shipment settings offset value 215 CH7 Industrial shipment settings gain value 216 CH8 Industrial shipment settings offset value 217 CH8 Industrial shipment settings gain value RW 218 CH1 User range settings offset value 219 CH1 User range settings gain value 220 CH2 User range settings offset value 221 CH2 User range settings gain value 222 CH3 User range settings offset value 223 CH3 User range settings gain value 224 CH4 User
111. 2308 3308 2008 8008 14008 Da 6 Arc address 1309 2309 3309 2009 8009 14009 14010 to No 2 1310 to 1319 2310 to 2319 3310 to 3319 2010 to 2019 8010 to 8019 o 14020 to No 3 1320 to 1329 2320 to 2329 3320 to 3329 2020 to 2029 8020 to 8029 pue to to to to to to to 14990 to No 100 2290 to 2299 3290 to 3299 4290 to 4299 2990 to 2999 8990 to 8999 ps Da 10 Shape Da 11 Start data No T N S 3 Da 12 Special start point 4300 4350 4550 4600 4800 4850 27000 27050 28000 28050 x instruction o o x Da 13 Parameter 5 2nd point 4301 4351 4551 4601 4801 4851 26001 27001 27051 28001 28051 3rd point 4302 4352 4552 4602 4802 4852 26002 27002 27052 28002 28052 to to to to t to to 50th point 4349 4399 4599 4649 4849 4899 26049 27049 27099 28049 28099 g Da 14 Condition target 2 55 75 4400 4650 4900 26100 27100 28100 s operator v o 4402 4652 4902 26102 27102 28102 o 4403 4653 4903 26103 27103 28103 gs 4404 4654 4904 26104 27106 28106 l Da 17 Parameter 1 4405 4655 4905 26105 27107 28107 5 4406 4656 4906 26106 27106 28106 Parameter 2 4407 4657 4907 26107 27107 28107 8 26110 to 27110 to 28110 to No 2 4410 to 4419 4660 to 4669 4910 to 4919 26119 27119 28119 26120 to 27120 to 28120 to No 3 4420 to 4429 4670 to 4679 4920 to 4929 26129 27129 28129 to to to to to to to 26190 to 27190 to 28190 to No 1
112. 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Terminals other than FG R1 25 3 Sleeved solderless terminal cannot be used Wiring change is required 0 38A The recalculation of internal current consumption 5VDC is required 24VDC 20 15 Ripple spike 500mVp p or less 0 27A 2 5A 230us or less 0 20kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 8 2 Functional comparison Description O Available Not available Precautions for replacement D A conversion enable disable function Specifies whether to enable or disable the D A conversion for each channel On Q68DAIN by disabling the D A conversion for the channels that are not used the conversion speed can be shortened D A output enable disable function Specifies whether to output the D A conversion value or the offset value for each channel The conversion speed stays constant regardless of whether D A output is enabled or disabled On Q68DAIN the output enable disable is set with Y signal CHO Output enable disable flag Synchronous output function Obtains analog output synchronized with the programmable controller CPU The analog output will be updated after Synchronous output request YD is set to ON and the time specified as programmable controller CPU processing time 120us has elapsed However the analog output will be fixed to CH1 and other channels CH2 to CH8 cannot be used When the module is mounted on a remo
113. 256 1514 1614 1714 Cd 16 New speed value 1157 1207 1257 1515 1615 1715 Cd 17 Speed change request 1158 1208 1258 1516 1616 1716 Cd 18 Positioning operation speed override 1159 1209 1259 1513 1613 1713 JOG 1160 1210 1260 1518 1618 1718 Cela 1161 1211 1261 1519 1619 1719 Cd 20 Speed position switching enable 1163 1213 1263 1528 1628 1728 flag Cd 21 Speed position switching control 1164 1214 1264 1526 1626 1726 movement amount change register 1165 1215 1265 1527 1627 1727 Cd 22 Manual pulse generator enable 1167 1217 1267 1524 1624 1724 flag Cd 23 Manual pulse generator 1 pulse 1168 1218 1268 1522 1622 1722 input magnification 1169 1219 1269 1523 1623 1723 Cd 24 OPR return request flag OFF request 1170 1220 1270 1521 1621 1721 Cd 25 External start valid QD75MLI 8 External command 1171 1221 1271 1505 1605 1705 valid Cd 26 Step valid flag 1172 1222 1272 1545 1645 1745 Cd 27 Step mode 1173 1223 1273 1544 1644 1744 28 Step start information 1174 1224 1274 1546 1646 1746 Cd 29 Skip command 1175 1225 1275 1547 1647 1747 Cd 30 New torque value 1176 1226 1276 1525 1625 1725 Cd 31 Positioning starting point No 1178 1228 1278 1501 1601 1701 Cd 100 Servo OFF command 1179 1229 1279 1551 1651 1751 Cd 101 Torque output setting value 1180 1230 1280 1552 1652 1752 T 36 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address I
114. 26 30326 Pr 127 Monitor output 1 offset 127 277 427 30127 30227 30327 Pr 128 Monitor output 2 offset 128 278 428 30128 30228 30328 129 data selection 129 279 429 30129 30229 30329 Pr 130 Zero speed 130 280 430 30130 30230 30330 Pr 131 Error excessive alarm level 131 281 431 30131 30231 30331 Pr 132 Optional function 5 132 282 432 30132 30232 30332 133 Optional function 6 133 283 433 30133 30233 30333 PI PID control switch over position 134 284 434 30134 30234 30334 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Item of 075 AD75MO Buffer memory address QD75MLI Maker setting 30135 30235 30335 Pr 136 Speed differential compensation 136 286 436 30136 30236 30336 Pr 137 Maker setting 30137 30237 30337 Pr 138 Encoder output pulses 138 288 438 30138 30238 30338 Pr 149 Servo parameter transmission 149 299 449 _ setting Maker setting 30139 30239 30339 Maker setting 30140 30240 30340 Maker setting 30141 30241 30341 S gntvipration suppression control _ 30143 30243 30343 selection 1 suppression control _ _ _ 30144 30244 30344 selection 2 Induction voltage compensation 30145 30245 30345 Maker setting 30146 30246 30346 Maker setting 30147 30247 30347 Maker setting 30148
115. 26 3990 Fax 90 216 526 3995 Tel 4971 4 3724716 Fax 971 4 3724721 Tel 27 11 658 8100 Fax 27 11 658 8101 Tel 86 21 2322 3030 Fax 86 21 2322 3000 Tel 886 2 2299 2499 Fax 886 2 2299 2509 Tel 82 2 3660 9530 Fax 82 2 3664 8372 Tel 65 6473 2308 Fax 65 6476 7439 Tel 66 2682 6522 Fax 66 2682 6020 Tel 84 4 3937 8075 Fax 84 4 3937 8076 Tel 62 21 3192 6461 Fax 62 21 3192 3942 Tel 91 20 2710 2000 Fax 91 20 2710 2100 Tel 61 2 9684 7777 Fax 61 2 9684 7245 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Nagoya Works is a factory certified for ISO 14001 standards for environmental management systems and ISO 90 9 2 E lt S5 C ISO 9001 BUREAU VERITAS Certification v UKAS MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS F lt On SO Nap oa S Myr yy EC97J1113 HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN standards for quality assurance management systems MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS L NA O8046ENG H 1505 MEE New publication effective May 2015 Specifications are subject to change without notice
116. 3 Execution prohibition flag Y16 Synchronization flag X01 Axis 4 Execution prohibition flag Y17 X02 X03 to YOF Y02 YO3 Not used X10 to X1F Not used X18 to X1F Y1E to Y1F Y18 to Y1F The ON OFF statuses for READY are different between the QD75MLI and AD75MLI Not READY WDT error READY QD75MO OFF ON AD75MO ON OFF T 27 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 5 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the Type QD75M Positioning Module User s Manual area shows the differences between AD75MLI and QD75MLI Buffer memory address AD75M0 QD75MLI Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Item of AD75MO Pr 1 Unit setting 0 150 300 0 150 300 No of pul ion AP 1 151 301 Va e Pr 2 No of pulses per rotation AP 3 153 303 2 152 302 4 154 304 Pr 3 Movement amount per rotation AL 5 155 305 Pr 4 Unit magnification AM 3 153 303 1 151 301 D 6 156 306 10 160 310 Pr 7 Speed limit value 7 157 307 11 161 311 8 158 308 12 162 312 8 Acceleration time 0 9 159 309 13 163 311 m 10 160 310 14 164 314 Pr 9
117. 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A62DA Q62DAN Device Device Device i Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No XO Watchdog timer error YO Module READY YO Not used CH1 Output enable X1 D A conversion READY Y1 1 disable flag CH2 Output enable X2 Y2 Y2 disable flag X3 Y3 Not used Y3 X4 Y4 Y4 X5 Y5 Y5 X6 Y6 Y6 Not used XT YT YT High resolution mode X8 Y8 Y8 status flag Operating condition Operating condition X9 Y9 Y9 setting completion flag setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA YA User range write request status flag Not used Channel change XB YB YB Channel change request completion flag Setting value change Setting value change XC YC YC completion flag request Synchronous output Synchronous output XD YD YD Not used mode flag request XE YE Not used YE Not used XF YF Error flag YF Error clear request X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 CPU selection signal X19 Y19 Sign of CH1 digital input X1A Y1A Sign of CH2 digital input X1B Y1B Output enable X1C Y1C X1D Y1D Not us
118. 4RD G addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications change 4CH module 5 Functional specifications RTD Ni100 compliant and transformer isolation is provided between channels 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 1 Depending on the connected sensor and the analog input range use each module in combination A616TD A60MX A60MXR A60MXRN A60MXT and AG0MXTN as shown below The description in this chapter is based on the condition with Thermocouple connected which is a general use Sensor other than thermocouple Module combination Thermocouple 0 to 10V 10 to 10V 20 to 20mA A616TD A60MXT N O O A616TD A60MXT N A60MX R RN O A616TD A60MX R RN O O A616TD gt E 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 2 A616TD Replacement to the Q64TD 4 2 1 Performance comparison 1 Performance comparison list Temperature sensor input A616TD When using the A60MXT and A60MXTN together 200 to 1800 C Digital output value 16 bit signed binary 0 to 4000 Data part 12 bits Output Detected temperature value 16 bit signed binary 2000 to 18000 value up to the first decimal place x 10 Applicable thermocouple Refer to Section 4 2 1 2 Measured temperature range accuracy Refer to Section 4 2 1 2 Overall accuracy Refer to the table in Section 4 2 1 2 Measured temperature range accuracy 0 5 C Maximum
119. 5 1625 1725 Cd 31 Positioning starting point No 1178 1228 1278 1501 1601 1701 Cd 32 Interrupt request during continuous operation 1181 1231 1281 1520 1620 1720 A 1184 1234 1284 1508 1608 1708 Cd 33 New acceleration time value 4185 1235 1285 1509 1609 1709 1186 1236 1286 1510 1610 1710 Cd 34 New deceleration time value 4187 4237 4287 1511 1611 1711 Cd 35 Acceleration deceleration time change during speed 4188 1238 1288 1512 1612 1712 change enable disable selection T 17 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of AD75PL1 S3 AD75PL1 S3 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Da 1 Operation pattern Da 2 Control system d 1300 2300 3300 2000 8000 14000 Da 3 Acceleration time No Da 4 Deceleration time No Da 5 M code condition data 1301 2301 3301 2001 8001 14001 No Da 8 Dwell time JUMP No 1 1302 2302 3302 2002 8002 14002 y destination positioning data No 8 Empty 1303 2303 3303 2003 8003 14003 E 1304 2304 3306 2004 8004 14004 Bas gommand speed 1305 2305 3307 2005 8005 14005 Positioning address 1306 2306 3306 2006 8006 14006 1307 2307 3307 2007 8007 14007 1308 2308 3308 2008 8008 14008 6 Arc address 1309 2309 3309 2009 800
120. 5 215 365 Pr 44 Near pass mode selection for path 66 216 366 _ control Pr 45 OPR method 70 220 370 70 220 370 Pr 46 OPR direction 71 221 371 71 221 371 72 222 372 72 222 372 73 223 373 73 223 373 74 224 374 74 224 374 Pr48 OPR Speed 75 225 375 75 225 375 76 226 376 76 226 376 Pr 49 Creep spesd 77 227 377 77 227 377 Pr 50 OPR retry 78 228 378 78 228 378 OPR dwell time 79 229 379 Pr 52 Setting for the movement amount 80 230 380 80 230 380 after near point dog ON 81 231 381 81 231 381 Pr 53 OPR acceleration time selection 82 232 382 82 232 382 Pr 54 OPR deceleration time selection 83 233 383 83 233 383 OP shift 84 234 384 84 234 384 pr 55 OP sniit amount 85 235 385 85 235 385 Pr 56 OPR torque limit value 86 236 386 86 236 386 T 29 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of AD75MO QD75MO Pr 57 Speed designation during OP shift 88 238 388 88 238 388 Pr 58 Dwell time during OPR retry 89 239 389 89 239 389 Pr 59 Absolute position restoration 91 241 391 _ selection Pr 100 Servo series 100 250 400 30100 30200 30300 Pr 101
121. 5A O 2 5A 250us or less 0 19kg O 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 4 2 Functional comparison Item Analog output HOLD CLEAR Description Retains an analog value that was output O Available Not available A62DA Q62DAN Precautions for replacement when the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status or an error occurs D A conversion enable disable Specifies whether to enable or disable the function D A conversion o f em The Q62DAN specifies whether D A output enable disable Specifies whether to output the D A function conversion value or the offset value fo erable or disable oitput tor each channel Obtains analog output synchronized with the programmable controller CPU Outputs the analog value converted from a Analog output test while the digital value when Output enable programmable controller CPU is disable flag is forcibly turned on while the O in the STOP status programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status Switches the resolution mode according to the application Resolution mode The resolution can be selected from 1 4000 o 1 12000 or 1 16000 The resolution mode is batch set for all channels Replaceable modules during Replaces a module without stopping the Online module replacement O online are the Process CPU and system the Redundant CPU 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 4
122. 5uA analog value 1 12000 1 6uA Overall accuracy accuracy at maximum analog 1 0 200pA output value Within 40ms 8 channels same time for one channel Note Time from when the digital input is written to when the specified analog value is reached 0 to 28mA Note Max output current restricted by output protection circuit Conversion speed Absolute maximum output Number of analog output 8 channels module points 51 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68DAIN Compatibility Precautions for replacement 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 O High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 0 to 20mADC o External load resistance value 0Q to 600Q Normal resolutior High resolution mode Analog output mode range Digital Maximum Digital input Maximum input value resolution value resolution 0 to 20mA 5uA 1 66uA 410 20m 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 133A Curent U 4000 t 12000 t 9 ser range settings 4000 12000 099 Ambient temperature 25 5 C within 0 1 20pA Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C within 0 3 60 80yus channel O 21mA 8 channels module O 3 52 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A68DAI S1 Number of writes to E7PROM Output short protection Isolation method Between the output
123. 68TD G H02 Partial addition CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Section 2 4 Section 2 6 Section 2 8 Partial correction Term revision whole SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Chapter 3 whole Chapter 4 whole Section 5 1 1 Section 5 2 1 Section 6 1 Section 6 2 1 Section 7 1 Section 7 4 1 Section 7 4 4 Section 7 5 1 Section 7 5 4 Chapter 9 Appendix 2 1 Appendix 2 3 Partial deletion Chapter 9 External dimensions Model addition QD73A1 Model change QD75PLI gt QD75PLIN QD75DO gt QD75DLIN Section 7 6 Partial correction Section 2 4 4 Section 2 6 1 Section 2 8 1 Section 3 1 Section 4 6 1 Section 6 1 Section 6 3 4 Section 7 1 Section 7 2 Section 7 4 The handbook number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Handbook Number Revision Jun 2013 L NA 08046ENG F Partial correction Section 4 1 Section 6 2 1 Section 6 3 1 Section 7 1 Section 7 4 4 Section 7 5 4 Section 7 6 4 Section 7 6 6 Sep 2014 L NA 08046ENG G Partial correction Section 2 1 Section 3 1 Section 4 1 Section 5 1 Section 6 1 Section 7 1 Section 7 2 Section 7 3 Section 7 5 5 Appendix 2 1 May 2015 L NA 08046ENG H Addition Appendix 4 Change Chapter 9 to Appendix 1 Appendix1 to Appendix 2 Appendix2 to Appendix 3 Section3 1 Section7 1 Section7 6 1 Section7 6 2 Japanese Handbook Version L 08045 I This handbook confers no industria
124. 6DAV Q68DAVN Device Device Device Device i Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No No XO Watchdog timer error flag YO XO Module READY YO Not used D A conversion READY CH1 Output enable X1 Y1 X1 Y1 flag disable flag CH2 Output enable X2 flag Y2 X2 Y2 disable flag CH3 Output enable X3 Y3 X3 Y3 disable flag CH4 Output enable X4 Y4 X4 Not used Y4 disable flag CH5 Output enable X5 Y5 X5 Y5 disable flag CH6 Output enable X6 Y6 X6 Y6 Not used disable flag CH7 Output enable XT YT XT YT disable flag High resolution mode CH8 Output enable X8 Y8 X8 Y8 status flag disable flag Operating condition Operating condition x9 Y9 X9 Y9 setting completion flag setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA XA YA User range write request status flag Channel change XB YB XB YB Channel change request completion flag Not used Setting value change Setting value change XC YC XC YC completion flag request Synchronous output Synchronous output XD YD XD YD RFRP RTOP instruction mode flag request XE YE interlock signal XE _ Not used YE Not used XF YF Error flag YF clear request X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 Not used X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B Output enable ba
125. 84 to 16383 A616AD can set the data format to 2048 to 2047 However Q68ADV I cannot set When using the conversion data of Q68ADV I in 2048 to 2047 convert with sequence program Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Analog input range Digital Maximum Digital Maximum output value resolution output value resolution 0 to 10V 2 5mV 0 to 16000 0 625mV 0 to 5V 0 to 4000 1 25mV 0 416mV 0 to 12000 1 to 5V 1 0mV 0 333mV Voltage 10 to 10V 2 5mV 16000 to 16000 0 625mV 4000 to 4000 User range P 0 375mV 12000 to 12000 0 333mV settings 0 to 20mA 5uA 1 66uA 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 4 to 20mA 4uA 1 33uA Current T e 4000 to 4000 1 37pA 12000 to 12000 1 33uA settings When using A616AD in 5 to 5V range Q68ADV can obtain equivalent resolution or more than A616AD by setting in 10 to 10V range high resolution mode or user range When using A616AD in 20 to 20mA range use Q68ADI in user range Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Ambient temperature Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 0 to 55 C Analog input Ambient Ambient With Without With Without range i t temperature i i t temperature empera ure empera ure empera ure empera Ue drift drift drift drift compensation compensation compensation compensation 0
126. 9 14009 14010 to No 2 1310 to 1319 2310 to 2319 3310 to 3319 2010 to 2019 8010 to 8019 ES 14020 to No 3 1320 to 1329 2320 to 2329 3320 to 3329 2020 to 2029 8020 to 8029 Mn to to to to to to to 14990 to No 100 2290 to 2299 3290 to 3299 4290 to 4299 2990 to 2999 8990 to 8999 Een Da 10 Shape Da 11 Start data No pe N S Da 72 Special start pont 4300 4350 4550 4600 4800 4850 27000 27050 28000 28050 x instruction 3 Da 13 Parameter 5 2nd point 4301 4351 4551 4601 4801 4851 26001 26051 27001 27051 28001 28051 3rd point 4302 4352 4552 4602 4802 4852 26002 26052 27002 27052 28002 28052 ga to to to to to to to 3 50th point 4349 4399 4599 4649 4849 4899 26049 26099 27049 27099 28049 28099 E zs 5 eee 4400 4650 4900 26100 27100 28100 c m Da 15 Condition operator 4402 4652 4902 26102 27102 28102 2 Da 16jAddress No 1 4403 4653 4903 26103 27103 28103 5 4404 4654 4904 26104 27104 28104 8 g Det 4405 4655 4905 26105 27105 28105 4406 4656 4906 26106 27106 28106 4407 4657 4907 26107 27107 28107 S 26110 to 27110 to 28110 to 8 No 2 4410 to 4419 4660 to 4669 4910 to 4919 26119 27119 28119 26120 to 27120 to 28120 to No 3 4420 to 4429 4670 to 4679 4920 to 4929 26129 27129 28129 to to to to to to to 26190 to 27190 to 28190 to No 10 4490 to 4499 4740 to 4749 4990 to 4999 26199 27199 28199 1 Wit
127. A 230us or less 0 20kg O 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 3 2 Functional comparison Item D A conversion Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the D A conversion for each channel By disabling the D A conversion for the O With functions Without functions A616DAV Q68DAVN Precautions for replacement enable disable channels that are not used the conversion speed can be function shortened Specifies whether to output the D A conversion value or the On Q68DAVN the output D A output enable offset value for each channel enable disable is set with Y disable function The conversion speed stays constant regardless of signal Output enable whether D A output is enabled or disabled disable flag Obtains analog output synchronized with the programmable controller CPU The analog output will be updated after Synchronous output request YD is set to ON and the time specified as programmable controller CPU processing time 120s Synchronous output neice has elapsed However the analog output will be fixed to CH1 and other channels CH2 to CH8 cannot be used When the module is mounted on a remote I O station the analog output will not be synchronized because of a link scan delay if the synchronous output function is specified 1 Refer to Analog output status combination list in the Digital Analog
128. A68AD Upgrade to Q68ADV Q68ADI 2 11 2 3 1 Performance Eid atn hee t atti uada Pg Nod ape and 2 11 2 3 2 Function COMPANISOMN x eere 608 2 15 2 3 3 signal comparison to programmable controller CPU see 2 16 2 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison 2 17 2 4 A68AD Upgrade to Q68AD G ssssssssssssesseeeee enhn ener nennen enr sen nent nnne nennen 2 19 2 4 1 Performance comparison 0 02 2 ceceee cece eeeeeceeeee eee eeeeeeeteeseceaeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeesessccnaeceeeeeeeeeeeeetensnteees 2 19 2 4 2 Function comparison scssi nit rte e E aed Lead uen eria ue E IE Sab AA E 2 23 2 4 3 O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU sse 2 24 2 4 4 Buffer memory address comparison cccccicicacccccaaoccracasssoeaaaccananaasseeeaasennanananonaneennana 2 25 2 5 A68AD S2 Upgrade to Q68ADV 68 2 27 2 5 1 Performance comparison ecrire rre d e E a desee red ov ea e P Ree due ines 2 27 2 5 2 Function compariSODn i ERAT AIRE ERAI 2 31 2 5 3 O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU sse 2 32 2 5 4 Buffer memory address comparison eene nnne 2 33 2 6
129. ACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64DAN Compatibility Precautions for replacement P According to the I O conversion 16 bit signed binary characteristics used make the output Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 A range setting and offset gain setting High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 of the Q64DAN Voltage 10 to 10VDC External load resistance value 1kQ to 1MQ O The minus current cannot be output Current 0 to 20mADC External load resistance value 0Q to 600Q Normal resolution High resolution mode mode Digital input Maximum Digital input Maximum value resolution value resolution 0 to 5V 0 to 1 25mV 0 to 0 416mV According to the I O conversion 1 to 5V 4000 1 0mV 12000 160001 characteristics used make the output 10 to 10V 4496 to 2 5mV 16000 range setting and offset gain setting of the Q64DAN User range 4000 075my 12000 to settings 12000 0 to 20mA 0 to 5UA 0 to Current 4 to 20mA 4000 4UA 12000 Userrange 4000 to 12000 to setlings 4000 158A 42000 Analog output range Ambient temperature 25 5 C within 0 1 voltage 10mV current 20 Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C within 0 3 o voltage 30mV current 60 80us channel O Voltage 12V A The minus current cannot be output Current 21mA 4 channels mo
130. Allowed Lower limit Negative logic Not allowed Negative logic Allowed External start Negative logic Not allowed lt Negative logic Allowed Speed position switching signal Negative logic Not allowed 1 The following shows comparisons about manual pulse generator A phase B phase 75 9075 0 No of connection 1 generator axis 1 generator module Allowed Mode change Parameter Not allowed 1 x mode 2 x mode 4 x mode PLS SIGN mode 2 With the QD75MLI the external start signal and speed position switching signal are combined into the external command signal switching signal T 40 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 Supported servo amplifier a For continuous use of a servo amplifier connected with the existing AD75M The following table shows whether or not the existing servo amplifier can be continuously used with positioning modules replaced AD75MO QD75MO m Remarks Supported amplifier model Y NEU ETTI 57 VERSE Available Needs to change the SSCNET cables refer to b in the next MR HO B Available un C nus i cables refer to b in the next page MR J20 B Available Needs to change the SSCNET cables refer to b in the next page MR J2SLI B Available Model to be discontinued at the end of September 2015 Point 1 Selecting suitable products to replace the existing servo amplifier When replacing the existing servo amplifier select a positioning mo
131. Amplifier setting 101 251 401 30101 30201 30301 Pr 102 Regenerative brake resistor 102 252 402 30102 30202 30302 Pr 103 Motor type 103 253 403 30103 30203 30303 Pr 104 Motor capacity 104 254 404 30104 30204 30304 105 Servo motor speed 105 255 405 30105 30205 30305 Pr 106 Feed back pulse 106 256 406 30106 30206 30306 Pr 107 Rotation direction selection 107 257 407 30107 30207 30307 Pr 108 Auto tuning 108 258 408 30108 30208 30308 Pr 109 Servo response 109 259 409 30109 30209 30309 Maker setting 30110 30210 30310 Maker setting 30111 30211 30311 Pr 112 Load inertia ratio 112 262 412 30112 30212 30312 Pr 113 Position loop gain 1 113 263 413 30113 30213 30313 Pr 114 Speed loop gain 1 114 264 414 30114 30214 30314 Pr 115 Position loop gain 2 115 265 415 30115 30215 30315 Pr 116 Speed loop gain 2 116 266 416 30116 30216 30316 Pr 117 Speed integral compensation 117 267 417 30117 30217 30317 Pr 118 Notch filter selection 118 268 418 30118 30218 30318 Pr 119 Feed forward gain 119 269 419 30119 30219 30319 Pr 120 In position range 120 270 420 30120 30220 30320 Pr 121 Electromagnetic brake sequence 121 271 421 30121 30221 30321 output 122 Analog monitor output 122 272 422 30122 30222 30322 Pr 123 Optional function 1 123 273 423 30123 30223 30323 Pr 124 Optional function 2 124 274 424 30124 30224 30324 Pr 125 Adaptive vibration suppression 125 275 425 30125 30225 30325 control low pass filter Pr 126 Maker setting s 5 E 30126 302
132. Converter Module User s Retains an analog value that was output when the Analog output HOLD un Manual to check the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status O O CLEAR function execution status of output error occurs 2 For the Q68DAVN this function is set with the intelligent function module Switch setting Outputs the analog value converted from a digital value when CHLI Output enable disable flag is forcibly turned on while the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP Analog output test status while the programmable Setting DIA conversion Enable Disable n controller CPU is in the combi enable disable STOP status nation SHE Output Enable Disable Enable Disable enable disable flag Analog output test Allowed NOE Not allowed allowed Switches the resolution mode according to the application s The resolution can be selected from 1 4000 1 12000 or 1 Resolution mode 16000 The resolution mode is batch set for all channels Replaceable modules during Online module Replaces a module without stopping the system O online are the Process CPU replacement 3 15 and the Redundant CPU 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 3 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A61
133. Deceleration time 0 11 161 311 15 165 315 12 162 312 6 156 306 Pr 10 Bias speed at start 13 163 313 7 157 307 Pr 12 Backlash compensation amount 15 165 315 17 167 317 13 Software stroke limit upper limit 16 166 316 18 168 318 value 17 167 317 19 169 319 Pr 14 Software stroke limit lower limit 18 168 318 20 170 320 value 19 169 319 21 171 321 Pr 15 Software stroke limit selection 20 170 320 22 172 322 Pr 16 Software stroke limit valid invalid 21 171 321 23 173 323 setting 22 172 322 24 174 324 Pr 17 Command in position width 23 173 323 25 175 325 Pr 18 Torque limit setting value 24 174 324 26 176 326 Pr 19 M code ON signal output timing 25 175 325 27 177 327 Pr 20 Speed switching mode 26 176 326 28 178 328 Pr 21 Interpolation speed designation 27 177 327 29 179 329 method Pr 22 Current feed value during speed 28 178 328 30 180 330 control Pr 23 Manual pulse generator selection 29 179 329 33 3 Pr 25 Size selection for acceleration 31 181 331 _ 2 deceleration time Function selection for speed positioning 34 184 334 E 36 186 336 36 186 336 Pr 26 Acceleration time 1 37 487 337 37 487 337 2 38 188 338 38 188 338 Pr 27 time 2 39 189 339 39 189 339 anes 40 190 340 40 190 340 Pr 28 Acceleration time 41 191 341 41 191 341 T 28 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address
134. IEC751 1983 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 Ni100 DIN 43760 1987 As the compliance standards for the applicable RTD differ change the RTD to the one that can be used with the Q64RD G 200 to 850 C 180 to 600 C 60 to 180 C 1 0 025 40ms channel 4 channels module gt oo O Consider replacement with multiple Q64RD G 1mA Dielectric withstand voltage Isolation Isolated area method Insulation resistance Between RTD input and programmable Photocoupler 1780VrmsAC 3 cycles isolation altitude 2000m controller power supply Between RTD input and channel Transformer isolation 10M9 or more using 500VDC insulation resistance tester Detected per channel 16 points I O assignment intelligent 16 points The number of occupied I O points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block 0 3 to 0 75mm Wiring change is required 1 25 3 R1 25 3 Sleeved solderless terminal cannot be used 1 Indicates accuracy of the Q64RD G accuracy at the maximum value in the selection range Accuracy Reference accuracy Specifications Within 0 0496 Pt100 JPt100 20 to 120 C 70 0 0070 C Pt100 JPt100 0 to 200 C 65 0 0065 Temperature coefficient elent Pt100 JPt100 2200 to 850 C Ni100Q 60 to 180 C 2 C
135. L95 12 High Speed Counter Module QD62 H01 QD62 H02 User s Manual 1B 0800421 13JY78 13 Type QD75P QD75D Positioning Module User s Manual SH 080058 13JR09 14 Type QD75M Positioning Module User s Manual 1B 0300062 1CT752 15 GX Configurator QP Version 2 Operating Manual SH 080172 13JU19 16 QD73A1 Positioning Module User s Manual SH 081075ENG 13JZ69 App 4 Appendix 3 4 Programming tool No Manual name Manual number Model code 1 GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual SH 080373E 13JU41 App 5 Appendix 4 How to Change Resolution After Analog I O Module is Replaced This section describes how to change the resolution of an analog I O module after the module is replaced from A series to Q series 1 Resolution of A series and Q series analog I O modules Each A series analog I O module have different resolutions Please check the resolution of the module in this handbook or user s manual If the resolution differs between A series and Q series modules it needs to be matched by a user by creating a sequence program or changing user range settings Measure required by user A Measure not required by user Resolution of Q series analog I O module Resolution of A series Normal resolution High resolution mode User range a EE MOLE 3 Voltage 1 12000 1 4000 1 12000 1 16000 1 4000 1 8000 AU AU A 1 12000 o a g Change the resolution in a sequence program Refer to Appe
136. MITSUBISHI for a greener tomorro w RA ELECTRIC ee Changes for the Better Mitsubishi Programmable Controller Transition from MELSEC A QnA Large Type Series to Q Series Handbook Intelligent Function Modules E35 annaa May 2015 Edition SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels A WARNING and A CAUTION NWARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under A CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system operates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power suppl
137. PU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Thermocouple Input Module Channel Isolated Thermocouple Micro Voltage Input Module User s Manual A616TD Q68TD G H02 Q68TD G H01 Device Device Device 2 Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No XO Watchdog timer error YO Module READY YO X1 conversion READY Y1 Y1 X2 flag Y2 Y2 Disconnection error X3 WS Y3 detection Digital output value out X4 Y4 Y4 of range detection Not used Not used Detected temperature X5 value out of range Y5 Y5 detection X6 Y6 Y6 XT YT YT X8 Y8 Not used Y8 Operating condition Operating condition X9 Y9 Y9 setting completion flag setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA YA Userrange write request status flag Channel change XB YB f YB Channel change request completion flag Q68TD G H02 Disconnection detection XC YC signal YC Q68TD G H01 Disconnection status Not used monitor signal xD YD Interlock signal for the Warning output signal YD XE YE RFRP and RTOP Conversion completion YE Not used instructions when the flag XF YF bd used i Error flag YF Error clear request remote I O station Detected temperature X10 Y10 value LED display request signal x11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14
138. Q parameter setting window The program for the module before the replacement can be used 2 The rise fall time of a pulse affects the counting speed Countable counting speeds are as follows Counting a pulse greater than t 50us may result in a miscount For the AD61 and QD62 H01 common for 1 phase input and 2 phase input Rise fall time 2 phase input t 5us 50KPPS t 50us 5KPPS Common to 1 phase input and t 5u s SOKPPS t 50u s 5KPPS 4 6 5 6 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 6 2 2 Function comparison O With functions Without functions Description AD61 QD62 H01 Precautions for replacement Preset function Changes the counter present value to a specified value Disable function Terminates counting Ring counter function Repeatedly executes counting between user s setting values On QD62 H01 the setting is carried out using intelligent function module switch setting Linear counter function If the count exceeds the range this function detects an overflow Coincidence output function Outputs signals when user s setting and the present values are matched No 1 and No 2 coincidence output points can be set for each channel Coincidence detection interrupt function Generates an interrupt signal to the programmable controller CPU when coincidence is detected Latch counter function Latches the present value at t
139. Rh30 range C PtRh6 Accuracy at 25 C 0 5 Temperature drift C 0 013 Measured temperature 0 to 1000 0 to 1700 0 to 1700 0 to 1700 range C R R PtRh13 Pt Accuracy at 25 C 0 4 Temperature drift C 0 011 Measured temperature 0 to 1200 0 to 1700 0 to 1700 0 to 1700 range C S S PtRh Pt PtRh10 Pt Accuracy at 25 C 96 0 4 Temperature drift C 0 011 Measured temperature 200 to 250 0 to 500 0 to 1000 0 to 1300 NiCr Ni NiCr NiAl Accuracy at 25 C 0 4 0 3 0 3 0 5 Temperature drift C 0 011 0 01 0 01 0 013 Measured temperature 200 to 150 0 to 300 0 to 600 0 to 1000 range C E E NiCr CuNi Accuracy at 25 C 96 0 4 0 3 0 3 0 4 Temperature drift C 0 011 0 01 0 01 0 011 Measured temperature 200 to 200 0 to 400 0 to 800 0 to 1200 range C J J Fe CuNi Accuracy at 25 C 0 4 0 3 0 3 0 4 Temperature drift C 0 011 0 01 0 01 0 011 Measured temperature 200 to 200 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 range C T T Cu CuNi Accuracy at 25 C 96 0 5 0 3 Temperature drift C 0 013 0 01 Measured temperature 100 to 200 0 to 400 0 to 800 0 to 900 range C Fe CuNi Accuracy at 25 C 96 0 3 0 3 0 5 Temperature drift C 0 01 0 01 0 013 Measured temperature 100 to 200 0 to 400 0 to 600 0 to 600 range C Cu CuNi Accuracy at 25 C 96 0 3 0 4 Temperature drift C 0
140. S1 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer Q64DAN memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications change 4CH module 5 Functional specifications Not changed 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied l O points I O signals and buffer A68DAI S 1 Q68DAIN memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications change Increase in current consumption 5 Functional specifications Not changed 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Production discontinuation Transition to Q series Product Remarks Restrictions 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications change Increase in current consumption 5 Functional specifications Not changed Anal tput re Anita Q68DAVN module EJ Point 1 Converesion adapter The existing wiring for the A QnA series modules can be connected directly to the Q series modules using the upgrade tool conversion adaptor manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd 1 One slot type can be mounted on the Q series large type base unit MELSEC A QnA MELSEC Q 2 i Conversion adaptor series modu
141. TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A68RD4N Set the total resistance value of a conductor where the current runs to 70Q or less Example When connecting Pt100 to CH1 and CH2 4 Conductor a1 A68RD4N CH 1 A1 Pt100 Y B1 Cable across module E o b1 a2 platinum resistance SLD thermometer CH 2 gt 2 Pt100 B2 o b2 a3 Lay wiring so that the following condition is met 1 2 3 4 lt 70 Q indicates the direction of current Internal current consumption 5VDC Weight 0 43kg 0 41A 4 63 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64RD G Compatibility Precautions for replacement The conductor resistance value must meet the condition of 1 2 lt 2kO or less In the case of 3 conductor type the difference between 1 and 2 in the conductor resistance value must be 100 or less Q64RD G Conductor al 2 1 Pt100 B1 b1 1 SLD Conductor Q64RD G al 2 Al Pt100 B1 b1 1 SLD 0 62A The recalculation of internal current i consumption 5VDC is required 0 20kg O 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 8 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available Item Description A68RD4N Q64RD G Precautions for replacement Conversion enable disable Enabl
142. UT AGOMX AGOMXR RW 19 Error code 20 designation INPUT 4 A60MX A60MXR 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 21 INPUT 5 A60MX A60MXR 21 Setting range CH5 to CH8 22 INPUT 6 A60MX AGOMXR 22 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification RM 23 INPUT 7 A60MX A60MXR 23 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification 24 Set data setting request 24 25 25 26 26 System area Not used 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 CH1 Maximum value 31 31 CH1 Minimum value 32 32 CH2 Maximum value 33 33 CH2 Minimum value 34 34 CH3 Maximum value 35 System area Not used 35 CH3 Minimum value 36 36 CH4 Maximum value 37 37 CH4 Minimum value R 38 38 CH5 Maximum value 39 39 CH5 Minimum value 40 40 CH6 Maximum value 41 41 CH6 Minimum value 42 42 CH7 Maximum value 43 43 CH7 Minimum value 44 44 CH8 Maximum value 45 45 CH8 Minimum value 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT A616AD Q68ADVII Address Address J Name Name Read write Dec Dec AT System area Not used AT 48 48 to INPUT channel digital output value to System area Not used 63 63 64 64 to to 157 157 158 158 me 159 159 Mode switching setting R W 160 160 to to System area Not used 201 201 202 202 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value 203 203 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value 204 204 CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset valu
143. UT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64RD G Address Read write decimal 48 Warning output flag 49 Disconnection detection flag 50 to 53 CH1 to CH4 Scaling value R 54 CH1 Measured temperature value L 55 32bit H to 60 CH4 Measured temperature value L R 61 32bit H 62 CH1 Scaling range lower limit value L 63 u H RAN 64 CH1 Scaling range upper limit L 65 value H to 76 CH4 Scaling range upper limit L 77 value H R W 78 CH1 Scaling width lower limit value 79 CH1 Scaling width upper limit value to 85 CH4 Scaling width upper limit value 86 CH1 Warning output lower L 87 lower limit value H 88 CH1 Warning output lower L 89 upper limit value H R W 90 CH1 Warning output upper L 91 lower limit value H 92 CH1 Warning output upper L 93 upper limit value H to 116 CH4 Warning output upper L 117 upper limit value H 118 CH1 Offset temperature setting L RW 119 value H 120 CH1 Gain temperature setting L 121 value H to 132 CH4 Gain temperature setting L 133 value H R W 134 Extended averaging processing selection 135 to System area Not used 147 Conversion setting for disconnection 148 R W detection 149 System area Not used 4 40 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64RD G Address decimal Read write ecima
144. V Voltage Maximum 1 to 5V 1mV 1 4000 0 to 5V 1 25mV 1 4000 0 to 10V 2 5mV 1 4000 resolution Current Overall accuracy accuracy at maximum analog output value Maximum conversion speed Absolute maximum output 4 to 20mA 4A 1 4000 0 to 20mA 5 1 4000 Refer to 1 Within 15ms 2 channels same time for one channel Note Time from when the digital input is written to when the specified analog voltage current is reached Voltage 0 to 12V Current 0 to 28mA Note Max output voltage and current restricted by output protection circuit Number of analog output points 2 channels module Number of writes to E2PROM Output short protection 1 Indicates accuracy at the maximum analog output value of the A62DA S1 Output range Temperature range 1 to 5V O to 5V 0 to 10V 4 to 20mA 25 C within 0 5 25 25 50 0 1 0 to 55 C within 196 2c 50 50 100mV 0 2 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q62DAN Compatibility Precautions for replacement 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 O High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 Voltage 10 to 10VDC External load resistance value 1kQ to 1MQ o Current 0 to 20mADC External load resistance value 00 to 6000 Normal resolution High resol
145. W 10 CH1 Detected temperature value 16bit Conversion completion flag 11 CH2 Detected temperature value 16bit CH1 Measured temperature value 16bit 12 CH3 Detected temperature value 16bit CH2 Measured temperature value 16bit R 13 CH4 Detected temperature value 16bit CH3 Measured temperature value 16bit 14 CH5 Detected temperature value 16bit CH4 Measured temperature value 16bit 15 CH6 Detected temperature value 16bit 16 CH7 Detected temperature value 16bit System area Not used 17 CH8 Detected temperature value 16bit 18 CH1 Detected temperature value L 19 32bit H Error code 20 CH2 Detected temperature value L Setting range 1 R 21 32bit H R Setting range 2 22 CH3 Detected temperature value L 23 32bit H 24 CH4 Detected temperature value L 25 32bit H 26 CH5 Detected temperature value L 27 32bit H 28 CH6 Detected temperature value L 29 32bit H 30 CH7 Detected temperature value L System area Not used 31 32bit H 32 CH8 Detected temperature value L 33 32bit H 34 Write data error code R W 35 Conversion completion flag R 4 67 Specification of platinum RTD type 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64RD G Address Read write decimal 39 40 41 42 System area Not used 43 44 45 46 47 Warning output enable disable setting R W
146. X6 Y6 X6 Y6 Not used disable flag CH7 Output enable XT YT XT YT disable flag High resolution mode CH8 Output enable X8 Y8 X8 Y8 status flag disable flag Operating condition Operating condition X9 Y9 X9 Y9 setting completion flag setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA XA YA User range write request status flag Channel change XB YB XB YB Channel change request completion flag Setting value change Setting value change XC Not used YC XC YC completion flag request Interlock signal for the Setting value change Synchronous output XD YD XD YD RFRP and RTOP completion flag request XE YE instructions when the XE Not used YE Not used A68DAV is used in XF YF Error flag YF clear request remote I O station X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 D A conversion output X14 Y14 enable flag X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 reset flag X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D_ Interlock signal for the Y1D Not used X1E RFRP and RTOP Y1E instructions when the X1F A68DAV is used in Y1F remote I O station 3 64 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 9 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memories and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A68DAV Q68DAVN Address Address
147. XLICONNECT No 02 R W 02 CH2 Time count averaging setting storage R W Thermocouple type setting error channel 03 03 CH3 Time count averaging setting number storage 04 Current sampling period storage R 04 CH4 Time count averaging setting 05 to OE System area Not used 05 to 08 System area Not used OF Conversion enable A616TD 09 Averaging processing selection R W 10 to 17 disable specification Multiplexer module R W 0A Conversion completion flag 18 Setting data set request 0B CH1 Measured temperature value 19 to 1F System area Not used 0C CH2 Measured temperature value R Disconnection detection enable disable 20 to 27 MEM R W oD CH3 Measured temperature value specification 28 to 2F System area Not used 0E CH4 Measured temperature value 30 to Digital output value temperature setting OF to 12 System area Not used Disconnection detection channel number R W 40 to 47 13 Error code storage R 48 to System area Not used 14 Setting range Digital output value out of range 15 to 2E System area Not used 50 to 57 R W Channel number storage 2F Warning output enable disable setting R W 58 to 5F System area Not used 30 Warning output flag Detected temperature value out of range 31 Disconnection detection flag 60 to 67 R W Channel number storage 32 CH1 Scaling value 68 to 6F System area Not used 33 CH2 Scaling value R INPUT channel 34 CH3 Scaling value TOto7F R Digital output val
148. a Creep speed 2 ree e psp 45 45 Setting for the movement amount after near point 46 46 dog ON 47 47 Positioning pattern 60 301 Positioning address P4 61 62 303 Positioning speed 63 Ve Positioning data 64 305 Positioning address P5 69 008 66 307 Positioning speed V5 pr e 68 309 80 80 New current value 81 81 N dsl 82 82 ew speed value 83 83 d 84 84 speed area 85 85 Deviation counter clear command 86 86 Control change area Analog output adjustment area 1 87 87 N d iti t t ew speed position movement amoun 89 89 Current value change request 90 Speed change request 91 92 Analog output adjustment area 2 93 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item AD70 QD73A1 Zero gain adjustment specification 94 Zero gain adjustment Zero gain adjustment value specification 95 area Factory default zero gain adjustment value 96 restoration request 100 100 Current feed value 101 101 102 102 ctual current value 403 403 Error code ERR 1 104 104 Error code ERR 2 105 105 106 11671 Deviation counter value 107 11771 Mont z 106 onitor area Deviation counter value address i 107 108 108 Movement amount after near point dog ON 109 109 Speed position switching command 110 110 Control mode 111 111 Zero gain execution status 112 Zero gain adjustment status 113 114 Feedr
149. able disable Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the A D conversion for each channel By disabling the conversion for the channels that are not used the sampling time can be shortened A68AD S2 Q68ADVII O With functions Without functions Precautions for replacement Sampling processing The A D conversion for analog input values is performed successively for each channel and the digital output value is output upon each conversion The sampling processing time changes depending on the number of channels used number of channels set to A D conversion enable and whether with or without the temperature drift compensation function a Without temperature drift compensation function processing time number of channels used x 80 us 1 channel b With temperature drift compensation function processing time number of channels used x 80 us 1 channel 160 Averaging processing For each channel A D conversion values are averaged for the set number of times or set amount of time and the average value is output as a digital value The setting range of average time and count differ Refer to Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual and then confirm the specifications Maximum and minimum values hold function The maximum and minimum values of the digital output values are retained in the module Temperature drift compensation function Errors aris
150. able disable By disabling the conversion for the channels that are not used the sampling time can be shortened The sampling processing time changes depending on the number of channels used number of channels set to A D conversion enable and whether with or without the temperature drift compensation function The A D conversion for analog input values a Without temperature drift is performed successively for each channel Sampling processing M compensation function and the digital output value is output upon mas processing time each conversion number of channels used x 80 us 1 channel b With temperature drift compensation function processing time number of channels used x 80 us 1 channel 160 The setting range of average For each channel A D conversion values time and count differ AERE TS are averaged for the set number of times or Refer to Analog Digital Vi i i set amount of time and the average value Converter Module User s is output as a digital value Manual and then confirm the specifications 7 ae The maximum and minimum values of the Maximum and minimum values c digital output values are retained in the O hold function module Errors arising from changes in the ambient temperature of the module are automatically compensated for to improve Temperature drift conversion accuracy O compensation function The temperat
151. ain value CO CH1 User range settings offset value C1 CH1 User range settings gain value C2 CH1 User range settings thermal EMF offset value L CH1 User range settings thermal EMF offset RW ES value H c4 CH1 User range settings thermal EMF gain value L c5 CH1 User range settings thermal EMF gain value H to FC CH8 User range settings thermal EMF gain value L RW FD CH8 User range settings thermal EMF gain 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 4 22 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 4 A68RD3N Replacement to the Q64RD 4 4 1 Performance comparison Item Measuring method A68RD3N 3 wire type Output temperature conversion value 16 bit signed binary 1800 to 6000 Value up to the first decimal place x 10 32 bit signed binary 180000 to 600000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 Applicable platinum RTD Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC 751 am2 JIS C1604 1989 DIN 43760 1980 JPt100 JIS 1604 1981 Measured Pt100 180 to 600 C u temperature 27 10 to 313 710 ran JPt100 180 to 600 C i 25 80 to 317 28Q 1 Accuracy accuracy at full scale Resolution 0 025 C Conversion speed 40ms channel Number of analog input points 8 channels module Output current for temperature detection 1mA Isolation method Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between platinum RTD
152. ake the output Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 A range setting and offset gain setting High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 of the Q62DAN Voltage 10 to 10VDC External load resistance value 1kQ to 1MQ O The minus current cannot be output Current 0 to 20mADC External load resistance value 0Q to 600Q Normal resolution High resolution mode mode Digital input Maximum Digital input Maximum value resolution value resolution 0 to 5V 0 to 1 25mV 0 to 0 416mV 1 to 5V 4000 1 0mV 12000 According to the I O conversion characteristics used make the output 10 to 10V 2 5my 716000 to A pr 4000 to 16000 range setting and offset gain setting User range 4000 o 75mv 12000 to of the Q62DAN settings 12000 0 to 20mA 0 to SUA 0 to 4 to 20mA 4000 4UA 12000 User range 4000 to 12000 to settings 4000 15HA 12000 Analog output range Ambient temperature 25 5 C within 0 1 voltage 10mV current 20 Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C within 0 3 9 voltage 30mV current 60 80ys channel O Voltage 12V A The minus current cannot be output Current 21mA 2 channels module O Max 100 000 times O Available O 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A62DA Between the output terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Isolation met
153. al and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute O Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20M9 or more 16 points A I O occupied points has changed to I O assignment intelligent 16 points 16 points 18 point terminal block x 2 0 3 to 0 75mm Wiring change is required R1 25 3 A solderless terminal with sleeve can not be used x 0 64A 0 64A The recalculation of internal current consumption 5VDC is required 0 19kg 0 19kg O 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 3 2 Function comparison Item A D conversion enable disable Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the A D conversion for each channel By disabling the conversion for the channels that are not used the sampling time can be shortened O With functions Without functions Precautions for replacement Sampling processing The A D conversion for analog input values is performed successively for each channel and the digital output value is output upon each conversion The sampling processing time changes depending on the number of channels used number of channels set to A D conversion enable and whether with or without the temperature drift compensation function a Without temperature drift compensation function processing time number of channels used x 80 us 1 channel b With temperature drift compensation function processing time number of
154. al shipment settings offset value 213 CH6 Industrial shipment settings gain value 214 CH7 Industrial shipment settings offset value 215 CH7 Industrial shipment settings gain value 216 CH8 Industrial shipment settings offset value 217 CH8 Industrial shipment settings gain value RW 218 CH1 User range settings offset value 219 CH1 User range settings gain value 220 CH2 User range settings offset value 221 CH2 User range settings gain value 222 CH3 User range settings offset value 223 CH3 User range settings gain value 224 CH4 User range settings offset value 225 CH4 User range settings gain value 226 CH5 User range settings offset value 227 CH5 User range settings gain value 228 CH6 User range settings offset value 229 CH6 User range settings gain value 230 CH7 User range settings offset value 231 CH7 User range settings gain value 232 CH8 User range settings offset value 233 CH8 User range settings gain value 2 18 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 4 AG8AD Upgrade to Q68AD G 2 4 1 Performance comparison Item A68AD 10 to O to 10VDC Input resistance value Hardware version K or later 1MQ Hardware version J or earlier 30kQ 4 to 20mADC Input resistance value 250Q Usable current input 20 to 0 to 20mA Voltage Analog input Current Digital output 16 bit signed binary 2048 to 2047 Analog input Digital output 10V 2000 I O characteristics 5V or 20mA 1000 OV or 4mA 0 5V or
155. alog output voltage to the A616AD Input Analog input range Maximum Digital output value Digital output value When using a range of 5 up to 5 32 bit 16 bit 32 bit 16 bit with AGOMX With Q64AD GH 0 to 10V 156 3uV 312 6pV equivalent or more resolution value 5 196 4 51659690 can be obtained by setting at a 1 to 5V 62 5uV 125 0uV o o 2 k range of 10 up to 10V high ser range settings Voltage 47 4uV 94 8uV resolution mode or user range Uni polar 10 to 10V 156 3uV 312 6uV When using a range of 20 up to User range settings 64000 to 64000 32000 to 32000 20mA with A60MX negative 47 4uV 94 8uV Bi polar current can not be converted with 0 to 20mA 312 5nA 625 0nA Q64AD GH Current 4 to 250 0 500 0 0 to 64000 0 to 32000 Use conversion devices to convert User range settings 154 ena 3032nA into a input range Uni polar A60MXRN is the accuracy in 0 05 respect to the full scale and Reference accuracy Digital output value 32 bit 32 digits O Q64AD GH is the accuracy in Digital output value 16 bit 16 digits respect to maximum digital output Temperature coefficient 71 4 0 00714 C value 15V 30 O Consider replacement with 4 channels module multiple Q64AD GH E Isolation Dielectric withstand Insulation Specific isolated area method voltage resistance Between the I O terminal and Photocoupler programmable controller power suppl
156. alue 7 CH7 Digital value 8 CH8 Digital value 8 CH8 Digital value 9 Resolution of digital value 9 10 1 Setting value check code EM System area Not used i 11 CH2 Setting value check code 11 CH1 Setting value check code 12 CH3 Setting value check code 12 CH2 Setting value check code 13 CH4 Setting value check code R 13 CH3 Setting value check code 14 CH5 Setting value check code 14 CH4 Setting value check code 15 CH6 Setting value check code 15 CH5 Setting value check code 16 CH7 Setting value check code 16 CH6 Setting value check code R 17 CH8 Setting value check code 17 CH7 Setting value check code 18 CH8 Setting value check code 19 Error code 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 21 Setting range CH5 to CH8 22 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification 23 Offset gain setting mode R W Gain specification 24 Offset gain adjusted value specification 25 to System area Not used 157 158 mi Mode switching setting R W 159 160 to System area Not used 201 202 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value 203 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value 204 CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value 205 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value R W 206 CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value 207 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value 208 CHA Industrial shipment settings offset value 3 57 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68DAIN Address Read write decimal CH4 In
157. and x19 Y19 CH2 Coincidence signal output enable command X1A Y1A CH2 Down count command X1B Y1B CH2 Count enable yc CH2 Present value read request x1D Y1D CH2 detection reset command X1E MAE 6 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 6 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the High Speed Counter Module User s Manual QD62 H01 Address Read write Dec Read write Address Dec 1 33 Preset value write Lower and middle 32 L Preset value setting R W 2 34 Preset value write Upper 1 33 H 3 35 Mode register R W 2 34 L Present value R 4 36 Present value read Lower and middle R 3 35 H 5 37 Present value read Upper 4 36 L Present value r Upper Coincidence output point set No 1 L 6 38 Set value read write Lower and middle RIW 5 37 H RW 7 39 Set value read write Uppe 6 38 L 7 DH Set value b ad write Upper Coincidence output point set No 2 L Address in parentheses in the above table indicates the upper 8 bits 7 39 H of 24 bit data 8 40 Overflow detection flag R 9 41 Counter function selection setting R W 10 42 Sampling per
158. are parts under a high temperature or high humidity condition even within the range guaranteed by the specifications Storage ambient temperature 20 to 75 C Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 no condensation Store in a place avoiding direct sunlight Store under condition with less dust or no corrosive gas The battery capacity of a A6BAT battery or a lithium coin battery commercially available for memory card will be decreased by its self discharging even when not used Replace it with new one in 5 years as a guideline For a power supply module CPU module with built in power supply or analog module that use any aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is indicated in the table below take the following measures since the characteristics will be deteriorated when the aluminum electrolytic capacitor is left un energized for a long time Product Model A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 ATNCPUR21 AINCPUP21 S3 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF A2CJCPU S3 CPU module Power supply built in type A61P A61PEU A61P UL A62P A62PEU A63P A68P A61RP AG7RP A2CJ66P Analog module A62DA A62DA S1 Countermeasures for preventing aluminum electrolytic capacitor characteristics deterioration Apply the rated voltage to the aluminum electrolytic capacitor for several hours once a year to activate it Or rotate products at the periodic inspection in every 1 year or two Reference
159. ate 115 Record 0 Error code 120 Record 0 Error occurrence Year Month 121 A Record 0 Error occurrence Day Hour 122 Error history Record 0 Error occurrence Minute Second 123 Record 1 to 15 124 to 183 Error history pointer 184 1 A value of the same specification as AD70 is stored The buffer memory address name of the QD73A1 changes Deviation counter value pulse Deviation counter value pulse supports the QD73A1 whose serial number first five digits is 15042 or later 2 When electronic gear setting is 1 1 the value will be the same as Deviation counter value pulse 51 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 6 5 Interface specifications comparison with external devices For the external interface specifications the following shows the differences between the AD70 and the QD73A1 O Compatible A Partial change required Precautions for QD73A1 replacement An external power supply 15VDC 0 2A terminal block is not available xter wer SU EM 15VDC 0 02A 9 because an external power supply is not required 9 pin connector for external wiring pin type CONT 17JE 23090 02 D8A manufactured by DDK Ltd Included Not included o External The existing external wiring can 15 pin connector for external wiring pin type b wiring be used without change SERVO 17JE 23150 02 D8A manufactured by DDK Ltd
160. atible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68AD G Compatibility Precautions for replacement 8 channels module O Up to 50 000 times O Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply transformer isolation O Between channels transformer isolation Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VACrms for 1 minute O Between analog input channels 1000VACrms for 1 minute Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 10MQ or more Between analog input channels 500VDC 10MQ or more 16 points M I O occupied points has I O assignment intelligent 16 points changed to 16 points 40 pin connector x Within 0 3mm x Wiring change is required x The recalculation of internal 0 46A A current consumption 5VDC is required 0 16kg O 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 4 2 Function comparison Item A D conversion enable disable Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the A D conversion for each channel By disabling the conversion for the channels that are not used the sampling time can be shortened A68AD Q68AD G O With functions Without functions Precautions for replacement Sampling processing The A D conversion for analog input values is performed successively for each channel and the digital output value is output upon each conversion Averaging processi
161. ble disable Enable Disable Enable Disable flag Enable Disable Not Analog output test Allowed i Not allowed allowed Resolution mode Switches the resolution mode according to the application The resolution can be selected from 1 4000 1 12000 or 1 16000 The resolution mode is batch set for all channels Online module replacement 63 Replaces a module without stopping the system Replaceable modules during online are the Process CPU and the Redundant CPU 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 9 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A68DAV Q68DAVN Device Device Device Device i Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No No XO Watchdog timer error flag YO XO Module READY YO Not used D A conversion READY CH1 Output enable X1 Y1 X1 Y1 flag disable flag CH2 Output enable X2 flag Y2 X2 Y2 disable flag CH3 Output enable X3 Y3 X3 Y3 disable flag CH4 Output enable X4 Y4 X4 Not used Y4 disable flag CH5 Output enable X5 Y5 X5 Y5 disable flag CH6 Output enable
162. ble signal turns off when the Output enable signal is off A62DA S1 Q64DAN Precautions for replacement 1 Refer to Analog output status combination list in the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual to check the execution status of output 2 For the Q64DAN this function is set with the intelligent function module switch setting D A conversion enable disable function Specifies whether to enable or disable the D A conversion D A output enable disable function Specifies whether to output the D A conversion value or the offset value The Q64DAN specifies whether to enable or disable output for each channel Synchronous output function Obtains analog output synchronized with the programmable controller CPU Analog output test while the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status Outputs the analog value converted from a digital value when Output enable disable flag is forcibly turned on while the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status Resolution mode Switches the resolution mode according to the application The resolution can be selected from 1 4000 1 12000 or 1 16000 The resolution mode is batch set for all channels Online module replacement Replaces a module without stopping the system Replaceable modules during online are the Process CPU and the Redundant CPU 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 7 3 I O si
163. bles a detection of e specification of each channel temperature The setting ranges of time and count averages differ Sampling averaging processing Processes the detected temperature by Refer to the RTD Input Module selection specified method Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual to check the specifications Detected temperature value Stores temperature data in the buffer storage memory Detects disconnection of the connected Disconnection detection O O RTD or cable Specification of RTD type Specifies a RTD type used O Range switching function Switches the measured temperature range A Outputs a warning when the temperature Warning output function O exceeds the set temperature range z Converts a measured temperature value Scaling function O into a percent value in set width Perform the error correction by f Corrects an error in temperature conversion Error correction function O O the offset gain setting of the value Q64RD G 5 Replaceable modules during Replaces a module without stopping the Online module replacement O online are the Process CPU and system the Redundant CPU 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 5 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Chan
164. compliance standards for the applicable RTD differ change the RTD to the one that can be used with the Q64RD G 200 to 850 C 180 to 600 C 60 to 180 C i 0 025 C 40ms channel 4 channels module Consider replacement with multiple Q64RD G gt oo O 1mA Dielectric withstand voltage Isolation Isolated area method Insulation resistance Between RTD input and programmable Photocoupler 1780VrmsAC 3 cycles controller power supply isolation altitude 2000m Transformer isolation Between RTD input and channel 10M9 or more using 500VDC insulation resistance tester Detected per channel 16 points I O assignment intelligent 16 points The number of occupied I O points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block 0 3 to 0 75mm 1 25 3 R1 25 3 Sleeved solderless terminal cannot be used Wiring change is required 1 Indicates accuracy of the Q64RD G accuracy at the maximum value in the selection range Accuracy Reference accuracy Specifications Within 0 04 Pt100 JPt100 20 to 120 C 70ppm C 0 0070 Pt100 JPt100 0 to 200 C 65 0 0065 Temperature coefficient clon Pt100 JPt100 200 to 850 C Ni100Q 60 to 180 C 2 S C 50 0 0050 70 0 0070 4 62 4
165. cuit in the sequence program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure CAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise When a device such as a lamp heater or solenoid valve is controlled through an output module a large current approximately ten times greater than normal may flow when the output is turned from off to on Take measures such as replacing the module with one having a sufficient current rating After the CPU module is powered on or is reset the time taken to enter the RUN status varies depending on the system configuration parameter settings and or program size Design circuits so that the entire system will always operate safely regardless of the time Installation Precautions CAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press t
166. d When the module is mounted on a remote I O station the analog output will not be synchronized because of a link scan delay if the synchronous output function is specified 1 Refer to Analog output status combination list in the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Retains an analog value that was output when the Analog output HOLD Manual to check the programmable controller CPU is the STOP status O CLEAR function execution status of output error occurs 2 For the Q68DAIN this function is set with the intelligent function module Switch setting Outputs the analog value converted from a digital value when CHLI Output enable disable flag is forcibly turned on while the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP Analog output test while status the programmable D A conversion F controller CPU is in the a enable disable Enable Disable STOP status UA nation CHE Output Enable Disable Enable Disable enable disable flag Not Analog output test Allowed Not allowed Switches the resolution mode according to the application Resolution mode The resolution can be selected from 1 4000 or 1 12000 O The resolution mode is batch set for all channels Replaceable modules during Online module Replaces a module without stopping the system O online are the Process CPU replacement and the Redundant CPU 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 2 3 I O signal c
167. d 10 Parameter initialization request 1139 1901 Cd 11 Positioning start No 1150 1200 1250 1500 1600 1700 Cd 12 Axis error reset 1151 1201 1251 1502 1602 1702 Cd 13 Restart command 1152 1202 1252 1503 1603 1703 Cd 14 M code OFF request 1153 1203 1253 1504 1604 1704 1154 1204 1254 1506 1606 1706 current value 1155 1205 1255 1507 1607 1707 1156 1206 1256 1514 1614 1714 Cd 16 New speed value 1157 1207 1257 1515 1615 1715 Cd 17 Speed change request 1158 1208 1258 1516 1616 1716 Cd 18 Positioning operation speed override 1159 1209 1259 1513 1613 1713 1160 1210 1260 1518 1618 1718 Cd 19W96 1161 1211 1261 1519 1619 1719 Cd 20 Speed position switching enable flag 1163 1213 1263 1528 1628 1728 Cd 21 Speed position switching control movement amount 1164 1214 1264 1526 1626 1726 change register 1165 1215 1265 1527 1627 1727 Cd 22 Manual pulse generator enable flag 1167 1217 1267 1524 1624 1724 M 1168 1218 1268 1522 1622 1722 Cd 23 Manual pulse generator 1 pulse input magnification 4169 4219 4269 1523 1623 1723 24 return request flag OFF request 1170 1220 1270 1521 1621 1721 Cd 25 External start valid 1171 1221 1271 1505 1605 1705 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Cd 8 External command valid Cd 26 Step valid flag 1172 1222 1272 1545 1645 1745 Cd 27 mode 1173 1223 1273 1544 1644 1744 Cd 28 Step start information 1174 1224 1274 1546 1646 1746 Cd 29 Skip command 1175 1225 1275 1547 1647 1747 Cd 30 New torque value 1176 1226 1276 152
168. d to be the same as the voltage input specifications of the A616AD Check the set range in each channel of the existing multiplexer module to estimate the I O characteristics and the maximum resolution 5 1 A60MX As regarding A60MX non isolated multiplexer module consider replacement using multiple Q68ADV I 5 1 1 Performance comparison Item A60MX Voltage 10 to 0 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ Analog input Current 20 to 0 to 20mADC Input resistance value 2500 Analog output voltage 10 to 0 to 10VDC Analog input range Voltage V Current mA Analog output voltage V 0 to 10 0 to 20 Oto 5 0 to 20 1to 5 4 to 20 0 to 10 10 to 10 20 to 20 I O characteristics EL isti 0 to 10 0 to 20 Oto 5 Oto 5 0 to 20 1to 5 4 to 20 1to 5 10 to 10 20 to 20 10 to 10 5to 5 20 to 20 10 to 10 20 to 20 5to 5 510 5 20 to 20 5 MULTIPLEXER REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68ADV Q68ADI Compatibility Precautions for replacement 10 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ The voltage current cannot be 0 to 20mADC mixed for one module Input resistance value 250Q Analog output voltage to the A616AD Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Analog input m range zn When using A616AD in 5 to
169. ditional program is required Current value change function AD70 The current value is changed by writing a new address in Present value change area of the buffer memory QD73A1 The current value is changed by writing a new address in New current value of the buffer memory and writing 1 to Current value change request buffer memory address 90 AD70 The adjustment is performed using the volumes for zero gain adjustment QD73A1 The adjustment is performed by either of following methods Zero gain adjustment 1 Using the UP DOWN switch for zero gain adjustment The function is the same as the AD70 though the QD73A1 uses the UP DOWN switch instead of the volumes 2 Using the buffer memory To use the buffer memory for the adjustment create a program T 46 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Changed function Change description AD70 The setting is configured with slide switches or encoder interface setting pin hardware setting 1 Slide switches Rotation direction accumulated pulse multiplication setting zero return direction zero return mode and zero gain adjustment mode setting clear 2 Encoder interface setting pin Encoder output types QD73A1 The setting is configured with Switch setting in I O assignment of PLC parameter GX Developer When using GX Works2 set it with the intelligent function module switch setting Though the setting method is changed from a hardware switch to parameters
170. dule O Max 100 000 times O Available O 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A62DA Between the output terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Isolation method Between channels non isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Number of occupied I O points 3 Pointe I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 20 point terminal block 0 75 to 2mm2 Applicable wire size Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59N cm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 6A 5VDC Voltage 21 6 to 26 4VDC External Current power supply 0 35A consumption Inrush current 2 4A Weight 0 5kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64DAN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between output channels non isolation Between external power supply and analog output transformer isolation Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more 16 points A The number of occupied I O points I O assignment intelligent 16 points has chan
171. dule in the following combinations Additionally the servo motor needs to be replaced Positioning module QD77MSLI servo amplifier Positioning module QD77MSLI servo amplifier MR JALI B 2 Selecting suitable products to replace the existing servo amplifier without servo motor replacement When replacing the existing servo amplifier alone without servo motor replacement select a module in the following combination Positioning module QD75M Servo amplifier MR J4 B RJO20 Conversion Unit for SSCNET of MR J2S B Compatible Servo Amplifier Converter MR J4 T20 module Conversion Unit for SSCNET of MR J2S B For replacing servo amplifiers and servo motors data such as positioning parameters and positioning data need to be changed When replacing them contact the department in charge of Mitsubishi electric servo products For replacing the MR J2SLI B refer to Transition from MELSERVO J2 Super J2M Series to J4 Series Handbook L NA 03093 T 41 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT J b For SSCNET cables applicable to the servo amplifiers The following tables show applicable SSCNET cables when the existing servo amplifier is continuously used Replacing positioning modules from the AD75M to the QD75M requires the change of SSCNET cables Table 1 With the servo amplifier MR J J2 or J2S Between QD75 and MR J J2 Between AD75 and MR J J2 Between MR J J2 J2S amplifier SSCNET cable
172. dustrial shipment settings gain value CH5 Industrial shipment settings offset value 211 CH5 Industrial shipment settings gain value 212 CH6 Industrial shipment settings offset value 213 CH6 Industrial shipment settings gain value 214 CH7 Industrial shipment settings offset value 215 CH7 Industrial shipment settings gain value 216 CH8 Industrial shipment settings offset value 217 CH8 Industrial shipment settings gain value 218 CH1 User range settings offset value 219 CH1 User range settings gain value 220 CH2 User range settings offset value 221 CH2 User range settings gain value R W 222 CH3 User range settings offset value 223 CH3 User range settings gain value 224 User range settings offset value 225 CH4 User range settings gain value 226 CH5 User range settings offset value 227 CH5 User range settings gain value 228 CH6 User range settings offset value 229 CH6 User range settings gain value 230 CH7 User range settings offset value 231 CH7 User range settings gain value 232 CH8 User range settings offset value CH8 User range settings gain value 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 9 A68DAV 3 9 1 Performance comparison Item A68DAV 1 16 bit signed binary 2 Setting range Digital input Setting resolution Setting range 1 4000 4000 to 4000 1 8000 8000 to 8000 1 12000 12000 to 12000 10 to 0 to 10VDC
173. e 16 bit signed binary 1800 to 6000 Value up to the first decimal place x 10 32 bit signed binary 180000 to 600000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 Applicable RTD Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC 751 am2 JIS C1604 1989 DIN 43760 1980 JPt100 JIS C1604 1981 180 to 600 C Pt100 Measured 27 10 to 313 710 te t 180 to 600 C emperature JPt100 o range 25 80 to 317 28Q Ni100 1 Accuracy accuracy at full scale Resolution 0 025 C Conversion speed 40ms channel Number of analog input points 8 channels module Output current for temperature detection 1mA Isolation method Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between platinum RTD input and channel non isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Disconnection detection Detected per channel Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points External connection system 38 point terminal block External device connector sold separately Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable solderless terminal A 43 V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible
174. e Q64DAN Compatibility Precautions for replacement 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 O High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 Voltage 10 to 10VDC External load resistance value 1kQ to 1MQ o Current 0 to 20mADC External load resistance value 00 to 6000 Normal resolution High resolution mode mode Digital input Maximum Digital input Maximum value resolution value resolution 0 to 5V 0 to 1 25mV 0 to 0 416mV 1 to 5V 4000 12000 Analog output range 10 to 10V 0006 4000 16000 User range 4000 12000 to settings 12000 0 to 20mA 0 to 0 to 4 to 20mA 4000 12000 Userrange 4000 to 12000 to settings 4000 12000 Ambient temperature 25 5 C within 0 1 voltage 10mV current 20pA Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C within 0 3 9 voltage 30mV current 60JA 80yus channel Voltage 12V Current 21mA 4 channels module O Max 100 000 times O Available 3 44 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A62DA S1 Between the output terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Isolation method Between channels non isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Number of occupied I O points seins u upi i P E I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 20 point terminal block 0 75
175. e 205 205 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value 206 206 CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value 207 207 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value 208 208 CHA Industrial shipment settings offset value 209 209 CHA Industrial shipment settings gain value 210 210 CH5 Industrial shipment settings offset value 211 211 CH5 Industrial shipment settings gain value 212 212 CH6 Industrial shipment settings offset value 213 213 CH6 Industrial shipment settings gain value 214 214 CH7 Industrial shipment settings offset value 215 System area Not used 215 CH7 Industrial shipment settings gain value 216 216 CH8 Industrial shipment settings offset value 217 217 CH8 Industrial shipment settings gain value RIW 218 218 CH1 User range settings offset value 219 219 CH1 User range settings gain value 220 220 CH2 User range settings offset value 221 221 CH2 User range settings gain value 222 222 CH3 User range settings offset value 223 223 CH3 User range settings gain value 224 224 User range settings offset value 225 225 CH4 User range settings gain value 226 226 CH5 User range settings offset value 227 227 CH5 User range settings gain value 228 228 CH6 User range settings offset value 229 229 CH6 User range settings gain value 230 230 CH7 User range settings offset value 231 231 CH7 User range settings gain value 232 232 CH8 User range settings offset value 233 233 CH8 User range settings gain value 234 to 255 256 to MX CH chann
176. e thermocouple and measured temperature range refer to Section 4 3 1 2 to check the specifications 640ms 8 channels 320ms 8 channels Isolation Dielectric withstand Insulation Isolated area method voltage resistance Between thermocouple Transformer input and programmable AC500Vms 1min controller power supply isolation Sod 10M2 or more Between thermocouple Transformer input channels isolation AC1000Vrms 1min Between cold junction compensation input Pt100 and programmable controller power supply Non isolation Available all the channels are independent Not available The Q68TD G H01 has the disconnection monitor function 8 channels channels connected to Pt100 module Consider replacement with multiple Q68TD G H02 H01 16 points I O assignment intelligent 16 points The number of occupied I O points has changed to 16 points 40 pin connector A6CON4 0 3mm 22 AWG or less Wiring change is required 0 65A 0 49A 0 22kg 0 18kg 4 14 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 1 Restrictions on mountable slot position apply to the Q68TD G H01 For details refer to the user s manual for the Q68TD G H01 H02 2 Calculate the accuracy in the following method Accuracy Conversion accuracy Temperature characteristics x Operating ambient temperature variation Cold junction compensation accuracy
177. e 25 5 C Within 0 1 10mV Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Within 0 3 30mV O 80us channel 12V Consider replacement with multiple 8 channels module A Q68DAVN Max 100 000 times O Available O Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between output channels non isolation o Between external power supply and analog output transformer isolation Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between the I O terminal programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more 16 points The number of occupied I O points I O assignment intelligent 16 points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm2 FG terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Wiring change is required Terminals other than FG R1 25 3 x Sleeved solderless terminal cannot be used 0 38A 3 12 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A616DAV Voltage 15VDC 15VDC External DS y Current 15VDC 02 power SUPP Y consumption 15VDC 0 17A Inrush current Weight 0 65kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68DAVN Compatibility Precautions for replacement 24VDC 20 15 Ripple spike 500mVp p or less As the external power supply has TA x changed from 15V to 24V its Change is required 2 5
178. e 26 176 326 28 178 328 Pr 21 Interpolation speed designation method 27 177 327 29 179 329 Pr 22 Current feed value during speed control 28 178 328 30 180 330 Pr 23 Manual pulse generator selection 29 179 329 Pr 24 Logic selection for pulse output to the drive unit 30 180 330 Pr 25 Size selection for acceleration deceleration time 31 181 331 36 186 336 36 186 336 Pr 26 Acceleration time 1 37 187 337 37 187 337 m 38 188 338 38 188 338 Pr 27 Acceleration time 2 39 189 339 39 189 339 MM 40 190 340 40 190 340 Pr 28 Acceleration time 3 41 191 341 41 191 341 uM 42 192 342 42 192 342 29 Deceleration time 1 43 193 343 43 193 343 T 12 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of AD75PL1 S3 7 DYA dm ESX D75PLIN QD75DLIN Pr 30 Deceleration time 2 45 195 345 45 195 345 name 46 196 346 46 196 346 Pr 31 Deceleration time 47 197 347 47 197 347 Joe Speed limit val 48 198 348 48 198 348 KZ ciu HS 49 199 349 49 199 349 Pr 33 JOG operation acceleration time selection 50 200 350 50 200 350 Pr 34 JOG operation deceleration time selection 51 201 351 51 201 351 Pr 35 Acceleration deceleration process se
179. e 829 929 1029 829 929 1029 Md 49 In speed control flag 830 930 1030 830 930 1030 Md 50 In speed change processing flag 831 931 1031 831 931 1031 Md 51 Start data pointer being executed 832 932 1032 834 934 1034 Md 52 Last executed positioning data No 833 933 1033 837 937 1037 Md 53 Repetition counter QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Md 41 Special start repetition 834 934 1034 832 932 1032 counter Md 54 Positioning data No being executed 835 935 1035 835 935 1035 Md 55 Block No being executed 836 936 1036 836 936 1036 1038 to 1038 to Md 56 Positioning data being executed 838 to 847 938 to 947 1047 838 to 847 938 to 947 1047 Deceleration starting flag 2 899 999 1099 T 16 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Item of AD75PO S3 Buffer memory address AD75PLI S3 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Cd 1 Clock data setting hour 1100 Cd 2 Clock data setting minute second 1101 Cd 3 Clock data writing 1102 Cd 4 Target axis 1103 Cd 5 Positioning data No 1104 Cd 6 Write pattern 1105 Cd 7 Read write request 1106 Cd 8 Read write positioning data I F 1108 to 1137 Cd 9 Flash ROM write request 1138 1900 C
180. e I O signals or sequence program refer to the Type QD75M Positioning Module User s Manual Signal name AD75MO QD75MO Signal name AD75MLI QD75MO QD75 AD75 READY X00 X00 Axis 1 Positioning start Y10 Y10 Axis 1 Start complete X01 X10 Axis 2 Positioning start Y11 Y11 Axis 2 Start complete X02 X11 Axis 3 Positioning start Y12 Y12 Axis 3 Start complete X03 X12 Axis 4 Positioning start Y13 Axis 4 Start complete X13 Axis 1 Stop Y13 Y04 Axis 1 BUSY X04 Axis 2 Stop Y14 YO5 Axis 2 BUSY X05 Axis 3 Stop Y1C YO6 Axis 3 BUSY X06 Axis 4 Stop YO7 Axis 4 BUSY XOF All axes servo ON Y15 Yo Axis 1 Positioning complete X07 X14 Axis 1 Forward run JOG start Y16 Y08 Axis 2 Positioning complete X08 X15 Axis 1 Reverse run JOG start Y17 Y09 Axis 3 Positioning complete X09 X16 Axis 2 Forward run JOG start Y18 YOA Axis 4 Positioning complete X17 Axis 2 Reverse run JOG start Y19 YOB Axis 1 Error detection X0A X08 Axis 3 Forward run JOG start Y1A YOC Axis 2 Error detection X09 Axis 3 Reverse run JOG start Y1B YOD Axis 3 Error detection X0A Axis 4 Forward run JOG start YOE Axis 4 Error detection Axis 4 Reverse run JOG start YOF Axis 1 M code ON 4 Programmable controller READY Y1D YOO Axis 2 M code ON X05 Axis 1 Execution prohibition flag Y14 Axis 3 M code ON XOF X06 Axis 2 Execution prohibition flag Y15 Axis 4 M code ON X07 Axis
181. e check code 62 63 CHF Setting value check code 63 to 157 158 159 Mode switching setting R W 160 to System area Not used 201 202 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value 203 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value 204 CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value 205 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value 206 CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value 207 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value 208 CHA Industrial shipment settings offset value 209 Industrial shipment settings gain value 210 CH5 Industrial shipment settings offset value 211 CH5 Industrial shipment settings gain value 212 CH6 Industrial shipment settings offset value 213 CH6 Industrial shipment settings gain value 214 CH7 Industrial shipment settings offset value 215 CH7 Industrial shipment settings gain value 216 CH8 Industrial shipment settings offset value 217 CH8 Industrial shipment settings gain value 218 CH1 User range settings offset value 219 CH1 User range settings gain value 220 CH2 User range settings offset value 221 CH2 User range settings gain value 222 CH3 User range settings offset value 223 CH3 User range settings gain value 224 User range settings offset value 225 CHA User range settings gain value 226 CH5 User range settings offset value 227 CH5 User range settings gain value 228 CH6 User range settings offset value 229 CH6 User range settings gain value 230 CH7 User range settings offset va
182. e emen 4 29 4 5 A68RD3N Replacement to the Q64RD G 4 33 4 5 1 Performance comparison x Rd D Eh EA RN 4 33 4 5 2 Functional comparison aeree oie aaa tae EROR 4 37 4 5 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU _ 4 38 4 5 4 Buffer memory address comparison ciiiiiiiiiiiiiiii22 4 39 4 6 A68RD3N Replacement to the Q68RD3 G 4 43 4 6 1 Performance comparison 4 43 4 6 2 F nctional CompariSOF ic reper hacks 4 47 4 6 3 O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU _ 4 48 4 6 4 Buffer memory address comparison sse enne 4 49 4 7 A68RDAN Replacement to the Q64RD 4 51 4 7 1 Performance comparison 4 51 4 7 2 Functional comparison 4 55 4 7 3 signal comparison to programmable controller CPU 4 56 4 7 4 Buffer memory address comparison
183. e short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction NCAUTION Before performing online operations especially program modification forced output and operating status change for the running CPU module from the peripheral device connected read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS Personal Handy phone System more than 25cm away in all directions from the programmable controller Failure to do so may cause malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction A module can be replaced online while power is on on any MELSECNET H remote I O station or in the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to this manual and the online module change section in the manual of the module compatible with online module change After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and
184. e the wiring between the AD70 and the encoder so that each phase A and B is reversed Slide switch 1 of Rotation direction the AD70 o 5 of the motor and Wiring between the AD70 and encoder Wiring when the AD70 is replaced to the QD73A1 rotation direction encoder setting Phase Phase Phase Phase __ gt eiae mM A 1 Same direction Phase Phase 1 Phase Phase B 1 AD70 Encoder QD73A1 Encoder OFF Phase Phase Phase Phase pr s erase 2 Reverse direction 1 Phase Phase 1 Phase Phase B B B AD70 Encoder QD73A1 Encoder lt Replacement with the QD73A1 whose serial number first five digits is 15042 or later gt Set bO switch 3 of the intelligent function module switch to 1 8 The operation for the QD73A1 while the signal is off was changed from the operation for the AD70 due to the safety consideration of when Servo READY signal is turned on The QD73A1 whose serial number first five digits is 15042 or later operates the same as the AD70 by setting b4 switch 3 of the intelligent function module switch to 1 8 UPGRADE OF THE POSITION UPGRADE OF THE POSITION 8 1 A61LS 1 A61LS the Mitsubishi position detection modules is able to upgrade to VARILIMIT VS Q62B V1PG manufactured by our partner NSD Corporation VS Q62B V1PG is a built in convert
185. ecification R W 23 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification 24 25 26 System area Not used 27 28 29 30 CH1 Maximum value 31 CH1 Minimum value 32 CH2 Maximum value 33 CH2 Minimum value 34 CH3 Maximum value 35 CH3 Minimum value 36 CH4 Maximum value 37 CH4 Minimum value 38 CH5 Maximum value R 39 CH5 Minimum value 40 CH6 Maximum value 41 CH6 Minimum value 42 CH7 Maximum value 43 CH7 Minimum value 44 CH8 Maximum value 45 CH8 Minimum value 2 49 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68ADVII Address Dec Name Read write 46 to System area Not used 157 158 2 159 Mode switching setting R W 160 to System area Not used 201 202 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value 203 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value 204 CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value 205 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value 206 CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value 207 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value 208 CHA Industrial shipment settings offset value 209 CHA Industrial shipment settings gain value 210 CH5 Industrial shipment settings offset value 211 CH5 Industrial shipment settings gain value 212 CH6 Industrial shipment settings offset value 213 CH6 Industrial shipment settings gain value 214 CH7 Industrial shipment settings offset value 215 CH7 Industrial shipment sett
186. ecification 24 24 Averaging process specification CH1 to RIW CH4 Averaging process specification CH5 to 25 System area Not used 25 CH8 26 26 27 27 System area Not used 28 28 29 29 30 30 CH1 Maximum value 31 31 CH1 Minimum value 32 32 CH2 Maximum value 33 33 CH2 Minimum value R 34 Write data error code R W 34 CH3 Maximum value to 44 CH8 Maximum value 45 CH8 Minimum value 2 25 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68AD G Address Name Read write Dec 46 System area Not used 47 Input signal error detection extended input signal error detection setting R W 48 Warning output setting 49 Input signal error detection flag 50 Warning output flag Process alarm R 51 Warning output flag Rate alarm 52 System area Not used 53 Scaling enable disable setting R W 54 CH1 Scaling value to R 61 CH8 Scaling value 62 CH1 Scaling lower limit value 63 CH1 Scaling upper limit value to 76 CH8 Scaling lower limit value 77 CH8 Scaling upper limit value to 86 CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value 87 CH1 Process alarm lower upper limit value 88 CH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value 89 CH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value to 114 CH8 Process alarm lower lower limit value 115 CH8 Process alarm lower upper limit value 116 CH8 Process alarm upper lower limi
187. ed 201 202 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value 203 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value 204 CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value 205 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value R W 206 CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value 207 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value 208 CHA Industrial shipment settings offset value 3 65 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68DAVN Address Read write decimal CH4 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH5 Industrial shipment settings offset value 211 CH5 Industrial shipment settings gain value 212 CH6 Industrial shipment settings offset value 213 CH6 Industrial shipment settings gain value 214 CH7 Industrial shipment settings offset value 215 CH7 Industrial shipment settings gain value 216 CH8 Industrial shipment settings offset value 217 CH8 Industrial shipment settings gain value 218 CH1 User range settings offset value 219 CH1 User range settings gain value 220 CH2 User range settings offset value 221 CH2 User range settings gain value R W 222 CH3 User range settings offset value 223 CH3 User range settings gain value 224 User range settings offset value 225 CH4 User range settings gain value 226 CH5 User range settings offset value 227 CH5 User range settings gain value 228 CH6 User range settings offset value 229 CH6 User range settings gain value 230 CH7 User range settings offset value 231
188. ed 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maint
189. ed X1E 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 4 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memories and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A62DA Q62DAN Address decimal 0 CH1 Digital value CH2 Digital value CH1 Voltage setting value check code CH2 Voltage setting value check code CH1 Current setting value check code aj A N 3 25 CH2 Current setting value check code Read write R W Address decimal D A conversion enable disable Read write CH1 Digital value R W CH2 Digital value System area Not used CH1 Setting value check code CH2 Setting value check code System area Not used Error code Setting range CH1 to CH2 System area Not used Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Offset gain setting mode Gain specification R W Offset gain adjusted value specification System area Not used Mode switching setting R W System area Not used Pass data classification setting R W System area Not used CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value R W CH1
190. ed l O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications change 8CH module 5 Functional specifications Not changed 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Changed 2 modules are required AG16DAV Q68DAVN 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications change 8CH module 5 Functional specifications Not changed 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied l O points I O signals and buffer Q62DAN p memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications change Output current minus current not applicable 1 0 characteristics 5 Functional specifications Not changed A62DA 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied l O points I O signals and buffer Analog output module memory addresses are changed Q64DAN PHA 4 Performance specifications change Output current minus current not applicable I O characteristics 5 Functional specifications Not changed 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer Q62DAN memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications change Not changed 5 Functional specifications Not changed A62DA
191. ee 2147483648 to 2147483647 PLS Incremental system 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 degree 2147483648 to 2147483647 PLS In speed position switching control 0 to 214748364 7 um 0 to 21474 83647 inch 0 to 21474 83647 degree 0 to 2147483647 PLS Speed command range 0 01 to 6000000 00 mm min 0 001 to 600000 000 inch min 0 001 to 600000 000 degree min 1 to 1000000 PLS s 0 01 to 20000000 00 mm min 0 001 to 2000000 000 inch min 0 001 to 2000000 000 degree min 1 to 10000000 PLS s Machine OPR function OPR method O 6 OPR methods O 4 OPR methods Corresponding to the OP unpassed error is required Return the motor more than one rotation once atthe error and perform the OPR start again JOG operation 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT AD75M1 AD75M2 AD75M3 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible QD75M1 QD75M2 QD75M4 Compati bility Precautions for replacement On QD75MO the manual pulse generator cannot be used by each axis independent When connecting the manual pulse generator for each axis is required use Manual pulse generator one axis module 1 generator axis 1 generator module A function The manual pulse generator itself can use the same one The operation for inpu
192. egenerative load ratio 876 976 1078 878 978 1078 Md 118 Effective load torque 877 977 1079 879 979 1079 Md 119 Peak torque ratio 878 978 1080 880 980 1080 Md 121 Absolute position restoration 879 979 1079 120 FeRAM access count 880 883 980 983 1080 1083 Deceleration start flag 899 999 1099 T 35 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of AD75MO AD75MLI QD75MO Cd 1 Clock data setting hour 1100 Cd 2 Clock data setting minute 4101 Cd 3 Clock data writing 1102 Cd 4 Target axis 1103 a Cd 5 Positioning data No 1104 Cd 6 Write pattern 1105 Cd 7 Read write request 1106 z Cd 8 Read write positioning data I F 1108 to 1137 E Cd 9 Flash ROM write request 1138 1900 Cd 10 Parameter initialization request 1139 1901 Cd 11 Positioning start No 1150 1200 1250 1500 1600 1700 12 Axis error reset 1151 1201 1251 1502 1602 1702 13 Restart command 1152 1202 1252 1503 1603 1703 14 M code OFF request 1153 1203 1253 1504 1604 1704 N 1154 1204 1254 1506 1606 1706 New current value 1155 1205 1255 1507 1607 1707 1156 1206 1
193. el digital output value 383 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 3 A68AD Upgrade to Q68ADV Q68ADI 2 3 1 Performance comparison Item A68AD Volada 1 0 to 0 to 10VDC EXTR Input resistance value Hardware version K or later 1MQ Hardware version J or earlier 30kQ COMER 4 to 20mADC Input resistance value 2500 Usable current input 20 to 0 to 20mA Digital output 16 bit signed binary 2048 to 2047 Analog input Digital output 10V 2000 I O characteristics 5V or 20 1000 OV or 4mA 0 5V or 12mA 1000 10V 2000 Voltage 5mV 1 2000 Current 20uA 1 1000 Maximum resolution Overall accuracy Accuracy in respect to maximum digital 1 20 output value Maximum conversion speed Max 2 5ms channel Voltage 15V Absolute maximum input current 30mA 2 11 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68ADV Q68ADI Compatibility Precautions for replacement 10 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ The voltage current cannot be 0 to 20mADC mixed for one module Input resistance value 250Q 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383
194. election 2 Stop QD75 peripheral is added to the stop causes of Stop group 3 sudden stop selection Error code 100 Peripheral device stop during operation is deleted 4 Programmable controller CPU error occurrence is added to the stop causes of Stop group 2 Sudden stop selection AD75MLI QD75MLI READY signal X0 OFF Normal READY Not READY WDT error ON Not READY WDT error Normal READY Manual pulse generator operation The No of connectable manual pulse generator is changed from 1generator 1axis to 1generator 1 module Axis operation status Step stopped is changed to Stopped and Step error occurring is changed to Error occurring Continuous path control e AD75MD If the reference axis operates in reverse direction the control is internally changed into the continuous positioning control restart after deceleration stop QD75MLI Even if the reference axis operates in reverse direction with interpolation the control remains as the continuous path control In single axis operation the operation is the same as that of the AD75MLI Near pass For the continuous path control only the near pass function is available Positioning address pass is not conducted 2 axis interpolation 2 axis linear interpolation 2 axis fixed feed Circular interpolation The interpolation target axis can be randomly set with a positioning identifier Step functi
195. emory address comparison cccccciccciccccccccaacccssacacsseeaaaocaaaassenosascnnanaannaa 3 25 3 5 A62DA Replacement to the Q64DAN enter 3 27 3 5 1 Performance comparison 3 27 3 5 2 Functional comparison etre a Fe ebd er a dade eO ede aea 3 31 3 5 3 O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU 3 32 3 5 4 Buffer memory address comparison sess enne 3 33 3 6 A62DA S1 Replacement to the Q62DAN cccccccccccccccccccceccccccccccccccccccccacccccccaaccicnaccennna 3 35 3 6 1 Performance comparison 3 35 3 6 2 Functional CompariSOn ics eee tento pata 3 39 3 6 3 signal comparison to programmable controller CPU 3 40 3 6 4 Buffer memory address comparison ccccccccccciscacccssaaaascssaaassssaaansenaaassenenanannanaaunaa 3 41 3 7 A62DA S1 Replacement to the Q64DAN c cici iiic iiic nnnm nene nennen nnn 3 43 3 7 1 Performance comparison d CER 3 43 3 7 2 Functional compariSOTn SAE 3 47 3 7 3 signal
196. enance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners L NA 08046ENG H Mitsubishi Programmable Controller Country Region USA Mexico Brazil Germany UK reland taly Spain France Czech Republic Poland Sweden Russia Turkey Dubai South Africa China Taiwan Korea Singapore Thailand Vietnam Indonesia India Australia Sales office MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 U S A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC Mexico Branch Mariano Escobedo 69 Col Zona Industrial Tlalnepantla Edo C P 54030 Mexico MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC DO BRASIL COM RCIO E SERVICOS LTDA Rua Jussara 1750 Bloco B Anexo Jardim Santa Cecilia CEP 06465 070 Barueri SP Brasil MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EU ROPE B V German Branch Gothaer Strasse 8 D 40880 Ratingen Germany MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EU Travellers Lane Hatfield MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EU ROPE B V ROPE B V UK Branch Hertfordshire AL10 8XB U K rish Branch Westgate Business Park Ballymount IRL Dublin 24 Ireland MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EU ROPE B V talian Branch Centro Direzionale Colleoni Palazzo Sirio Viale Colleoni 7 20864 A
197. ent The conversion speed of Q68ADV I to A68ADN has become quick And 80us channel then on Q68ADV I the noise that did When there is temperature drift compensation the time not import on A68ADN can be calculated by adding 160 us will be used regardless of the number of channels o imported as analog signal used In this case use the averaging processing function to remove the effect of noise 15V 30mA 8 channels module Max 100 000 times Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation O Between channels non isolated Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute o Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 5MQ or more o 16 points I O occupied points has changed to I O assignment intelligent 16 points 16 points 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm2 x Wiring change is required R1 25 3 A solderless terminal with sleeve can not be used x The recalculation of internal current 0 64A 0 64A consumption 5VDC is required 0 19kg 0 19kg 2 46 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 7 2 Function comparison O With functions Without functions Item Description A68ADN Q68ADV I Precautions for replacement Specifies whether to enable or disable the A D conversion for each channel A D conversion en
198. equest remote I O station X10 Y10 Not used X11 Y11 X12 Y12 Error code reset flag X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A Not used X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Interlock signal for the 1 X1E RFRP RTOP Y1E instructions when the X1F A68RDAN is used in Y1F remote I O station 4 66 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 8 4 Buffer memory address comparison Address decimal Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A68RD4N Q64RD G Read write Read write 0 Conversion enable disable specification Conversion enable disable setting CH1 Time count moving average time 1 Averaging processing selection constant setting CH2 Time count moving average time 2 CH1 Averaging time count constant setting R W E CH3 Time count moving average time 3 CH2 Averaging time count RW constant setting A CH4 Time count moving average time 4 CH3 Averaging time count constant setting 5 Averaging time count 6 CH5 Averaging time count System area 7 CH6 Averaging time count 8 CH7 Averaging time count 9 CH8 Averaging time count Averaging processing selection R
199. er for Mitsubishi programmable controller Q series ABSOCODER sensor cable The existing cables can be reused A new wiring is not necessary I O cables should be replaced because connectors are different The specifications are different between A61LS and VS Q62B V1PG and the extensive modification is necessary in the sequence program and so on Therefore please contact your local Mitsubishi representative 8 UPGRADE OF THE POSITION 8 2 A62LS S5 and A63LS 1 2 3 A62LS S5 and A63LS the Mitsubishi position detection modules are able to upgrade to VARILIMIT VS Q62 or VS Q62B Series manufactured by our partner NSD Corporation VS Q62 VS Q62B Series are a built in converter for Mitsubishi programmable controller Q series Model list of the existing positioning modules ABSOCODER sensors and replacement modules The replacement module VS Q62 is selected based on the existing position detection modules and ABSOCODER sensor models with using the below list Replacement Q series ABSOCODER sensor Positioning module Position detection module Existing A series positioning module VS Q62B A62LS S5 A1S62LS MRE 32SP062SAC MRE GLISP062FAC VS Q62 M2PG VS Q62B M2PG L1 64 128 160 256 320 Q 8 2 VLS 256PWB VLS 512PWB VLS 1024PW VS Q62 L VLS 512PYB VLS 1024PYB VLS 2048PY Oo VS Q62 Positioning type
200. error in temperature conversion Error correction function O the offset gain setting of the value Q64RD Replaceable modules during Replaces a module without stopping the Online module replacement O online are the Process CPU and system the Redundant CPU 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 7 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A68RD4N Q64RD Device Device Device i Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No XO Watchdog timer error flag YO Module READY YO Not used CH1 Offset gain setting CH1 Offset setting X1 READY flag Y1 Y1 status signal request CH2 Offset gain setting X2 Write data error flag Y2 Y2 CH1 Gain setting request status signal X di ti odo CH3 Offset gain setting CH2 Offset setting X3 detection flag status signal request CH1 to CH8 CHA Offset gain setting X4 Y4 Y4 CH2 Gain setting request status signal CH3 Offset setting X5 Y5 Y5 Not used request X6 Y6 Y6 CH3 Gain setting request _ Not used CH4 Offset setting XT YT YT request X8 Y8 Y8 CH4 Gain
201. ersion enable disable setting 0 A D conversion enable disable VM CH1 Average time Average number of times 1 Averaging processing specification 1 b Moving average Time constant settings e CH2 Average time Average number of times 2 CH1 Averaging time count 2 Moving average Time constant settings 0n CH3 Average time Average number of times 3 CH2 Averaging time count 3 Moving average Time constant settings m CH4 Average time Average number of times 4 CH3 Averaging time count 4 RIW Moving average Time constant settings R W aa CH5 Average time Average number of times 5 CH4 Averaging time count 5 Moving average Time constant settings CH6 Average time Average number of times 6 CH5 Averaging time count 6 Moving average Time constant settings 0n CH7 Average time Average number of times i CH6 Averaging time count 7 Moving average Time constant settings e CH8 Average time Average number of times 8 CH7 Averaging time count 8 Moving average Time constant settings 9 CH8 Averaging time count 9 System area Not used 10 CH1 Digital output value 10 A D conversion completed flag 11 CH2 Digital output value 11 CH1 Digital output value 12 CH3 Digital output value 12 CH2 Digital output value 13 CHA Digital output value 13 CH3 Digital output value 14 CH5 Digital output value R 14 CH4 Digital output value 15 CH6 Digital output value 15 CH5 Digital output value R 16 CH7 Digital output value
202. es disables a detection of e specification of each channel temperature The setting ranges of time and count averages differ Sampling averaging processing Processes the detected temperature by Refer to the RTD Input Module selection specified method Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual to check the specifications Detected temperature value Stores temperature data in the buffer storage memory For the Q64RD G a Detects disconnection of the connected b Disconnection detection O O disconnection is detected per RTD or cable channel Type specification of RTD Specifies a RTD type used O O Range switching function Switches the measured temperature range Outputs a warning when the temperature Warning output function O exceeds the set temperature range A Converts a measured temperature value Scaling function O into a percent value in set width Perform the error correction by N J Corrects an error in temperature conversion Error correction function O O the offset gain setting of the value Q64RD G Replaceable modules during Replaces a module without stopping the Online module replacement O online are the Process CPU and system the Redundant CPU 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 8 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For detai
203. esistance value 5000 to 1MQ Current 4 to 20mADC External load resistance value 00 to 6000 Current output is usable by 0 to 20mA I O characteristics Output range Digital input Analog output 4000 10V 0 OV 4000 5V or 20mA 0 OV or OMA 4000 5V or 20mA 0 1V 4 to 10V 0 to 5V Voltage Maximum 1 to 5V 1mvV 1 4000 0 to 5V 1 25mV 1 4000 0 to 10V 2 5mV 1 4000 resolution Current Overall accuracy accuracy at maximum analog output value Maximum conversion speed Absolute maximum output 4 to 20mA 4A 1 4000 0 to 20mA 5 1 4000 Refer to 1 Within 15ms 2 channels same time for one channel Note Time from when the digital input is written to when the specified analog voltage current is reached Voltage 0 to 12V Current 0 to 28mA Note Max output voltage and current restricted by output protection circuit Number of analog output points 2 channels module Number of writes to E2PROM Output short protection 1 Indicates accuracy at the maximum analog output value of the A62DA S1 43 Output range Temperature range 1 to 5V O to 5V 10 to 10V 4 to 20mA 25 C within 0 5 3 25mV x 25mV c 50mV 0 1 0 to 55 C within 1 50mV a 50mV 100mV 0 2mA 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatibl
204. ess Conductor A68RD3N A Lay wiring so that the following conditions are met Pt100 2 1 Conductor resistance value lt 10 Q 2 Conductor resistance value 10 Q 3 Conductor resistance value S 10 Q b 3 SLD Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 94A Weight 0 43kg 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68RD3 G Compatibility Precautions for replacement 2 A Install a relay terminal block outside 0 54A 0 20kg 1 Accuracy of the Q68RD3 G for each RTD type is as follows Conversion accuracy Specifications 200 to 850 C 1 0 8 C Ambient temperature 25 5 C 2 4 C Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Pt100 20 to 120 C 0 3 C Ambient temperature 25 5 1 1 C Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 0 to 200 C 0 4 C Ambient temperature 25 5 1 2 C Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 180 to 600 C 0 8 C Ambient temperature 25 5 2 4 C Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C JPt100 20 to 120 C 0 3 C Ambient temperature 25 5 1 1 C Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 0 to 200 C 0 4 C Ambient temperature 25 5 1 2 C Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Ni100 60 to 180 C 0 4 C Ambient temperature 25 5 C 1 2 C Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 2 Connect cables between the Q68RD3 G and RTD using a relay terminal b
205. ess terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 5VDC 1A Weight 0 85kg 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68ADV Q68ADI Compatibility Precautions for replacement The conversion speed of Q68ADV I to A616AD has become quick And then Q68ADV I the noise that did 80us channel When there is temperature drift compensation the time calculated by not import A616AD can be adding 160us will be used regardless of the number of channels used imported as analog signal In this case use the averaging processing function to remove the effect of noise 15V 30mA Consider 8 channels module A replacement with multiple Q68ADV I Max 100 000 times Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation O Between channels non isolated Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute O Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more O 16 points I O occupied points has changed to I O assignment intelligent 16 points 16 points 18 point terminal block x 2 0 3 to 0 75mm Wiring change is required R1 25 3 A solderless terminal with sleeve can not be used x 0 64A 0 64A 0 19kg 0 19kg 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT
206. et gain setting mode XA k YA XA YA User range write request detection flag status flag Channel change XB YB XB YB Channel change request completion flag Disconnection detection XC YC XC t YC signal xD YD Interlock signal for the XD Warning output signal YD Not used RFRP and RTOP Conversion completion XE 6 instructions when the flag A68RD3N is used in XF YF Error flag YF Error clear request remote I O station X10 Y10 Not used X11 Y11 Not used X12 Y12 Error code reset flag X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A Not used X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Interlock signal for the 1 X1E RFRP RTOP Y1E instructions when the X1F A68RD3N is used in Y1F remote I O station 4 48 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 6 4 Buffer memory address comparison Address decimal Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A68RD3N Q68RD3 G Read write Address decimal Read write
207. etection upper limit setting value to 158 I Mode switching setting R W 159 to 200 Save data classification setting R W 201 System area Not used 202 CH1 Factory default offset value 203 CH1 Factory default gain value to R W 232 CH8 Factory default offset value 233 CH8 Factory default gain value 2 42 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 7 A68ADN Upgrade to Q68ADV Q68ADI 2 7 1 Performance comparison Item A68ADN Voltage 10 to O to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ Analog input Current 20 to 0 to 20mADC Input resistance value 250Q 16 bit signed binary When 1 4000 is set 4096 to 4095 When 1 8000 is set 8192 to 8191 When 1 12000 is set 12288 to 12287 Digital output Digital output value Analog input When gain 5V 20mA offset 0V OmA 1 4000 1 8000 1 12000 I O characteristics 00 9000 12090 5V or 20 2000 4000 6000 OV or 20mA 0 0 0 5V or 20mA 2000 4000 6000 10V 4000 8000 12000 Factory set gain 5V offset 0V a T 1 4000 1 8000 1712000 Voltage input 2 5mV 1 25mV 0 83mV Current input 10pA 5uA 3 33uA 1 4000 1 8000 1 12000 1 40 80 120 Overall accuracy Accuracy in respect to maximum digital output value N 43 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible
208. ethod Between the output terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation A616DAV channels non isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 5VDC 11 0 38A 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68DAVN Compatibility Precautions for replacement 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 O High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 10 to 10VDC External load resistance value 1kQ to 1MQ O Analog output Normal resolution mode i High resolution mede Wik AU ASTEDAVNIR ESE SV Digital input Maximum Digital input Maximum en using 7 value resolution value resolution range Q68DAV can obtain equivalent 0 to 5V TT 1 25mV Tm 0 416mV O resolution or more than A616DAV by 1 to 5V 1 0mV 0 333mV setting in 10 to 10V range high Voltage 10to 10V 2 5mV 16000to16000 0 625mV resolution mode or user range 4000104000 120001912000 0 333mV Ambient temperatur
209. ettings gain value 204 CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value 205 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value 206 CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value 207 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value 208 CHA Industrial shipment settings offset value 209 Industrial shipment settings gain value 210 CH5 Industrial shipment settings offset value 211 CH5 Industrial shipment settings gain value 212 CH6 Industrial shipment settings offset value 213 CH6 Industrial shipment settings gain value 214 CH7 Industrial shipment settings offset value 215 CH7 Industrial shipment settings gain value 216 CH8 Industrial shipment settings offset value 217 CH8 Industrial shipment settings gain value 218 CH1 User range settings offset value 219 CH1 User range settings gain value 220 CH2 User range settings offset value 221 CH2 User range settings gain value 222 CH3 User range settings offset value 223 CH3 User range settings gain value 224 User range settings offset value 225 CHA User range settings gain value 226 CH5 User range settings offset value 227 CH5 User range settings gain value 228 CH6 User range settings offset value 229 CH6 User range settings gain value 230 CH7 User range settings offset value 231 CH7 User range settings gain value 232 CH8 User range settings offset value 233 CH8 User range settings gain value R W
210. ffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual A616AD Q68ADVII Address Address Name Read write Name Read write Dec Dec 0 Fordir ci INPUT designation RM 0 A D conversion enable disable 1 MX CH designation 1 CH1 Time count averaging setting z access Digital output value R 2 CH2 Time count averaging setting 3 Sampling period designation 3 CH3 Time count averaging setting 4 Data format selection RAN 4 CH4 Time count averaging setting RW 5 Error code storage 5 CH5 Time count averaging setting 6 Faulty multiplexer module CNT No storage 6 CH6 Time count averaging setting 7 7 CH7 Time count averaging setting 8 8 CH8 Time count averaging setting 9 9 Averaging processing specification 10 10 A D conversion completed flag System area Not used 11 11 CH1 Digital output value 12 12 CH2 Digital output value 13 13 CH3 Digital output value 14 14 CH4 Digital output value 15 A616AD 15 CH5 Digital output value R 16 INPUT 0 A60MX A60MXR 16 CH6 Digital output value 17 INPUT 1 A60MX A60MXR 17 CH7 Digital output value 18 Conversion INPUT 2 A60MX AGOMXR 18 CH8 Digital output value 19 enable disable INP
211. flag setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA XA flag YA User range write request a Channel change XB YB XB YB Channel change request completed flag Input signal error XC YC XC Not used detection signal Maximum value Maximum value XD Notius d YD RFRP RTOP instruction XD minimum value reset YD minimum value reset u for interlock signal when completed flag request A68ADN is used in A D conversion XE YE XE YE Not used remote I O station completed flag XF YF Error flag YF Error clear request X10 Y10 Not used X11 Y11 X12 Y12 Error reset X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 as Not used X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D instruction Y1D X1E for interlock signal when Y1E A68ADN is used in X1F Y1F remote I O station 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 8 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module With Signal Conditioning Function User s Manual A68ADN Q68AD G Address Address Name Read write Name Read write Dec Dec 0 A D conv
212. ged 3 Program I O signals XY assignment buffer memory assignment AD7SP2 S3 QD75D2N when a Prog J eras differential driver is connected and different functions are changed 4 Performance specifications change Not changed 5 Function specifications Partly changed 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Production ES A lt n Transition to series discontinuation QD75P4N when an open 1 External wiring Connector and manual pulsar wiring are changed collector is connected 2 Number of slots Not changed 1 3 Program signals XY assignment buffer memory assignment QD75D4N when a and different functions are changed differential driver is 4 Performance specifications change Not changed connected 5 Function specifications Partly changed 1 The QD75PLIN and QD75DLIN are the upward compatibility for the QD75PL1 and QD75DO and their programs the same when they are replaced Change the sequence program as necessary with checking the processing timing because performances such as the starting time and data update cycle are improved 2 When the AD70 being used in the setting that the negative voltage is output when the positioning address increases is replaced with the QD73A1 the wiring change between the AD70 and an encoder is required For details refer to Section 7 6 6 7 2 AD70D No Q series alternative model is available Consider mounting the existing module
213. ged to 16 points 18 point terminal block x 2 x Smm Wiring change is required R1 25 3 n Sleeved solderless terminal cannot be used 0 34A 24VDC 20 15 Ripple spike 500mV gt p_p or less O 0 24A 2 5A 260us or less O 0 20kg O 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 5 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available Analog output HOLD CLEAR function Description Retains an analog value that was output when the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status or an error occurs A62DA Q64DAN Precautions for replacement D A conversion enable disable function Specifies whether to enable or disable the D A conversion D A output enable disable function Specifies whether to output the D A conversion value or the offset value The Q64DAN specifies whether to enable or disable output for each channel Synchronous output function Obtains analog output synchronized with the programmable controller CPU Analog output test while the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status Outputs the analog value converted from a digital value when Output enable disable flag is forcibly turned on while the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status Resolution mode Switches the resolution mode according to the application The resolution can be selected from 1 4000 1 12000 or 1 16000 The resolution mode is batch set for all channels
214. gnal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A62DA S1 Q64DAN Device Device Signal name Signal name No No XO Watchdog timer error YO X1 D A conversion READY Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X4 Y4 X5 Y5 X6 Y6 XT X8 Y8 X9 Y9 XA YA Not used XB YB XC YC Not used XD YD XE YE XF YF X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B Output enable X1C Y1C X1D Y1D Not used X1E Device i Signal name Signal name No Module READY YO Not used v1 CH1 Output enable disable flag CH2 Output enable Y2 disable flag CH3 Output enable Not used disable flag CH4 Output enable Y4 disable flag Y5 Y6 Y7 Not used High resolution mode Y8 status flag Operating condition Y9 Operating condition setting completion flag setting request Offset gain setting mode YA User range write request status flag Channel change YB Channel change request completion flag Setting value change YC Setting value change completion flag request Synchronous output YD Synchronous output mode flag request Not used YE Not used Error flag YF Error clear
215. grate Brianza Milano Italy MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EU Carretera de Rub 76 80 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EU ROPE B V ROPE B V 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 9274 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EU Spanish Branch Apdo 420 08173 Sant Cugat del Vall s Barcelona Spain French Branch Nanterre Cedex France ROPE B V Czech Branch Avenir Business Park Radlicka 751 113e 158 00 Praha5 Czech Republic MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EU ul Krakowska 50 32 083 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EU ROPE B V Balice Po ROPE B V Polish Branch and Scandinavia Fjelievagen 8 SE 22736 Lund Sweden MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EU ROPE B V Piskarevsky pr 2 bld 2 lit Sch BC MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TURKEY A S mraniye Branch Serifali Mahallesi Nutuk S MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EU okak No 5 ROPE B V Russian Branch St Petersburg office Benua office 720 RU 195027 St Petersburg Russia TR 34775 Umraniye Istanbul Turkey Dubai Branch Dubai Silicon Oasis P O BOX 341241 Dubai U A E ADROIT TECHNOLOGIES 20 Waterford Office Park 189 Witkoppen Road Fourways Johannesburg South Africa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION CHINA LTD No 1386 Hongqiao Road Mitsubishi Electric Automation Center Shanghai China SETSUYO ENTERPRISE CO LTD 6F No 105 Wugong 3rd Road Wugu District New Taipei City 24889 Taiwan R O C MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO LTD 7F 9F Gangseo Hangang Xi tower A 401 Yangcheon ro Gangseo G
216. h the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN the positioning data buffer memory addresses are Nos 1 to 600 2 With the QD75PON QD75DON it is called block start data 3 With the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN the block start data and condition data in L the area are called start block 0 There are five start blocks 0 to 4 T 18 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Item of AD75PO S3 Buffer memory address AD75PLI S3 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN 5 Start No 8001 4500 4750 5000 Positioning start Start No 8002 4501 4751 5001 information 2 5 to to to to to to to g Start No 8050 4549 4799 5049 E 5050 30000 Programmable controller CPU Condition judgment target data to s memory area of the condition data 5099 30099 Target axis 5100 Head positioning block No 5101 No of read write data items 5102 Read write request 5103 5110 to 6109 Read write block T 19 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 4 5 Interface specifications comparison with external devices For the external interface specifications the following shows the differences between AD75PLI S3 and QD75PLIN QD75DLIN O Compatible A Partial change required Compat 3 Differences as Interface specifications ibility Precautions for replacement Drive unit READY O Upper lower limit signal Stop signal lt When the machine OPR for the near point watchdog signal method is
217. h upper limit value 84 CH4 Scaling width lower limit value 85 Scaling width upper limit value 86 CH1 Warning output lower lower L 87 limit value H 88 CH1 Warning output lower upper L 89 limit value H 90 CH1 Warning output upper lower L 91 limit value H 92 CH1 Warning output upper upper L 93 limit value H to 116 CH4 Warning output upper upper L 117 limit value H 118 CH1 Offset temperature setting L RAN 119 value H 120 CH1 Gain temperature setting L 121 value H to 132 CH4 Gain temperature setting L RAW 133 value H 4 58 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 59 Q64RD Address decimal 134 to 157 Not used Read write 158 Mode switching setting settings gain resistance value H R W 160 3 conductor type CH1 Factory default offset value to 4 conductor type CH4 User range L uctor typ r range L ew 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 8 A68RD4AN Replacement to the Q64RD G 4 8 1 Performance comparison Item Measuring method A68RD4N 4 wire type Output temperature conversion value 16 bit signed binary 1800 to 6000 Value up to the first decimal place x 10 32 bit signed binary 180000 to 600000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 Applicable RTD Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC 751 am2 JIS C1604 1989 DIN 43760 1980 JPt100
218. hannel 3E CH1 Scaling range lower limit value 180 to R W Digital output value storage R SD CH1 Scaling range upper limit value MX CH channel to 200 to 27F Detected temperature value storage 4D CH8 Scaling range upper limit value 4E CH1 Scaling width lower limit value R W 4F CH1 Scaling width upper limit value to 5D CH8 Scaling width upper limit value 5E CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value RIW 5F CH1 Process alarm lower upper limit value 60 CH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value 4 20 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 21 Q68TD G H02 Q68TD G H01 value H Address Read write hex 61 CH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value R W to 7D CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value CH1 to CH8 Rate alarm warning detection TE to 85 period R W 86 CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value 87 CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value to 95 CH8 Rate alarm lower limit value R W 96 to 9D System area 9E to 9F Mode switching setting R W 0 to System area Not used Q68TD G H02 Conversion setting for disconnection detection A4 to A5 Q68TD G H01 Disconnection state conversion setting RW Q68TD G H02 Conversion setting value for disconnection detection A6 to AD 7 z Q68TD G H01 Conversion setting value for disconnection state AE to BD System area Not used BE CH1 Factory default offset value BF CH1 Factory default g
219. he module until it snaps into place Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix the module with a screw Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction When using an extension cable connect it to the extension cable connector of the base unit securely Check the connection for looseness Poor contact may cause incorrect input or output When using a memory card fully insert it into the memory card slot Check that it is inserted completely Poor contact may cause malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product A module can be replaced online while power is on on any MELSECNET H remote I O station or in the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to the relevant sections in the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection and in the manual for the corresponding module Do not directly touch any conductive
220. he replacement can be used 2 The rise fall time of a pulse affects the counting speed Countable counting speeds are as follows Counting a pulse whose rise fall time is long may result in a miscount For the AD61S1 and QD62 H02 Rise fall time 1 phase input 2 phase input t 5us 10KPPS 7KPPS t 500us 500PPS 250PPS 4 l 6 10 6 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 6 3 2 Function comparison O With functions Without functions Item Description AD61S1 QD62 H02 Precautions for replacement Changes the counter present value to a Preset function i O specified value Disable function Terminates counting O O On QD62 H02 the setting is Repeatedly executes counting between un Ring counter function i O carried out using intelligent user s setting values function module switch setting If the count exceeds the range this function Linear counter function O detects an overflow No 1 and No 2 coincidence output points be set for each channel EM Outputs signals when user the present Coincidence output function values are matched Generates an interrupt signal to the programmable controller CPU when coincidence is detected Coincidence detection interrupt function Latches the present value at the time Latch counter function signal is input Counts the pulses that are input during the
221. he time a signal is input Sampling counter function Counts the pulse that was input during the sampling time set Periodic pulse counter function 6 6 The function allows storing the present value in the periodic pulse count present value and the previous value in the periodic pulse count previous value for each period time set 6 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 6 2 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the High Speed Counter Module User s Manual Not used QD62 H01 Device si Device si Device Si Device Si No ignal name No ignal name No ignal name No ignal name X0 CH1 Counter value greater YO Module READY eee CH1 Coincidence signal No 1 reset command 1 d Counter value v1 1 GAI Counter value large y1 Preget command coincidence Point No 1 x2 GHA Countervahielless Y2 x2 E Counter Vus y2 CH1 Coincidence signal coincidence Point No 1 enable command x3 CH1 External preset request Y3 x3 Counter value small CHA Down Gount cermmand detection Point No 1 4 CH2 Counter value greater Y4 X4 CHA Pxtermal preset request Y4 CH1 Count enable command detection X5
222. here the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safe
223. hod Between channels non isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Number of occupied I O points 3 Pointe I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 20 point terminal block 0 75 to 2mm2 Applicable wire size Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59N cm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 6A 5VDC Voltage 21 6 to 26 4VDC External Current power supply 0 35A consumption Inrush current 2 4A Weight 0 5kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q62DAN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between output channels non isolation Between external power supply and analog output transformer isolation Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or 16 points A The number of occupied I O points I O assignment intelligent 16 points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block x 2 x Wiring change is required R1 25 3 Sleeved solderless terminal cannot be used 0 33A O 24VDC 20 15 Ripple spike 500mVp p or less O 0 1
224. icable RTD Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC 751 am2 JIS C1604 1989 DIN 43760 1980 JPt100 JIS C1604 1981 180 to 600 C Pt100 Measured 27 10 to 313 710 te t 180 to 600 C emperature JPt100 o range 25 80 to 317 28Q Ni100 1 Accuracy accuracy at full scale Resolution 0 025 C Conversion speed 40ms channel Number of analog input points 8 channels module Output current for temperature detection 1mA Isolation method Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between platinum RTD input and channel non isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Disconnection detection Detected per channel Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points External connection system 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable solderless terminal A 33 V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64RD G 3 4 wire type O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compatibility Precautions for replacement 16 bit signed binary 2000 to 8500 Value up to the first decimal place x 10 32 bit signed binary 200000 to 850000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997
225. ight 0 55kg 5 MULTIPLEXER REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68ADV Q68ADI Compatibility Precautions for replacement Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Ambient temperature Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 0 to 55 C Analog input 2 Ambient Ambient With Without With Without range temperature temperature temperature temperature 25 5 temperature temperature 25 5 drift drift drift drift compensation compensation compensation compensation 0 to 10V 2 0 3 0 4 0 1 10 to sis epos dedit A60MX is the accuracy in E 19115 T 19115 19115 10V gits gis gits respect to the full scale and Voltage 0 to 5V O Q68ADV I is the accuracy in 1 to 5V respect to maximum digital Users output value range 0 3 0 4 0 1 settings 412 digits 16 digits 4 digits Wu ud 0 3 0 4 0 1 20 36 digits 48 digits 12 digits 4to Current 20mA Users range settings 15V 30mA Consider replacement with 8 channels module A multiple Q68ADV I Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels non isolated 16 points Q68ADV I cannot set to 0 point I O assignment intelligent 16 points with I O assignment 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm x Wiring cha
226. imit value CH3 Scaling width lower limit value CH3 Scaling width upper limit value CH4 Scaling width lower limit value CH4 Scaling width upper limit value CH1 Warning output lower L lower limit value H CH1 Warning output lower L upper limit value H CH1 Warning output upper L lower limit value H CH1 Warning output upper L upper limit value H to CH4 Warning output upper L upper limit value H CH1 Offset temperature setting value L H R W CH1 Gain temperature setting value L H to 4 30 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 31 Q64RD Address decimal CH4 Gain temperature setting value L Read write settings gain resistance value H R W 133 H 134 to 157 Not used 158 Mode switching setting R W 160 3 conductor type CH1 Factory default offset value to 4 conductor type CH4 User ran L nductor typ r range L RW 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 4 32 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 5 A68RD3N Replacement to the Q64RD G 4 5 1 Performance comparison Item Measuring method A68RD3N 3 wire type Output temperature conversion value 16 bit signed binary 1800 to 6000 Value up to the first decimal place x 10 32 bit signed binary 180000 to 600000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 Appl
227. in value 4 10 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 11 Q64TD Address hex CH3 User range settings offset value Read write CH3 User range settings gain value CH3 User range settings thermal L EMF offset value H CH3 User range settings thermal L EMF gain value H R W B8 CH4 Factory default offset value B9 CH4 Factory default gain value BA CH4 User range settings offset value CH4 User range settings gain value CH4 User range settings thermal L EMF offset value H CH4 User range settings thermal L EMF gain value H System area Not used 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 3 A616TD Replacement to the Q68TD G H02 Q68TD G H01 4 3 1 Performance comparison 1 Performance comparison list Temperature sensor input A616TD When using the A60MXT and A60MXTN together 200 to 1800 C Digital output value Output 16 bit signed binary 0 to 4000 Data part 12 bits Detected temperature value 16 bit signed binary 2000 to 18000 value up to the first decimal place x 10 Applicable thermocouple Refer to Section 4 3 1 2 Measured temperature range accuracy Refer to Section 4 3 1 2 Overall accuracy Refer to the table in Section 4 3 1 2 Measured temperature range accuracy 0 5 C Maximum conversion speed
228. ing OP shift 88 238 388 88 238 388 Pr 58 Dwell time during OPR retry 89 239 389 89 239 389 T 13 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of AD75PO S3 Md 1 In test mode flag 450 1200 Md 2 Module name 451 S os 452 453 Md 3 type 454 455 456 Md 4 version 457 Md 5 Clock data hour minute 460 Md 6 Clock data second 100 ms 461 Pointer number 0 to 15 Md 7 Start axis 462 to 537 1212 to 1287 QD75PLIN QD75DLEIN Md 3 Start information Md 8 Operation type 463 to 538 1213 to 1288 QD75PON QD75DON Md 4 Start No gt Md 9 Start Hour minute t t 464 to 539 1214 to 1289 QD75PON QD75DON Md 5 Start Hour Md 10 Start Second 100 ms 465 to 540 1215 to 1290 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Md 6 Start Minute second Md 11 Error judgment 466 to 541 1216 to 1291 Md 12 Start history pointer 542 1292 Pointer number 0 to 15 A Md 13 Start axis 543 to 618 Md 14 Operation type dD 544 to 619 Md 15 Start Hour minute 3 545 to 620 gt Md 16 Start Second 100 ms 2 546 to 621 Md 17 Error judgment 547 to 622 Md 18 Start history storage during error 623
229. ing are changed 2 Number of slots Not changed AD75M1 QD75M1 3 Program VO signals XY assignment buffer memory assignment and different functions are changed 4 Performance specifications change Upward compatibility 5 Function specifications Partly changed 1 External wiring Connector and manual pulsar wiring are changed 2 Number of slots Not changed AD75M2 QD75M2 3 Program I O signals XY assignment buffer memory assignment and different functions are changed 4 Performance specifications change Upward compatibility 5 Function specifications Partly changed 1 External wiring Connector and manual pulsar wiring are changed 2 Number of slots Not changed AD75M3 QD75M4 3 Program I O signals XY assignment buffer memory assignment and different functions are changed 4 Performance specifications change Upward compatibility 5 Function specifications Partly changed QD75P1N when an open 1 External wiring Connector and manual pulsar wiring are changed collector is connected 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program I O signals XY assignment buffer memory assignment 1 AD75P1 S3 QD75D1N when a and different functions are changed differential driver is 4 Performance specifications change Not changed connected 5 Function specifications Partly changed QD75P2N when an open 1 External wiring Connector and manual pulsar wiring are changed collector is connected 2 Number of slots Not chan
230. ing as the AD70 by referring to the MELSEC Q QD73A1 Positioning Module User s Manual 5 Items indicated with the LEDs can be checked with I O signals of the QD73A1 If necessary install lamps corresponding to the LED indications externally and indicate the on off status of the I O signals using a program 6 The position where a module is mounted is changed because the dimensions of a base unit of the QD73A1 differ Check whether the wiring is enough even after the replacement because the connector position is changed though the existing connectors can be used without the wiring change T 53 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 When the AD70 being used the setting that the positive voltage is output when the positioning address increases slide switch 1 rotation direction setting on is replaced with the QD73A1 the cables between the AD70 and an encoder can be used When the AD70 being used in the setting that the negative voltage is output when the positioning address increases slide switch 1 rotation direction setting off is replaced with the QD73A1 the wiring change between the AD70 and an encoder is required When the AD70 is replaced with the QD73A1 whose serial number first five digits is 15042 or later the cables between the AD70 and the encoder can be used by changing the intelligent function module switch setting Replacement with the QD73A1 whose serial number first five digits is 15041 or earlier Chang
231. ing average Time constant settings 0n CH7 Average time Average number of times i CH6 Averaging time count 7 Moving average Time constant settings e CH8 Average time Average number of times 8 CH7 Averaging time count 8 Moving average Time constant settings 9 CH8 Averaging time count 9 System area Not used 10 CH1 Digital output value 10 A D conversion completed flag 11 CH2 Digital output value 11 CH1 Digital output value 12 CH3 Digital output value 12 CH2 Digital output value 13 CHA Digital output value R 13 CH3 Digital output value 14 CH5 Digital output value 14 CH4 Digital output value 15 CH6 Digital output value 15 CH5 Digital output value R 16 CH7 Digital output value 16 CH6 Digital output value 17 CH8 Digital output value 17 CH7 Digital output value 18 18 CH8 Digital output value 19 19 Error code 20 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 21 21 Setting range CH5 to CH8 22 22 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification 23 23 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification 24 24 Averaging process specification CH1 to RIW CH4 Averaging process specification CH5 to 25 System area Not used 25 CH8 26 26 27 27 System area Not used 28 28 29 29 30 30 CH1 Maximum value 31 31 CH1 Minimum value 32 32 CH2 Maximum value 33 33 CH2 Minimum value R 34 Write data error code R W 34 CH3 Maximum value 35 A D conversion completed flag R to 44 CH8 Maximum value 45 CH8 Minimum value 2 41 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT
232. ing from changes in the ambient temperature of the module are automatically compensated for to improve conversion accuracy The temperature drift compensation function can be performed at A D conversion time for all channels 160us Resolution mode The resolution settings of 1 4000 1 12000 or 1 16000 can be selected according to the application The resolution mode setting is applicable to all channels Online module change 2 31 A module change is made without the System being stopped Replaceable modules during online are a process CPU and a redundant CPU 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 5 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual A68AD S2 Q68ADVII Device Device Signal name No No XO Watchdog timer error YO X1 conversion READY Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X4 Y4 X5 Y5 X6 Y6 X7 Y7 X8 Y8 x9 Y9 XA YA XB YB XC YC XD YD Not used XE YE XF YF X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Y1D X1E Y1E X1F Y1F Signal name Not used Device Device Signal
233. ings gain value 216 CH8 Industrial shipment settings offset value 217 CH8 Industrial shipment settings gain value RAN 218 CH1 User range settings offset value 219 CH1 User range settings gain value 220 CH2 User range settings offset value 221 CH2 User range settings gain value 222 CH3 User range settings offset value 223 CH3 User range settings gain value 224 User range settings offset value 225 CH4 User range settings gain value 226 CH5 User range settings offset value 227 CH5 User range settings gain value 228 CH6 User range settings offset value 229 CH6 User range settings gain value 230 CH7 User range settings offset value 231 CH7 User range settings gain value 232 CH8 User range settings offset value 233 CH8 User range settings gain value 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 8 AG8AD Upgrade to Q68AD G 2 8 1 Performance comparison Item A68ADN Voltage 10 to 0 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ Analog input Current 20 to 0 to 20mADC Input resistance value 250Q 16 bit signed binary When 1 4000 is set 4096 to 4095 When 1 8000 is set 8192 to 8191 When 1 12000 is set 12288 to 12287 Digital output Digital output value Analog input When gain 5V 20mA offset 0V OmA 1 4000 1 8000 1 12000 10V 4000 8000 12000 5V or 20mA 2000 4000 6000 OV or 20mA 0 0 0 5V or 20mA 2000 4000 6000 10V 4000 8000 12000 Factory se
234. interlock signal XE _ Not used YE Not used XF YF Error flag YF clear request X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 Not used X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B Output enable batch flag X1C Y1C X1D Y1D RFRP RTOP instruction Not used 1 _ interlock signal X1F Y1F 3 8 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memories differs For details of the buffer memories and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A616DAI Q68DAIN Address Address Name Read write Name Read write decimal decimal 0 D A conversion enable disable channel 0 D A conversion enable disable 1 Analog output enable disable channel FI 1 CH1 Digital value 2 2 CH2 Digital value 3 3 CH3 Digital value 4 4 CH4 Digital value R W 5 5 CH5 Digital value 6 6 CH6 Digital value 7 7 CH7 Digital value 8 8 CH8 Digital value 9 System area Not used 9 10 10 System area Not used 11 11 CH1 Setting value check code 12 12 CH2 Setting value check code 13 13 CH3 Setting value check code 14 14 Setting value check code 15 15 CH5 Setting value check code 16 CHO Digital value 16 CH6 Setting value check code R 17 CH1 Digital va
235. iodic setting 11 43 Sampling periodic counter flag 12 44 L Latch count value 13 45 H 14 46 L Sampling count value da tr H R 16 48 M L Periodic pulse count previous value 17 49 H 18 50 n L Periodic pulse count present value 19 51 H 20 52 E L Ring counter minimum value 21 53 H R W 22 54 L Ring counter maximum value 23 55 H 24 56 to to System area Not used 63 6 8 6 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 6 3 AD61S1 6 3 1 Performance comparison O Compatible A Partial change required Incompatible AD61S1 QD62 H02 Precautions for replacement 32 points 16 points Occupied I O points I O assignment special 32 I O assignment intelligent 16 4 points points Number of channels 2 channels Counting speed switch Set 2 at the intelligent UE 10KPPS meng settings function module switch setting Phase 1 phase input 2 phase input Count input 5VDC nal leve signal ig 12VDC 2105mA B 24VDC Counting 1 phase input 10KPPS 1 phase input 10KPPS speed 2 2 phase input 7KPPS 2 phase input 7KPPS Max On QD62 H02 as the value is Counting 24 bit unsigned binary 32 bit signed binary used with 32 bit signed binary range 0 to 16 777 215 2147483648 to 2147483647 values change of sequence program is required o Counter Type UP DOWN p
236. ion flag request Interlock signal for the Synchronous output Synchronous output XD YD XD YD RFRP and RTOP mode flag request XE YE instructions when the XE Not used YE Not used A68DAI S1 is used in XF YF Error flag YF Error clear request remote I O station X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 D A conversion output X14 Y14 enable flag X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 reset flag X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D_ Interlock signal for the Y1D Not used X1E RFRP and RTOP Y1E instructions when the 1 A68DAI S1 is used in Y1F remote I O station 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 8 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memories and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A68DAI S1 Q68DAIN Address Address Name Read write Name Read write decimal decimal 0 D A conversion enable disable channel 0 D A conversion enable disable 1 CH1 Digital value 1 CH1 Digital value 2 CH2 Digital value 2 CH2 Digital value 3 CH3 Digital value 3 CH3 Digital value 4 CH4 Digital value RM 4 CH4 Digital value R W 5 CH5 Digital value 5 CH5 Digital value 6 CH6 Digital value 6 CH6 Digital value 7 CH7 Digital v
237. l property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this handbook 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT AT 7 REVISIONS EE 8 CHAPTER1 INTRODUCTION 1 1to1 2 1 1 Advantages of Transition to Series 99000580058000095900909959090290099900099069059999006500555060958509646 1 1 1 2 Precautions for Transition from Large sized A QnA Series to Series 1 2 CHAPTER2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 1t02 58 2 1 List of Analog Input Module Alternative Models for Replacement 2 1 222 209 Gp EE 2 3 2 2 1 Performance comparison retreat BL eR UHR Dee XE a nd eve ves 2 3 2 2 2 Function comparison R 2 7 2 2 3 signal comparison to programmable controller CPU 2 8 2 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison sssssssssssssseeeee eene eene nennen nns 2 9 2 3
238. le series module A62DA AG2DA S1 Q62DAN ERNT AQT62DA Analog output module A68DAV Q68DAVN A68DAI ERNT AQT68DA A68DAI S1 VARHAIN 2 Two slot type cannot be mounted on the Q series large type base unit MELSEC A QnA MELSEC Q Product Conversion adaptor series module series module A616DAV Q68DAVN x2 modules Analog output modul ERNT AQT616DA E LO AG 16DAI Q68DAIN x2 modules For contact information for inquiries on the upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd refer to Section 2 1 2 Inrush Current Compared to inrush current of the external power supply of the analog output unit of A QnA series you might inrush current of the external power supply of the Q series analog output unit is large If an overcurrent occurs please consider the measures below The rated current of the external power supply be increased at the time of replacement The power supply line is relayed by the relay and power on one by one 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 2 A616DAI 3 2 1 Performance comparison Item A616DAI Digital input 16 bit signed binary Data part 12 bits Setting range 0 to 4095 Analog output 0 to 20mADC External load resistance value 0Q to 600Q Digital input Analog output I O characteristics 4000 20mA 2000 12mA 0 4mA Digital value resolution 1 4000 Overall accuracy Accuracy at maximum analog out
239. le size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Counting speed Not changed 4 Counting range 24 bit unsigned binary 0 to 16777215 gt AD61 QD62 H01 32 bit signed binary 2147483648 to 2147483647 Review the program 5 Program Occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory address are changed 6 Performance specifications change Not changed High speed counter 7 Function specifications Not changed module 1 External wiring Terminal block wiring Connector wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Counting speed Not changed 4 Counting range 24 bit unsigned binary 0 to 16777215 gt AD61S1 QD62 H02 32 bit signed binary 2147483648 to 2147483647 Review the program 5 Program Occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory address are changed 6 Performance specifications change Not changed 7 Function specifications Not changed 4 The QD62 H01 is a module dedicated for replacing the AD61 with the Q series module The QD62 H02 is a module dedicated for replacing the AD61S1 with the series module Both of them have same input filter system with the AD61 and AD61S1 6 1 6 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT Ed Point 1 Action to the replaced module Input filter system of the AD61 and AD61S1 is the same as that of the QD62 H01 and QD62 H02 Therefore utilizing pulse generator such as existing encoder is possible Counting
240. lection 52 202 352 52 202 352 Pr 36 S pattern proportion 53 203 353 53 203 353 m 54 204 354 54 204 354 Pr 37 Sudden stop deceleration time 55 205 355 55 205 355 Pr 38 Stop group 1 sudden stop selection 56 206 356 56 206 356 Pr 38 Stop group 2 sudden stop selection 57 207 357 57 207 357 Pr 40 Stop group sudden stop selection 58 208 358 58 208 358 Pr 41 Positioning complete signal output time 59 209 359 59 209 359 T 60 210 360 60 210 360 Pr 42 Allowable circular interpolation error widt 61 211 361 61 211 361 Pr 43 External start function selection QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Pr 42 External command function 62 212 362 62 212 362 selection Pr 44 Near pass mode selection for path control 66 216 366 Pr 45 OPR method 70 220 370 70 220 370 Pr 46 OPR direction 71 221 371 71 221 371 core 72 222 372 72 222 372 EGSC U address 73 223 373 73 223 373 ope 4 74 224 374 74 224 374 anes SPER 75 225 375 75 225 375 2 76 226 376 76 226 376 Pr 49 creep Spes 77 227 377 77 227 377 Pr 50 OPR retry 78 228 378 78 228 378 Pr 51 OPR dwell time 79 229 379 79 229 379 52 Setting for the movement amount after near point dog 80 230 380 80 230 380 ON 81 231 381 81 231 381 Pr 53 OPR acceleration time selection 82 232 382 82 232 382 Pr 54 OPR deceleration time selection 83 233 383 83 233 383 OP shift 84 234 384 84 234 384 25 Shi amoun 85 235 385 85 235 385 Pr 56 OPR torque limit value 86 236 386 86 236 386 Pr 57 Speed designation dur
241. leeved solderless terminal cannot be used The recalculation of internal current 0 38A A p consumption 5VDC is required 24VDC 20 15 Ripple spike 500mVp p or less As the external power supply has 0 27A x changed from 15V to 24V its change is required 2 5A 230us or less 0 20kg O 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 2 2 Functional comparison O With functions Without functions Description A616DAI Q68DAIN Precautions for replacement Specifies whether to enable or disable the D A conversion D A conversion enable for each channel disable function By disabling the D A conversion for the channels that are not used the conversion speed can be shortened Specifies whether to output the D A conversion value or the On Q68DAIN the output D A output enable offset value for each channel enable disable is set with Y disable function The conversion speed stays constant regardless of signal Output enable whether D A output is enabled or disabled disable flag Obtains analog output synchronized with the programmable controller CPU The analog output will be updated after Synchronous output request YD is set to ON and the time specified as programmable controller CPU processing time 120ys Synchronous output neice has elapsed However the analog output will be fixed to CH1 and other channels CH2 to CH8 cannot be use
242. ligent and 00 polhis ate changed function module function module Weight 0 4kg 0 2kg 4 For the AD70 0 2ms is added to the starting time in two phase trapezoidal positioning mode For the QD73A1 an extra time is not added even in two phase trapezoidal positioning mode 2 For the QD73A1 the number of occupied slots is 2 and the number of occupied I O points is 48 The program can be utilized easily by setting Empty 0 point to the first half slot of the QD73A1 or by setting the XY address of the AD70 to the second half slot of the QD73A1 at Start XY in I O assignment of PLC parameter T 44 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 6 2 Function comparison 1 Function comparison between the AD70 and the QD73A1 Function Description O Compatible Not available AD70 QD73A1 Precautions for replacement Positioning control Positioning is executed from the current position to a specified position at a specified speed Refer to Section 7 6 6 Position control mode Two phase trapezoidal positioning control Major Positioning is executed to the address specified in Da 2 Positioning address P1 at IDa 3 Positioning speed V1 then to the address specified in Da 4 Positioning address P2 at Da 5 Positioning speed V2 by one positioning start signal positioning control Speed position control switch mode Operation s
243. line are the Process CPU and the Redundant CPU 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 8 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A68DAI S1 Q68DAIN Device Device Device Device i Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No No XO Watchdog timer error flag YO XO Module READY YO Not used D A conversion READY CH1 Output enable X1 Y1 X1 Y1 flag disable flag CH2 Output enable X2 flag Y2 X2 Y2 disable flag CH3 Output enable X3 Y3 X3 Y3 disable flag CH4 Output enable X4 Y4 X4 Not used Y4 disable flag CH5 Output enable X5 Y5 X5 Y5 disable flag CH6 Output enable X6 Y6 X6 Y6 Not used disable flag CH7 Output enable XT YT XT YT disable flag High resolution mode CH8 Output enable X8 Y8 X8 Y8 status flag disable flag Operating condition Operating condition x9 Y9 X9 Y9 setting completion flag setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA XA YA User range write request status flag Channel change XB YB XB YB Channel change request completion flag Setting value change Setting value change XC Not used YC XC YC complet
244. ller Connection CPU Q corresponding serial The connecting shape with peripheral Direct connection EM devices communication module Q corresponding differs MELSECNET H remote I O module par appe AD75TU cannot be devices data used tti tc AD75TU Availabl U ilabl x setting etc vailable navailable Use GX Configurator QP GX Available GX GX Confi tor AP i QP 3 Configurator GX Configurator lt QP O Configurator differs 1 Nos 1 to 100 data items axis of positioning data can be set using the buffer memory and Nos 1 to 600 data axis can be set with QD75MLI The positioning data in the buffer memory is not backed up 2 The near pass function is valid only during the continuous path control AD75MLI Selected with parameters QD75MLI Standard function QD75MLI does not have address pass mode If passing the positioning address continue with continuous operation However it will stop once 3 GX Configurator QP is available with SW2D5C QD75P or later version T 23 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 5 2 Function comparison 1 Deleted function from AD75M1 AD75M2 AD75M3 When using the following function on AD75MLI S3 change the program Deleted functions Creep speed out of range error error code 208 Precautions for replacement With QD75MLI there is no the error code of the left column Fast machine OPR With the Q75MLI there is no possible function for replacement
245. lock as shown below Q68RD3 G Relay terminal block Connector A6CON4 CH1 5 5 A1 S s E 8 33 B 2 o A2 5 5 b CH8 5 5 83 2 5 B19 Z 8 99 B 85 25 B18 gt 5 b 4 46 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 6 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available Item Description A68RD3N Q68RD3 G Precautions for replacement Conversion enable disable Enables disables a detection of e specification of each channel temperature The setting ranges of time and count averages differ Sampling averaging processing Processes the detected temperature by Refer to the RTD Input Module selection specified method Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual to check the specifications Detected temperature value Stores temperature data in the buffer storage memory Detects disconnection of the connected Disconnection detection O O RTD or cable Specification of RTD type Specifies a RTD type used O Range switching function Switches the measured temperature range A Outputs a warning when the temperature Warning output function O exceeds the set temperature range z Converts a measured temperature value Scaling function O into a percent value in set width Perform the error correction by f Corrects an error in temperature c
246. ls of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A68RD4N Q64RD G Device Device Device i Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No XO Watchdog timer error flag YO Module READY YO Not used CH1 Offset gain setting CH1 Offset setting X1 READY flag Y1 Y1 status signal request CH2 Offset gain setting X2 Write data error flag Y2 Y2 CH1 Gain setting request status signal X di ti odo CH3 Offset gain setting CH2 Offset setting X3 detection flag status signal request CH1 to CH8 CHA Offset gain setting X4 Y4 Y4 CH2 Gain setting request status signal CH3 Offset setting X5 Y5 Y5 Not used request X6 Y6 Y6 CH3 Gain setting request _ Not used CH4 Offset setting XT YT YT request X8 Y8 Y8 CH4 Gain setting request Operating condition Operating condition X9 Y9 Y9 setting completion signal setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA YA User range write request status flag XB YB Not used YB Disconnection detection XC YC k YC signal Not used XD YD Interlock signal for the Warning output signal YD Not used RFRP and RTOP Conversion completion XE ve YE instructions when the flag A68RDAN is used in XF YF Error flag YF Error clear r
247. lue 231 CH7 User range settings gain value 232 CH8 User range settings offset value 233 CH8 User range settings gain value R W 3 10 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 3 A616DAV 3 3 1 Performance comparison Item Digital input A616DAV 16 bit signed binary Data part 12 bits Setting range 4096 to 4095 Analog output When output voltage range setting is 10V 10V to OV to 10V External load resistance value 2kO to 1MQ When output voltage range setting is 5V 5V to OV to 5V External load resistance value 2kO to 1MQ gum Analog output Digital input 5V setting 10V setting o 4000 5V 10V I O characteristics 2000 2 5V 5V 0 OV OV 2000 2 5V 5V 4000 5V 10V Digital value resolution 1 4000 Overall accuracy Output voltage range setting 10V 5V accuracy at maximum analog output value Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 0 6 60mV 0 6 30mV Ambient temperature 25 C 0 3 30mV 0 3 x15mV Sampling period 1 5 0 5 x D A number of conversion enabled channels ms 0 5ms Conversion time Time required for conversion from 10 to 10V 10 to 10V Absolute maximum output 15V No of analog output channels 16 channels module Number of writes to E7PROM Output short protection Isolation m
248. lue 17 CH7 Setting value check code 18 CH2 Digital value 18 CH8 Setting value check code 19 CH3 Digital value 19 Error code 20 CHA Digital value 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 21 CH5 Digital value 21 Setting range CH5 to CH8 Offset gain setting mode 22 CH6 Digital value 22 5 Offset specification al Offset gain setting mode R W 23 CH7 Digital value R W 23 CM Gain specification 24 CH8 Digital value 24 Offset gain adjusted value specification 25 CH9 Digital value 25 26 CHA Digital value 26 27 CHB Digital value 27 28 CHC Digital value 28 29 CHD Digital value 29 System area Not used 30 CHE Digital value 30 31 CHF Digital value 31 32 32 to System area Not used to 47 47 3 9 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT A616DAI Q68DAIN Address i Address J Name Read write Name Read write decimal decimal 48 CHO Setting value check code 48 49 CH1 Setting value check code 49 50 CH2 Setting value check code 50 51 CH3 Setting value check code 51 52 CH4 Setting value check code 52 53 CH5 Setting value check code 53 54 CH6 Setting value check code 54 55 CH7 Setting value check code 55 56 CH8 Setting value check code RAN 56 57 CH9 Setting value check code System area Not used i 58 CHA Setting value check code 58 59 CHB Setting value check code 59 60 CHC Setting value check code 60 61 CHD Setting value check code 61 62 CHE Setting valu
249. m The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replac
250. m digital Within 1 20 output value N 27 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68ADV Q68ADI Compatibility Precautions for replacement 10 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ The voltage current cannot be 0 to 20mADC A mixed for one module Input resistance value 250Q 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 O High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 Analog input Normal resolution mode High resolution mode As concept of gain value is Digital Maximum Digital Maximum range changed refer to Analog output value resolution output value resolution a 0 to 10V 2 5mV 0 to 16000 0 625mV 4 Digital Converter Module 0 to 5V 0 to 4000 1 25mV ND 0 416mV User s Manual and then 1 to 5V 1 0mV to 0 333mV confirm the I O characteristics Voltage 3 10 to 10V 2 5mV 16000 to 16000 0 625mV U 4000 to 4000 0 375mV 12000 to 12000 0 333 settings 0 to 20mA 5uA 1 66uA Ato 20 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 cam Current SE O T 4000 to 4000 1 37pA 12000 to 12000 1 33uA settings Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Ambient temperature Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 0 to 55 C Analog input Ambient Ambient With Without With Without range i i A te
251. me constant Maximum and minimum values hold function The maximum and minimum values of the digital output values are retained in the module Resolution mode The resolution can be switched according to the application The resolution mode is batch set for all the channels Input signal error detection function The voltage current outside the setting range is detected Warning output function 1 Process alarm A warning is output if a digital output value falls outside the setting range 2 Rate alarm A warning is output if the varying rate of a digital output value falls outside the preset varying rate range Scaling function Conversion of A D conversion values to preset percentage values and loading into the buffer memory is available Programming steps for the scaling can be eliminated Online module change A module change is made without the system being stopped Replaceable modules during online are a process CPU anda redundant CPU 1 For the A68AD S2 the resolution for voltage is 1 2000 and that for current is 1 1000 fixed For the Q68AD G the resolution for voltage and current is 1 4000 in the normal resolution mode while the resolution for the voltage from 10 to 10V is 1 16000 and the resolution for the voltage in other ranges and current is 1 12000 in the high resolution mode 2 39 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 6 3 I O signal compari
252. me constant settings 0n CH3 Average time Average number of times 3 2 Averaging time count 3 Moving average Time constant settings m CH4 Average time Average number of times 4 CH3 Averaging time count 4 RIW Moving average Time constant settings R W aa CH5 Average time Average number of times 5 CH4 Averaging time count 5 Moving average Time constant settings CH6 Average time Average number of times 6 CH5 Averaging time count 6 Moving average Time constant settings 0n CH7 Average time Average number of times i CH6 Averaging time count 7 Moving average Time constant settings e CH8 Average time Average number of times 8 CH7 Averaging time count 8 Moving average Time constant settings 9 CH8 Averaging time count 9 System area Not used 10 CH1 Digital output value 10 A D conversion completed flag 11 CH2 Digital output value 11 CH1 Digital output value 12 CH3 Digital output value 12 CH2 Digital output value 13 CHA Digital output value R 13 CH3 Digital output value 14 CH5 Digital output value 14 CH4 Digital output value 15 CH6 Digital output value 15 CH5 Digital output value R 16 CH7 Digital output value 16 CH6 Digital output value 17 CH8 Digital output value 17 CH7 Digital output value 18 18 CH8 Digital output value 19 19 Error code 20 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 21 21 Setting range CH5 to CH8 22 22 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification 23 23 Offset gain setting mode Gain sp
253. ment For the products manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd and other companies refer to the catalogue for each product and check the detailed specifications precautions for use and restrictions before use The manuals and catalogues for our products products manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd and Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd are shown in Appendix of each handbook for transition Products shown in this handbook are subject to change without notice A 15 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 1 1 Advantages of Transition to Q Series Advantage 1 Advanced performance of equipments In addition to the processing performance improvement for Q series CPU the processing speed for Q series intelligent function module is also increased so that the equipment capability to improve is possible Advantage 2 Compact control panel and space saving As the Q series needs only 1 4 mounting area of the A series it is possible to create more compact control panel Advantage 3 Improved operating efficiency for programming and monitor Q series intelligent function module prepares the following utility package GX Configurator o sold separately Example GX Configurator AD Analog input module setting monitoring tool GX Configurator DA Analog output module setting monitoring tool GX Configurator TI Temperature input mod
254. mm min 0 01 to 20000000 00 mm min 0 01 to 375000 00 mm min 0 001 to 600000 000 inch min 0 001 to 2000000 000 inch min 0 001 to 37500 000 inch min Speed command range 2 O 0 001 to 600000 000 degree min 0 001 to 2000000 000 degree min 0 001 to 37500 000 degree min 1 to 1000000 pulse s 1 to 1000000 pulse s 1 to 62500 pulse s Machine OPR function OPR method JOG operation O 6 OPR methods O 6 OPR methods f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75P4N Compat Precautions for AD75P1 S3 AD75P2 S3 AD75P3 S3 QD75D1N QD75D2N QD75D4N ibility replacement On QD75PLIN QD75DLIN the manual pulse generator cannot be used by each axis independent When connecting the manual pulse generator for each axis is required use Manual pulse generator 1 generator axis 1 generator module A one axis module function The manual pulse generator itself can use the same one The operation for inputting one pulse differs Set the parameter so that movement amount may be same The starting time 1 5 to 2 0ms Starting time 20ms when other axes are starting O 1 5 to 2 0ms 0 1ms to 0 5ms becomes fast Check the processing timing Automatic trapezoidal Acceleration acceleration deceleration deceleration O processing S pattern acceleration
255. mmand 32 bit signed binary 32 bit signed binary The specification has Speed command 1 to 400 000 pulse s 1 to 4 000 000 pulse s improved Upward compatibility Positioning Acceleration deceleration Automatic trapezoidal acceleration deceleration Automatic trapezoidal acceleration deceleration Automatic acceleration deceleration Acceleration time 2 to 9999 ms Deceleration time 2 to 9999 ms Acceleration time 2 to 9999 ms Deceleration time 2 to 9999 ms In position range 1 to 2047 pulse 1 to 20479 pulse The specification has improved Upward compatibility Backlash compensation Error correction function Speed command output 0 to 10VDC Adjustable to set in the range of 5 to 10VDC 0 to 10VDC Adjustable to set in the range of 5 to 10VDC Open collector 100kpulse s Open collector 200kpulse s The specification has Pul ar TTL 100kpulse s TTL 200kpulse s improved Positioning q y Differential output 100kpulse s Differential output 1Mpulse s Upward compatibility feedback C tabl so ae MD Open collector TTL or differential output Open collector TTL or differential output pulse input encoder type Multiplica tion The number of input feedback pulses can The number of input feedback pulses can setting be multiplied by 4 2 1 or 1 2 be multiplied by 4 2 1 or 1 2 The setting method is changed from a hardware
256. mocouples and thermocouple compliance standards differ refer to Section 4 2 1 2 to Refer to Section 4 2 1 2 A OB check the specifications and use the thermocouple that can be used with the Q64TD As they depend on the applicable Refer to Section 4 2 1 2 A thermocouple and measured temperature range refer to Section o 4 2 1 2 to check the specifications 40ms channel O isolated area Isolation Dielectric withstand Insulation method voltage resistance re tee Transformer 500VDC 100M Q p isolation or more input and earth 1780VrmsAC 3 cycles altitude 2000m rece Transformer 500VDC 10MQ input E isolation or more Between cold junction compensation input Pt100 Non isolation and ground c Consider replacement with multiple channels module x Q64TD 16 points The number occupied I O points I O assignment intelligent 16 points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block x 2 x Bi DT Wiring change is required 1 25 3 R1 25 3 Sleeved solderless terminal cannot be used 0 50A 0 25kg 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 Applicable thermocouple and measured temperature range accuracy A616TD Measurement range number t eee Allowable input voltage 0 to 100 range mV Measured temperature 100 to 1500 100 to 1800 100 to 1800 100 to 1800 B B Pt
257. module switch setting D A conversion enable disable function Specifies whether to enable or disable the D A conversion D A output enable disable function Specifies whether to output the D A conversion value or the offset value The Q62DAN specifies whether to enable or disable output for each channel Synchronous output function Obtains analog output synchronized with the programmable controller CPU Analog output test while the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status Outputs the analog value converted from a digital value when CHO Output enable disable flag is forcibly turned on while the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status Resolution mode Switches the resolution mode according to the application The resolution can be selected from 1 4000 1 12000 or 1 16000 The resolution mode is batch set for all channels Online module replacement 3 39 Replaces a module without stopping the system Replaceable modules during online are the Process CPU and the Redundant CPU 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 6 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A62DA S1 Q62DAN
258. mperature t i t t temperature empera ure empera ure 55 45 C empera ure empera ure drift drift drift drift compensation compensation compensation compensation 0 to 10V iot 0 3 0 4 0 1 odd 48 digits 64 digits 16 digits 10V 0 to 5V Voltage 1 to 5V User ei 10 396 10 496 10 196 581951 412 digits 16 digits 4 digits Oto GENES HIG dig digits 0 3 0 4 0 1 20 36 digits 48 digits 12 digits 4 to Current 20mA User range settings 2 28 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A68AD S2 Maximum conversion speed Max 2 5ms channel Absolute maximum input Voltage 15V Current 30mA Analog input points 8 channels module Maximum number of writes for E PROM Isolation method Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels non isolated Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59N cm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 5VDC Hardware version K or later 0 39A Hardware version J or earlier 0 9A Weight Hardware version K or later
259. mping type straight out type sold separately A6CON4 Soldering type straight out diagonal out type sold separately As the connectors differ wiring change is required The connectors of QD75PLIN Applicable wire size 10136 3000VE 24 to 30 AWG approx 0 05 to 0 2 mm A6CON1 AGCON4 0 3mm 10136 6000EL A6CON2 24 AWG QD75DLIN are sold separately 28 AWG approx 0 08 mm Command pulse output System Differential driver Open collector QD75PLIN Open collector QD75DLIN Differential driver The differential driver and the open collector are separate module In initial condition A AD75PLI S3 outputs with positive logic and QD75PLIN QD75DON outputs with negative logic When connected to open collector When connected to open collector 200kpps 200kpps Max output pulse When connected to differential driver When connected to differential driver 400kpps 4Mpps H When connected to open collector 2m When connected to open collector 2m Max connection distance When connected to differential driver When connected to differential driver O between servos 10m 10m QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75P4N Internal current 0 29A 0 30A 0 36A consumption A 0 7A or less O QD75D1N QD75D2N QD75D4N 5VDC 0 43A 0 45A 0 66A Flash ROM write count Max 100 000 times Max 100 000 times When QD75PON QD75DLIN carries out
260. n 0 to 10V m 0 3 0 4 0 1 48 digits 64 digits 16 digits 10V 0 to 5V Voltage 96 116 5V User 0 3 0 4 0 1 581195 442 digits 16 digits 4 digits 0 to See 416 diale 0 3 0 4 0 1 20mA 36 digits 48 digits 12 digits 4 to Current 20mA User range settings 2 44 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item Maximum conversion speed A68ADN 20ms channel Absolute maximum input Voltage 15V Current 30mA Analog input points 8 channel module Maximum number of writes for E2PROM Isolation method Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels non isolated Dielectric withstand voltage Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Insulation resistance Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 5MQ or more Occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59N cm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 4A Weight 0 51kg 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68ADV Q68ADI Compatibility Precautions for replacem
261. n JOG start Y18 YOA Axis 3 Positioning complete X09 X16 Axis 2 Reverse run JOG start Y19 YOB Axis 4 Positioning complete X17 Axis 3 Forward run JOG start Y1A YOC Axis 1 Error detection X0A X08 Axis 3 Reverse run JOG start Y1B YOD Axis 2 Error detection X0B X09 Axis 4 Forward run JOG start YOE Axis 3 Error detection X0C X0A Axis 4 Reverse run JOG start YOF Axis 4 Error detection X0B Programmable controller READY Y1D YOO Axis 1 M code ON X04 Axis 1 Execution prohibition flag Y14 Axis 2 M code ON X05 Axis 2 Execution prohibition flag Y15 Axis 3 M code ON XOF X06 Axis 3 Execution prohibition flag Y16 Axis 4 M code ON X07 Axis 4 Execution prohibition flag Y17 Synchronization flag X01 X02 X03 Not used to YOF Y01 to YO3 Not used X10 to X1F Y1E to Y1F Y18 to Y1F X18 to X1F The ON OFF statuses for READY different between the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN and AD75PLI S3 NotREADY WDT error QD75PLIN OFF ON QD75DLIN AD75PLI S3 ON OFF T 11 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT J 7 4 4 Buffer memory address comparison For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the Type QD75P QD75D Positioning Module User s Manual area shows the differences between AD75PLI S3 and QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Buffer memory address AD75PLI S3 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Item of AD75PLI S3
262. ndix 4 2 2 Set a user range in high resolution mode 2 Example of sequence program to change a resolution Condition a Resolution of an A series analog I O module 1 8000 b Device that stores a present value read from the analog I O module DO c Device that is used for resolution change operation D100 D101 Two four word data is used in the four arithmetic operations instruction Use unused device areas so that existing device data are not affected by this operation Present value read condition Read the present value of FROMP HO DO ond Channel 1 from the buffer memory P DO K2 D100 Divide the 1 16000 data by two K1 MOVP D100 DO Transfer the divided data to the device App 6 3 Using the scaling function for example in the Q68AD G to change a resolution If the module after replacement for example the Q68AD G supports the scaling function a resolution can be changed using this function Condition a Resolution of an A series analog I O module 1 8000 Only one channel is used b Q series analog I O module Q68AD G Example of sequence program to set the function and read the scaling value Setting request condition B TOP HO K53 K1 K1 TOP HO K62 KO K1 2 TOP HO K8000 K1 FROMP HO Enable the scaling function of Channel 1 Set the scaling lower limit value to 0 Set the scaling upper limit value to 8000 Present value read condi
263. nel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A68RD3N Q64RD G Device Device Device i Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No XO Watchdog timer error flag YO Module READY YO Not used CH1 Offset gain setting CH1 Offset setting X1 READY flag Y1 Y1 status signal request CH2 Offset gain setting X2 Write data error flag Y2 Y2 CH1 Gain setting request status signal x3 CH1 Disconnection CH3 Offset gain setting 2 Offset setting detection flag status signal request CH2 Disconnection CH4 Offset gain setting X4 Y4 Y4 CH2 Gain setting request detection flag status signal CH3 Disconnection CH3 Offset setting X5 M Y5 detection flag request CH4 Disconnection X6 Y6 Not used Y6 CH3 Gain setting request detection flag Not used CH5 Disconnection CHA Offset setting XT Y7 Y7 detection flag request CH6 Disconnection X8 Y8 Y8 CH4 Gain setting request detection flag x9 CH7 Disconnection Y9 Operating condition Y9 Operating condition detection flag setting completion signal setting request CH8 Disconnection Offset gain setting mode XA YA User range write request detection flag status flag XB YB Not used YB Disconnection detection XC YC YC signal Not used XD YD Interlock signal for the Wa
264. ng For each channel A D conversion values are averaged for the set number of times or set amount of time and the average value is output as a digital value Moving average takes the average of the specified number of digital output values measured per sampling time The setting range of average time and count differ Refer to Q68AD G User s Manual and then confirm the specifications Primary delay filter A digital output value is smoothed according to the preset time constant Maximum and minimum values hold function The maximum and minimum values of the digital output values are retained in the module Resolution mode The resolution can be switched according to the application The resolution mode is batch set for all the channels Input signal error detection function The voltage current outside the setting range is detected Warning output function 1 Process alarm A warning is output if a digital output value falls outside the setting range 2 Rate alarm A warning is output if the varying rate of a digital output value falls outside the preset varying rate range Scaling function Conversion of A D conversion values to preset percentage values and loading into the buffer memory is available Programming steps for the scaling can be eliminated Online module change 1 For the A68AD the resolution for voltage is 1 2000 and that for current is 1 1000 fixed
265. nge is required R1 25 3 A solderless terminal with sleeve can not be used x 0 64A 0 64A O 0 19kg 0 19kg O 1 Analog output voltage to the A616AD processing analog input values of the A60MX The I O characteristics and the maximum resolution are to be the same as in the specifications of the A616AD as below Analog input range Maximum resolution Digital output value 0 to 10 2 5mV 1 4000 0 to 5 1 25mV 1 4000 0 to 4000 Voltage V 1 to 5 1 0mV 1 4000 2000 to 2000 10 to 10 5 0mV 1 4000 5 to 5 2 5mV 1 4000 0 to 2000 0 to 20 10pA 1 2000 2000 to 0 0 to 20 5uA 1 4000 0 to 4000 4 to 20 4uA 1 4000 2000 to 2000 Current mA 1000 to 3000 20 to 20 20pA 1 2000 1000 to 1000 0 to 4000 20 to 20 10pA 1 4000 2000 to 2000 5 4 5 MULTIPLEXER REPLACEMENT 5 2 A60MXRN As regarding AGOMXRN non isolated multiplexer module consider replacement using multiple Q64AD GH 5 2 1 Performance comparison Item A60MXRN Voltage 10 to 0 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ Analog input Current 20 to 0 to 20mADC Input resistance value 250Q Analog output voltage 10 to 0 to 10VDC I O characteristics Analog input range Analog output voltage V Voltage V Current mA 0 to 10 0 to 20 Oto 5 0 to 20 1to 5 4 to 20 0 to 10 10 to 10 20 to 20 5to 5 20 to 20
266. nt No 2 selection start command XF Fuse broken detection flag CH2 Coincidence signal No 2 reset command 6 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 6 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the High Speed Counter Module User s Manual QD62 H02 Address Address Read write Dec Read write Dec 1 33 value write Lower and middle 32 0 Preset value setting R W 2 34 Preset value write Upper 1 33 H 3 35 Mode register R W 2 34 L Present value R 4 36 Present value read Lower and middle R 3 35 H 5 37 Present value read Uppe 4 36 L i 205 Upper Coincidence output point set No 1 L 6 38 Set value read write Lower and middle RM 5 37 H RIW T 39 Set value read write U 6 38 L 7 write Upper Coincidence output point set No 2 L Address in parentheses in the above table indicates the upper 8 bits if 39 H of 24 bit data 8 40 Overflow detection flag R 9 41 Counter function selection setting RW 10 42 Sampling periodic setting 11 43 Sampling periodic counter flag 12 44 L Latch count value 13 45 H 14 46 A L Sampling count value 15 47
267. nter Error counter value 2 xod e value is and indicates OFF when the deviation counter value is PC READY PC RDY Check the on off status of an output signal Y2D with a device monitor Can be checked with an input signal X12 Zero return request ZERO The contents indicated with ZERO of the AD70 differ from the ones indicated with ZERO of the QD73A1 Excessive error EEX Can be checked with an input signal X17 WDT error WDT ERR Can be checked with an input signal X10 During velocity operation V MODE Can be checked with an input signal X2D 3 The I O signals shown in the table are the ones when the QD73A1 is mounted on the slots 0 1 of a main base unit Note that XY addresses of the QD73A1 are different from the ones of the AD70 because the number of occupied slots differs between the modules as shown below AD70 QD73A1 T 2 5 o S og of 2 QD73A1 5 5 BER E lt E T 48 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 6 3 I O signals comparison to CPU module An addition or change of a sequence program is required because the I O signals partly differ between the modules For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the MELSEC Q QD73A1 Positioning Module User s Manual Input X Output Y Signal name QD73A1 Signal name Unused AUD Unused yoo The
268. o 13500 1 33uA Expanded mode i M Users range setting 4000 to 4000 1 37 12000 12000 1 33pA 0 1 Normal resolution mode 4 digits High resolution mode 0 to 10V 10 to 10V 16 digits High resolution mode Other than the above ranges 12 digits Temperature coefficient 71 4ppm C 0 00714 C 2 52 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A68ADN Maximum conversion speed 20ms channel Response time Absolute maximum input Voltage 15V Current 30mA Analog input points 8 channels module Maximum number of writes for E2PROM Isolation method Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels non isolated Dielectric withstand voltage Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Insulation resistance Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 5MQ or more Occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59N cm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 4A Weight 0 51kg 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible
269. o 400 0 to 800 0 to 1200 range C J J Fe CuNi Accuracy at 25 C 0 4 0 3 0 3 0 4 Temperature drift C 0 011 0 01 0 01 0 011 Measured temperature 200 to 200 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 range C T T Cu CuNi Accuracy at 25 C 0 5 0 3 Temperature drift C 0 013 0 01 Measured temperature 100 to 200 0 to 400 0 to 800 0 to 900 range C Fe CuNi Accuracy at 25 C 96 0 3 0 3 0 5 Temperature drift 0 01 0 01 0 013 Measured temperature 100 to 200 0 to 400 0 to 600 0 to 600 range C Cu CuNi Accuracy at 25 C 0 3 0 4 Temperature drift C 0 01 0 011 4 16 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68TD G H02 Q68TD G H01 maximum minimum value of the measured temperature range Applicable Conversion accuracy Temperature characteristics Maximum temperature Measured temperature thermocouple 4 at operating ambient per operating ambient error at ambient type range temperature 25 5 temperature variation of 1 C temperature of 55 C Oto600 C a n DE 3 600 to 800 C 2 3 0 C 13 0 C B 0 4 800 to 1700 C 2 2 5 12 5 1700 to1820 C nin e 3 50t00 C EE 3 R 0 to 300 C 2 2 5 0 4 12 5 300 to 1600 2 2 0 C 0 3 9 5 C 1600 to1760 C ff a 5
270. og Digital Converter Module User s Manual A68AD Q68ADVII Address Address Name Read write Name Read write Dec Dec 0 Number of channels 0 A D conversion enable disable 1 Averaging processing specification 1 CH1 Time count averaging setting 2 CH1 Averaging time count 2 CH2 Time count averaging setting 3 CH2 Averaging time count 3 CH3 Time count averaging setting 4 CH3 Averaging time count RIW 4 CH4 Time count averaging setting RW 5 CH4 Averaging time count 5 CH5 Time count averaging setting 6 CH5 Averaging time count 6 CH6 Time count averaging setting 7 CH6 Averaging time count 7 CH7 Time count averaging setting 8 CH7 Averaging time count 8 CH8 Time count averaging setting 9 CH8 Averaging time count 9 Averaging processing specification 10 CH1 Digital output value 10 A D conversion completed flag 11 CH2 Digital output value 11 CH1 Digital output value 12 CH3 Digital output value 12 CH2 Digital output value 13 CHA Digital output value R 13 CH3 Digital output value 14 CH5 Digital output value 14 CH4 Digital output value 15 CH6 Digital output value 15 CH5 Digital output value R 16 CH7 Digital output value 16 CH6 Digital output value 17 CH8 Digital output value 17 CH7 Digital output value 18 18 CH8 Digital output value 19 19 Error code 20 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4
271. oint No 2 B06 E AC20TB A phase pulse input 24V A13 17 phase pulse input 12V B13 7 AC50TB AC80TB A phase pulse input 5V A12 18 AC100TB ABCOM B12 phase pulse input 24 11 19 Connector terminal block converter module B phase pulse input 12V B11 9 AGTBXY36 B phase pulse input 5V A10 1A d Presetinput 24V B10 A d ex reset input 5 CTRLCOM A08 1C Function start 24V B08 C Function start 12V A07 1D Function start 5V B07 D EQU coincidence output point No 1 A05 1F EQU coincidence output point No 2 B05 F 12 24V 24V An OV A01 OV 6 3 6 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 6 2 AD61 6 2 1 Performance comparison O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible QD62 H01 Precautions for replacement 32 points 16 points Occupied I O points I O assignment special 32 I O assignment intelligent 16 points points Number of channels 2 channels Counting speed switch settings 50KPPS pele at the intelligent function module switch setting Phase 1 phase input 2 phase input Count input ea 5VDC nal leve signal ig 12VDC 2to5mA B 24VDC Counting 1 phase input 50KPPS 1 phase input 50KPPS 2 speed Max 2 phase input 50KPPS 2 phase input 50KPPS On QD62 H01 as the value is Counting 24 bit unsigned binary 32 bit signed binary used with 32 bit signed binary range 0 to
272. ommand X18 Y18 CH2 Preset command x19 Y19 CH2 Coincidence signal output enable command X1A Y1A CH2 Down count command X1B Y1B CH2 Count enable Y1C CH2 Present value read request x1D Y1D CH2 preset detection reset command X1E Y1E 6 12 Not used Device Signal name Device Signal name No 9 No g Module READY Yo CH1 Coincidence signal No 1 reset command x1 EM Counter value large Y1 CH1 Preset command Point No 1 x2 CH1 Counter value Y2 CH1 Coincidence signal coincidence Point No 1 enable command X3 cH Counter value small Y3 CH1 Down count command Point No 1 CH1 Ext t t x4 Sia preset teu Y4 CH1 Count enable command detection x5 CH1 Counter value large y5 CH1 External preset Point No 2 detection reset command x6 CH1 Counter value Y6 CH1 Counter function coincidence Point No 2 selection start command x7 CH1 Counter value small Y7 CH1 Coincidence signal Point No 2 No 2 reset command X8 CH2 Counter value large Ys CH2 Coincidence signal Point No 1 No 1 reset command Cue Counter valle Y9 CH2 Preset command coincidence Point No 1 XA CH2 Counter value small YA CH2 Coincidence signal Point No 1 enable command XB nin External presetrequest YB CH2 Down count command detection CH2 Count lue XC A dd YC CH2 Count enable command Point No 2 xD CH2 Counter value YD CH2 External preset coincidence Point No 2 detection reset command XE CH2 Counter value small YE CH2 Counter function Poi
273. omparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A616DAI Q68DAIN Device Device Device Device i Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No No XO Watchdog timer error flag YO XO Module READY YO Not used D A conversion READY CH1 Output enable X1 Y1 X1 Y1 flag disable flag CH2 Output enable X2 flag Y2 X2 Y2 disable flag CH3 Output enable X3 Y3 X3 Y3 disable flag CH4 Output enable X4 Y4 X4 Not used Y4 disable flag CH5 Output enable X5 Y5 X5 Y5 disable flag CH6 Output enable X6 Y6 X6 Y6 Not used disable flag CH7 Output enable XT YT XT YT disable flag High resolution mode CH8 Output enable X8 Y8 X8 Y8 status flag disable flag Operating condition Operating condition x9 Y9 X9 Y9 setting completion flag setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA XA YA User range write request status flag Channel change XB YB XB YB Channel change request completion flag Not used Setting value change Setting value change XC YC XC YC completion flag request Synchronous output Synchronous output XD YD XD YD RFRP RTOP instruction mode flag request XE YE
274. on T 25 1 Step stopped is changed to Stopped and Step error occurring is changed to Error occurring in the axis operations status parameters 2 The restart command for step start information 02H is deleted 3 The step operation is restarted with the restart command 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Changed functions Change description The command in position width is expanded Command in position function AD75MLI 1 to 32767000 QD75MLI 1 to 2147483647 Positioning start No 7004 to 7010 block start designation and 8000 to 8049 indirect designation are deleted With QD75MLI number of blocks has been change to 5 7000 to 7004 Block start data With the AD75MLI this data is called Positioning start information The configuration of start information and start No is changed so that the start No be directly Start history checked AD75MLI QD75MLI Detailed parameters 0 Software stroke limits invalid for Software stroke limits valid for IPr 15 Software stroke limit valid Factory setting manual operation manual operation invalid setting 4 Software stroke limits valid for Software stroke limits invalid for manual operation manual operation T 26 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 5 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of th
275. onductor type CH1 Factory default L 161 offset value H 162 3 conductor type CH1 Factory default L 163 gain value H 164 3 conductor type CH1 User range L 165 settings offset value H 166 3 conductor type CH1 User range L 167 settings gain value H 168 3 conductor type CH1 User range L 169 settings offset resistance value R W 170 3 conductor type CH1 User range L 171 settings gain resistance value 172 4 conductor type CH1 Factory default L 173 offset value H 174 4 conductor type CH1 Factory default L 175 gain value H 176 4 conductor type CH1 User range L 177 settings offset value H 178 4 conductor type CH1 User range L 179 settings gain value H 180 4 conductor type CH1 User range L 181 settings offset resistance value 182 4 conductor type CH1 User range L 183 settings gain resistance value H to 254 4 conductor type CH4 User range L RIW 255 settings gain resistance value H 4 69 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 5 MULTIPLEXER REPLACEMENT MULTIPLEXER REPLACEMENT The multiplexer module is designed especially for channel extension of the analog digital converter module A616AD Analog input signals voltage current taken by the multiplexer module are output as analog output signals voltage to the A616AD For this reason the I O characteristics and the maximum resolution of the multiplexer module are adjuste
276. onversion Error correction function O O the offset gain setting of the value Q68RD3 G 5 Replaceable modules during Replaces a module without stopping the Online module replacement O online are the Process CPU and system the Redundant CPU 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 6 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A68RD3N Q68RD3 G Device Device Device Device i Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No No XO Watchdog timer error flag YO XO Module READY YO X1 READY flag Y1 x1 Y1 X2 Write data error flag Y2 X2 Y2 CH1 Disconnection X3 X3 Y3 detection flag CH2 Disconnection 4 Y4 4 Y4 detection flag CH3 Disconnection Not used X5 Y5 x5 Not used Y5 detection flag CH4 Disconnection X6 Y6 X6 Y6 detection flag CH5 Disconnection Not used XT YT XT YT detection flag CH6 Disconnection X8 Y8 8 Y8 detection flag CH7 Disconnection Operating condition Operating condition X9 Y9 X9 Y9 detection flag setting completion flag setting request CH8 Disconnection Offs
277. onversion per channel Disconnection detection function Detects a disconnection of the connected thermocouple of each channel On Q64TD the channel set conversion enable automatically performs the disconnection detection Temperature conversion value storage Stores imported temperature data in the buffer memory Input type selection function Sets an input type for each channel For the Q64TD this function is set with the intelligent function module switch setting Warning output function Outputs a warning when the temperature exceeds the set temperature range Temperature conversion system Processes the detected temperature by specified method Scaling function Converts a measured temperature value into a percent value in set width Pt100 cold junction compensation enable disable setting function Sets whether the cold junction compensation using the Pt100 attached to the terminal is performed or not Offset gain setting function Performs linear correction by individually compensating any given 2 points offset value gain value within the effective range Error correction function For all input ranges the function allows compensating the temperature measurement value by part of the compensation value the errors compensation value Perform the error correction by the offset gain setting of the Q64TD Online module replacement Replaces a module wi
278. or monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident A 1 Design Precautions n an output module when a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a load short circuit flows for a long time it may cause smoke and fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit such as a fuse Configure a circuit so that the programmable controller is turned on first and then the external power supply If the external power supply is turned on first an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or malfunction For the operating status of each station after a communication failure refer to relevant manuals for each network Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction When changing data of the running programmable controller from a peripheral connected to the CPU module or from a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module or special function module configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely For program modification and operating status change read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety before operation Especially when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock cir
279. ower limit value 87 CH1 Process alarm lower upper limit value 88 CH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value 89 CH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value to 114 CH8 Process alarm lower lower limit value 115 CH8 Process alarm lower upper limit value 116 CH8 Process alarm upper lower limit value 117 CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value R W 118 CH1 Rate alarm warning detection period to 125 CH8 Rate alarm warning detection period 126 CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value 127 CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value to 140 CH8 Rate alarm upper limit value 141 CH8 Rate alarm lower limit value CH1 Input signal error detection setting 142 value CH1 Input signal error detection lower limit setting value to 150 CH1 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value to 158 I Mode switching setting R W 159 to 200 Save data classification setting R W 201 System area Not used 202 CH1 Factory default offset value 203 CH1 Factory default gain value to R W 232 CH8 Factory default offset value 233 CH8 Factory default gain value 2 58 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT _3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 1 List of Analog Output Module Alternative Models for Replacement Transition to Q series Production discontinuation Product Model Model Remarks Restrictions 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Changed 2 modules are required AG16DAI Q68DAIN 3 Program The number of occupi
280. parison rissies erede te eek aia qnn en dean hee ee XR 4 3 4 2 2 Functional comparison sssssssssssssssssese eene enn enhn nennen ener nennen annes 4 7 4 2 3 signal comparison to programmable controller CPU 4 8 4 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison cccccccaacccsecacosoooaaocaanassnnoaaesenaaaasasnnaaasenananaaena 4 9 4 3 A616TD Replacement to the Q68TD G H02 Q68TD G H01 4 13 4 3 1 Performance comparison 4 13 4 3 2 FUNCTIONAL comparison 2 22 i tentata e TURN 4 18 4 3 3 1 O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU _ 4 19 4 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison sse meer enn 4 20 4 4 A68RD3N Replacement to the Q64RD 4 23 4 4 1 Performance comparison ae RR SA C eens 4 23 4 4 2 Functional compariSONn E 4 27 443 signal comparison to programmable controller CPU seen 4 28 444 Buffer memory address comparison sssssssssssseeeeeen
281. part of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions NWARNING Shut off the external power supply all phases used the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock or damage to the product After wiring attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock NCAUTION Individually ground the FG and LG terminals of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 1000 or less Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range If any spade solderless terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring to the module and connect the cables correctly Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure Connectors for external devices must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the manufacturer or must be correctly soldered Incomplete connections may cause short circuit fire or malfunction Tighten the terminal screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause short circuit fire or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit o
282. per limit check code CH1 Lower limit check code CH2 Upper limit check code Oo NN 3 41 CH2 Lower limit check code Read write R W Address decimal D A conversion enable disable Read write CH1 Digital value R W CH2 Digital value System area Not used CH1 Setting value check code CH2 Setting value check code System area Not used Error code Setting range CH1 to CH2 System area Not used Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Offset gain setting mode Gain specification R W Offset gain adjusted value specification System area Not used Mode switching setting R W System area Not used Pass data classification setting R W System area Not used CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value R W CH1 User range settings offset value CH1 User range settings gain value CH2 User range settings offset value CH2 User range settings gain value 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 42 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 7 A62DA S1 Replacement to the Q64DAN 3 7 1 Performance comparison Item A62DA S1 Digital input 0 to 4000 Analog output Voltage 0 to 10VDC External load r
283. perature 350to400 C 3S LEE 3 270to 200 C MS 3 6 Larger value of 0 5 C or Larger value of 0 06 C or 200 to 0 C lt 11 0 N 0 5 of measured temperature 0 2 of measured temperature Larger value of 0 5 C or Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 to 1250 C 9 375 0 25 of measured temperature 0 02 of measured temperature 1250to1300 C 3 1 If a value entered from the thermocouple is outside the measured temperature range given in the table it is handled as the 2 The accuracy only in the temperature ranges of Class 1 to 3 shaded areas in JIS C1602 1995 apply Also a warm up power distribution period of 30 minutes is required to satisfy with the accuracy T3 A temperature can be measured however the accuracy is not guaranteed 4 17 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 3 2 Functional comparison Available A Partial change required Not available Q68TD G Precautions for replacement H02 H01 Description A616TD Temperature conversion function Imports temperature data Conversion enable disable function Sets whether to enable disable a conversion per channel Disconnection detection function Detects a disconnection of the connected thermocouple of each channel The Q68TD G H01 does not have the disconnection detection function Use the disconnection monitor function instead Temperatu
284. perature value L 32 33 32bit H 33 System area Not used 34 Write data error code R W 34 35 Conversion completion flag R 35 36 Specification of platinum RTD type R W 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Warning output enable disable setting R W 4 57 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64RD Address Read write decimal 48 Warning output flag 49 Disconnection detection flag 50 CH1 Scaling value 51 CH2 Scaling value 52 CH3 Scaling value 53 CH4 Scaling value 54 CH1 Measured temperature value L R 55 32bit H 56 CH2 Measured temperature value L 57 32bit H 58 CH3 Measured temperature value L 59 32bit H 60 CH4 Measured temperature value L 61 32bit H 62 CH1 Scaling range lower limit value L 63 H 64 CH1 Scaling range upper limit value L 65 H 66 CH2 Scaling range lower limit value L 67 H 68 CH2 Scaling range upper limit value L 69 H 70 CH3 Scaling range lower limit value L 71 H 72 CH3 Scaling range upper limit value L 73 H 74 CH4 Scaling range lower limit value L 75 H 76 CH4 Scaling range upper limit value L 77 H 78 CH1 Scaling width lower limit value EY 79 CH1 Scaling width upper limit value 80 CH2 Scaling width lower limit value 81 CH2 Scaling width upper limit value 82 CH3 Scaling width lower limit value 83 CH3 Scaling widt
285. put value 0 6 120pA When ambient temperature is 25 C 0 3 60 Sampling period 1 5 0 5 x D A number of conversion enabled channels ms Conversion time 0 5ms Time required for conversion from 0 to 20mA 20mA to Absolute maximum output No of analog output channels 16 channels module Number of writes to EPROM Output short protection 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68DAIN Compatibility Precautions for replacement 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 O High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 0 to 20mADC O External load resistance value 0O to 6000 Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Analog output NU _ rande Digital input Maximum Digital input Maximum O 9 value resolution value resolution 0 to 20mA 5uA 1 66uA 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 4 to 20mA 4uA 1 33uA U 4000 t 12000 t ser range o o settings 4000 Tras 12000 Ambient temperature 25 5 within 0 1 20pA Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C within 0 3 60 80us channel 21mA O Consider replacement with multiple 8 channels module A Q68DAIN Max 100 000 times O Available 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A616DAI Between the output terminal and programmable con
286. r Model Code 1 MELSEC A QnA Large AnS QnAS Small Transition Examples L NA 08121E 4 Others No Manual Name TECHNICAL BULLETIN Manual Number Model Code 1 Procedures for Replacing Positioning Module AD71 with QD75 FA A 0060 Precautions for replacing A QnA large type series CPU with Universal FA A 0068 model QCPU App Appendix 3 2 A QnA series No Manual name Manual number Model code 1 MELSEC QnA A Catalog L 174 0 C5177 2 MELSEC QnAS AnS Catalog L 174 0 C5266 3 Analog Digital Converter Module Type A68AD User s Manual IB 64572 130305 4 Analog Digital Converter Module Type A68AD S2 User s Manual IB 68102 130349 5 Analog Digital Converter Module Type A68ADN User s Manual 1B 68219 13JA33 6 Analog Digital Converter Module Type A616AD User s Manual 1B 68078 130361 7 Digital Analog Converter Module Type A62DA User s Manual IB 64573 13J306 8 Digital Analog Converter Module Type A62DA S1 User s Manual 1B 68074 139350 Digital Analog Converter Module Type A68DAV A68DAI S1 User s 9 IB 68273 13JA35 Manual 10 Digital Analog Converter Module Type A616DAV User s Manual 1B 68079 139362 11 Digital Analog Converter Module Type A616DAI User s Manual 1B 68080 13J363 12 Pt100 Input Module Type A68RD3N AN A1S62RD3N 4N User s Manual SH 080190 13JT69 13 Temperature Digital Converter Module Type A616TD User s Manual 1B 68104 130368 14 High Speed Counter Module
287. r manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd 1 One slot type can be mounted on the Q series large type base unit MELSEC A QnA MELSEC Q Product Conversion adaptor series module series module SADI Q68ADV ERNT AQT68AD Analog input module A68AD S2 Q68ADI Q68ADV A68ADN Q68ADI ERNT AQT68ADN 2 Two slot type cannot be mounted on the Q series large type base unit MELSEC A QnA Product series module A68AD A68AD S2 Analog input module A68ADN MELSEC Q series module Q64AD GH x2 modules Conversion adaptor ERNT AQT68AD GH A616AD in voltage input Q68ADV x2 modules ERNT AQT616AD A616AD in current input 4 Q68ADI x2 modules Replacement for the existing A series modules large size in the mixed use of voltage and current For the single use of voltage or current replacing with a conversion adapter of one slot type is possible For MELSEC A QnA large type Series to Q Series transition related products manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd or Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd contact your local sales office or representative 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 2 A616AD 2 2 1 Performance comparison Item A616AD Voltage 10 to 0 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ Analog input Current 20 to 0 to 20mADC Input resistance value 2500
288. r minute 460 Md 6 Clock data second 100 ms 461 Pointer number 0 to 15 Md 7 Start axis 462 to 537 1212 to 1287 QD75MO Md 3 Start information Md 8 Operation type 463 to 538 1213 to 1288 QD75MO Md 4 Start No gt o Md 9 Start Hour minute 2 464 to 539 1214 to 1289 0075 0 Md 5 Start Hour 8 Md 10 Start Second 100 ms 465 to 540 1215 to 1290 QD75MLI Md 6 Start Minute second Md 11 Error judgment 466 to 541 1216 to 1291 Md 12 Start history pointer 542 1292 Pointer number 0 to 15 e Md 13 Start axis 543 618 O Md 14 Operation type D 544 to 619 Md 15 Start Hour minute 3 545 to 620 gt Md 16 Start Second 100 ms 2 546 to 621 Md 17 Error judgment 547 to 622 2 Md 18 Start history pointer at error 623 Pointer number 0 to 15 Md 19 Axis in which the error occurred 624 to 684 1293 to 1353 Md 20 Axis error No 625 to 685 1294 to 1354 Md 21 Axis error occurrence Hour minute u 626 to 686 1295 to 1355 QD75MLI Md 11 Axis error occurrence Hour o Md 22 Axis error occurrence Second 100 ms uw QD75ML Md 12 Axis error occurrence 627 to 687 1296 to 1356 Minutes second Md 23 Error history pointer 688 1357 7 32 f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of AD75MO AD75MO QD75MLI Common for axis 1 2 3 Common for axis 1 2 3 4
289. r 1780VrmsAC 3 cycles 10MQ or controller isolation altitude 2000m more using power supply 500VDC insulation Between platinum resistance RTD input and Non isolation tester channel Detected per channel O 16 points The number of occupied I O points I O assignment intelligent 16 points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm i Wiring change is required 1 25 3 R1 25 3 Sleeved solderless terminal cannot be used 4 24 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item Cables between module and platinum RTD A68RD3N Make sure that the conductor resistance value between the Pt100 and A68RD3N is 100 or less per conductor All channels become the same specifications 10Q or less Conductor A68RD3N A Lay wiring so that the following conditions are met Pt100 2 1 Conductor resistance value lt 10 Q 2 Conductor resistance value 10 Q 3 Conductor resistance value S 10 Q b 3 SLD Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 94A Weight 0 43kg 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64RD Compatibility Precautions for replacement The conductor resistance value must meet the condition of 1 2 lt 2kQ or less In the case of 3 conductor type the difference between 1 and 2 in the conductor
290. r READY signal YO turns from OFF to ON Detailed parameters IPr 15 Software stroke limit valid invalid setting AD75PLI S3 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN 0 Software stroke limits invalid for Software stroke limits valid for Factory setting manual operation manual operation Software stroke limits valid for Software stroke limits invalid for 1 manual operation manual operation f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 4 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the Type QD75P QD75D Positioning Module User s Manual Input X Output Y QD75PLIN QD75PON Signal name AD75PLI S3 Signal name AD75PLI S3 QD75DON QD75DON QD75 AD75 READY X00 X00 Axis 1 Positioning start Y10 Y10 Axis 1 Start complete X01 X10 Axis 2 Positioning start Y11 Y11 Axis 2 Start complete X02 X11 Axis 3 Positioning start Y12 Y12 Axis 3 Start complete X03 X12 Axis 4 Positioning start Y13 Axis 4 Start complete X13 Axis 1 Stop Y13 Y04 Axis 1 BUSY X04 X0C Axis 2 Stop Y14 YO5 Axis 2 BUSY X05 Axis 3 Stop Y1C YO6 Axis 3 BUSY X06 Axis 4 Stop YO7 Axis 4 BUSY XOF Axis 1 Forward run JOG start Y16 YO8 Axis 1 Positioning complete X07 X14 Axis 1 Reverse run JOG start Y17 Y09 Axis 2 Positioning complete X08 X15 Axis 2 Forward ru
291. r malfunction Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Mitsubishi programmable controllers must be installed in control panels Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay terminal block Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock For wiring methods refer to the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Startup and Maintenance Precautions WARNING Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit or solder the battery or throw it into the fire Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat explode or ignite resulting in injury and fire Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock Undertightening the terminal screws can caus
292. range settings offset value 225 CH4 User range settings gain value 226 CH5 User range settings offset value 227 CH5 User range settings gain value 228 CH6 User range settings offset value 229 CH6 User range settings gain value 230 CH7 User range settings offset value 231 CH7 User range settings gain value 232 CH8 User range settings offset value 233 CH8 User range settings gain value 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 6 A68AD S2 Upgrade to Q68AD G 2 6 1 Performance comparison Item A68AD S2 Voltage 10 to O to 10VDC Analog input Input resistance value Hardware version K or later 1MQ Hardware version J or earlier 30kQ Current 4 to 20mADC Input resistance value 2500 Usable current input 20 to 0 to 20mA Digital output 16 bit signed binary 2048 to 2047 Analog input Digital output 10V 2000 I O characteristics 5V or 20 1000 OV or 4 0 5V or 12mA 1000 10V 2000 Maximum resolution Voltage 5mV 1 2000 Current 20pA 1 1000 Overall accuracy Accuracy in respect to maximum digital output value N 35 Within 1 20 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68AD G Compatibility Precautions for replacement 10 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ or more 0
293. re conversion value storage Stores imported temperature data in the buffer memory Input type selection function Sets an input type for each channel For the Q68TD G H02 H01 this function is set with the intelligent function module switch setting Warning output function Outputs a warning when the temperature exceeds the set temperature range Temperature conversion system Processes the detected temperature by specified method Scaling function Converts a measured temperature value into a percent value 96 in set width Pt100 cold junction compensation enable disable setting function Sets whether the cold junction compensation using the Pt100 attached to the terminal is performed or not Offset gain setting function Performs linear correction by individually compensating any given 2 points offset value gain value within the effective range Error correction function For all input ranges the function allows compensating the temperature measurement value by part of the compensation value the errors compensation value Perform the error correction by the offset gain setting of the Q68TD G H02 H01 Online module replacement Replaces a module without stopping the system Replaceable modules during online are the Process CPU and the Redundant CPU 4 18 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 3 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller C
294. rent value met Upper lower limit signal A Input resistance 4 7kQ gt 6 8kQ satisfied values OFF current 1 5mA 1 0mA Check whether the OFF current value met Stop signal A m Input resistance 4 7kQ gt 6 8kQ satisfied values OFF current 1 5mA 1 0mA Check whether the OFF current value met Near point dog signal Input resistance 4 7kQ gt 6 8kQ A Input satisfied values Response time 4ms 1ms OFF current 1 5 1 0 Speed position switching signal Input resistance 4 7k0 6 8kO A Check whether the OFF current value met satisfied values Response time 4ms 1ms ON current 3 5mA 1 0mA Manual pulse generator Input resistance 1 5 1 2 a The column of interface specifications differences is described as the form Specifications of AD75MLI gt Specifications of 9075 0 2 Comparison of connector signal sequence When using with QD75MLI change the connector and wiring AD75MO QD75MLI Logic Logic switching by Logic Logic switching by Initial setting parameter Initial setting parameter Manual pulse generator A phase Negative logic Negative logic 4 Not allowed Allowed Manual pulse generator B phase multiple of 4 multiple of 4 Near Point signal Negative logic Not allowed Negative logic Allowed Stop signal Negative logic Not allowed Negative logic Allowed Upper limit Negative logic Not allowed Negative logic
295. reset counter ring counter function D Minimum is g count pulse 1004s 1424s width set input N rise time to 5005 5005 71 5 7105 S 5us or less 1 phase input 2 phase input Duty ratio 50 8 Magnitude Comparison lt MERITE pan 24 bit unsigned binary 32 bit signed binary g comparison range between Set value count value CPU and Comparison Set value count value AD61 QD62 result Set value gt count value H02 12 24VDC 3 6mA Preset 5 12 24 VDC 2 to 5mA 5VDC 5mA On QD62 H02 as the external External Count 12 24 VDC 3 6mA input specifications differ input disable 5VDC 5mA confirm the external devices Function specifications 5 12 24 VDC 2 to 5mA start Transistor sink type output 2 EA Transistor open collector External Coincidence output points channel utpu output output 12 24VDC 0 5A point ios a 12 24VDC 0 5A pot 2A common Int t ti nternal current consumption 0 3A 0 3A 5VDC Weight 0 5kg 0 11kg 6 9 6 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 1 numbers of the modules mounted to the right of the QD62 H02 change because the number of I O occupied points for the AD61S1 are different from the QD62 H02 Set the start I O number for the module mounted to the right of the QD62 H02 to the same number for the module before the replacement in the I O assignment tab of the parameter setting window The program for the module before t
296. rning output signal YD RFRP and RTOP Conversion completion XE ve ME instructions when the flag A68RD3N is used in XF YF Error flag YF Error clear request remote I O station X10 Y10 F Not used X11 Y11 X12 Not used Y12 Error code reset flag X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A Not used X1B Y1B X1C X1D_ Interlock signal for the Y1D X1E RFRP RTOP VANE instructions when the X1F A68RD3N is used in Y1F remote I O station 4 38 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 5 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A68RD3N Q64RD G Read write Read write decimal decimal 0 Conversion enable disable specification 0 Conversion enable disable setting 1 Averaging processing selection 1 CH1 Time count moving averaging setting 2 CH1 Averaging time count 2 CH2 Time count moving averaging setting R W 3 CH2 Averaging time count 3 CH3 Time count moving averaging setting 4 CH3 Averaging time count RIW 4 CH4 Time count moving averaging setting 5 CH4 Averaging time count 5 6 CH5 Averaging time count _ to System area Not u
297. s When the software stroke limit is applied to the current feed value with Pr 14 and the current feed value is updated with Pr 21 When the software stroke limit is applied to the machine feed value 3 If an attempt is made to change the current value but the designated address is out of the software stroke limit range the attempt is considered as an error and the current value is not changed 4 Error code change AD75MO There are 3 types of errors for each upper and lower stroke limit error code 509 to 512 QD75MO Errors for the software stroke upper limit are integrated in to error code 507 Errors for the lower limit are integrated in to error code 508 Error codes 509 to 512 are deleted Current value changing M code function 1 An error occurs when the designated new current value is out of the software stroke limit range 2 The M code setting value is valid during the positioning data current value changing instruction Acceleration deceleration speed control Only two word type 1 to 8388608ms can be used as the setting value for the acceleration deceleration time Stop process and restart after stop positioning operation stop 1 Peripheral side emergency stop is deleted from the stop causes of Stop group 2 sudden stop selection Test mode fault in the stop causes of Stop group 3 sudden stop selection is changed to be in the stop causes of Stop group 2 sudden stop s
298. sed 7 CH6 Averaging time count 8 CH7 Averaging time count 8 9 CH8 Averaging time count 9 Averaging processing selection R W 10 CH1 Detected temperature value 16bit 10 Conversion completion flag 11 CH2 Detected temperature value 16bit 11 CH1 Measured temperature value 16bit 12 CH3 Detected temperature value 16bit 12 CH2 Measured temperature value 16bit R 13 CH4 Detected temperature value 16bit 13 CH3 Measured temperature value 16bit 14 CH5 Detected temperature value 16bit 14 CH4 Measured temperature value 16bit 15 CH6 Detected temperature value 16bit 15 16 CH7 Detected temperature value 16bit Systemarea Not sed _ 17 CH8 Detected temperature value 16bit 18 CH1 Detected temperature value L 18 19 32bit H 19 Error code 20 CH2 Detected temperature value L 20 Setting range 1 R 21 32bit H 21 Setting range 2 22 CH3 Detected temperature value L R 22 23 32bit H 23 24 CH4 Detected temperature value L 24 25 32bit H 25 26 CH5 Detected temperature value L 26 27 32bit H 27 28 CH6 Detected temperature value L 28 29 32bit H 29 30 CH7 Detected temperature value L 30 31 32bit H 31 32 CH8 Detected temperature value L 32 33 32bit H 33 34 Write data error code R W 34 System area Not used 35 Conversion completion flag R 35 36 Specification of platinum RTD type R W 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Warning output enable disable setting R W 4 39 4 TEMPERATURE INP
299. setting request Operating condition Operating condition X9 Y9 Y9 setting completion signal setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA YA User range write request status flag XB YB Not used YB Disconnection detection XC YC k YC signal Not used XD YD Interlock signal for the Warning output signal YD Not used RFRP and RTOP Conversion completion XE ve YE instructions when the flag A68RDAN is used in XF YF Error flag YF Error clear request remote I O station X10 Y10 Not used X11 Y11 X12 Y12 Error code reset flag X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A Not used X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Interlock signal for the 1 X1E RFRP RTOP Y1E instructions when the X1F A68RDAN is used in Y1F remote I O station 4 56 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 7 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A68RD4N Q64RD Address Address decimal Read write decimal Read write ecima ecima 0 Conversion enable disable specification 0 Conversion enable disable specification 1 Averaging processing selection 1
300. shipment settings offset value 205 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value 206 CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value 207 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value 208 CHA Industrial shipment settings offset value 209 CHA Industrial shipment settings gain value 210 CH1 User range settings offset value 22 23 Mode switching setting R W R W 211 CH1 User range settings gain value 212 CH2 User range settings offset value 213 CH2 User range settings gain value 214 CH3 User range settings offset value 215 CH3 User range settings gain value 216 User range settings offset value 217 User range settings gain value 3 49 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 8 AG8DAI S1 3 8 1 Performance comparison Item A68DAI 51 1 16 bit signed binary 2 Setting range Digital input Set resolution Setting range 1 4000 0 to 4000 1 8000 0 to 8000 1 12000 0 to 12000 0 to 20mADC Analog output Se External load resistance value 0Q to 600Q Digital value resolution Analog 1 4000 1 8000 1 12000 output value I O characteristics Digital 4000 8000 12000 20mA input 2000 4000 6000 12mA value 0 0 0 4mA When offset value 4mA gain value 20mA settings 1 4000 5 0uA Maximum resolution of 1 8000 2
301. signal is turned on the OFF status may be detected shortly after the ON status of the signal is detected under changing into the creep speed In this case the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN outputs an error and stops the OPR control f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 5 AD75M1 M2 M3 7 5 1 Performance comparison Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible ti P ti f AD75M1 AD75M2 AD75M3 QD75M1 QD75M2 QD75M4 Pen iE A bility replacement No of control axes 1 2 3 1 2 4 No of positioning data items 600 axis 600 axis Position 2 axis linear x x control interpolation O O O O interpolation ue circular x functions interpolation Position control Speed control Speed Positioning position system switching control Position speed x Switching control Positioning range In Absolute system 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 0 to 359 99999 degree 2147483648 to 2147483647 PLS Incremental system 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 degree 2147483648 to 2147483647 PLS In speed position switching control 0 to 214748364 7 um 0 to 21474 83647 inch 0 to 21474 83647 degree 0 to 2147483647 PLS In Absolute system 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 0 to 359 99999 degr
302. solation method Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels non isolated Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59N cm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 5VDC Hardware version K or later 0 39A Hardware version J or earlier 0 9A Weight Hardware version K or later 0 3kg Hardware version J or earlier 0 6kg 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68AD G 10ms channel Sampling cycle Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compatibility Precautions for replacement The conversion speed of Q68AD G to A68AD has become slow If fast A F some conversion speed E required for control the Q64AD is recommended Voltage 15V current x30mA O 8 channels module Up to 50 000 times Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply transformer isolation Between channels transformer isolation Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VACrms for 1 minute O Between analog input channels 1000VACrms for 1 minute Between the I O terminal and
303. son to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module With Signal Conditioning Function User s Manual A68AD S2 Q68AD G Device Device Signal name No No XO Watchdog timer error YO X1 A D conversion READY Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X4 Y4 X5 Y5 X6 Y6 XT X8 Y8 X9 Y9 XA YA XB YB XC YC XD YD Not used XE YE XF YF X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Y1D X1E 1 Walle Signal name Not used Device Device Signal name Signal name No No XO Module READY YO x1 Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 Not used 4 Y4 Not used X5 Y5 X6 Y6 High resolution mode XT YT status flag X8 Warming output signal Y8 X9 Operating condition Y9 Operating condition setting completed flag setting request Offset gain setting mode XA YA User range write request flag Channel change XB YB Channel change request completed flag Input signal error XC Not used detection signal Maximum value Maximum value XD minimum value reset YD minimum value reset completed flag request A D conversion XE
304. switching control 814 914 1014 814 914 1014 positioning amount 815 915 1015 815 915 1015 Md 39 External input output signal 816 916 1016 816 916 1016 Md 40 Status 817 917 1017 817 917 1017 818 918 1018 818 918 1018 Md TI Target value 819 919 1019 819 919 1019 820 920 1020 820 920 1020 Target spoed 821 921 1021 821 921 1021 822 922 1022 Md 43 OP absolute position 823 923 1023 Md 44 Movement amount after near point 824 924 1024 824 924 1024 dog ON 825 925 1025 825 925 1025 Md 45 Torque limit stored value 826 926 1026 826 926 1026 Md 46 Special start data instruction code 827 927 1027 827 927 1027 setting value Md 47 Special start data instruction 828 928 1028 828 928 1028 parameter setting value Md 48 Start positioning data No setting 829 929 1029 829 929 1029 value Md 49 In speed control flag 830 930 1030 830 930 1030 Md 50 In speed change processing flag 831 931 1031 831 931 1031 Md 51 Start data pointer being executed 832 932 1032 834 934 1034 Md 52 Last executed positioning data No 833 933 1033 837 937 1037 Md 53 Repetition counter QD75MLI Md 41 Special start repetition 834 934 1034 832 932 1032 counter Md 54 Positioning data No being 835 935 1035 835 935 1035 executed Md 55 Block No being executed 836 936 1036 836 936 1036 Md 56 Positioning data being executed 838 to 847 938 to 947 1038 to 1047 838 to 847 938 to 947 1038 to 1047 848 948 1048 848 948 1048 Md 100 OPR re travel value 849 949 1049 849 949 1049
305. t 5 Function specifications Not changed 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed Q68ADV 3 Program Occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory address are changed Q68ADI 4 Performance specifications change Input signals Either V or input and I O characteristics 5 Function specifications Not changed 1 External wiring Cable size is changed Terminal block wiring connector A68AD wiring 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program Occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory address are changed Q68AD G 4 Performance specifications change Conversion speed the maximum of 2 5ms channel Analog input module sampling cycle 10ms channel response speed 20ms and I O characteristics 5 Function specifications Changed Non insulation gt insulation between channels 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed Q68ADV 3 Program Occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory address are changed Q68ADI 4 Performance specifications change Input signals Either V or input and I O characteristics 5 Function specifications Not changed 1 External wiring Cable size is changed Terminal block wiring connector A68AD S2 wiring 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program Occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory address are changed Q68AD G 4 Performance specifications change
306. t gain 5V offset 0V eem T 1 4000 1 8000 1 12000 SAID IIIS MOD Voltage input 2 5mV 1 25mV 0 83mV Current input 10pA 5uA 3 33uA Overall accuracy 1 4000 1 8000 1 12000 1 40 80 120 maximum digital output value N 51 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68AD G Compatibility Precautions for replacement 10 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ or more 0 to 20mADC Input resistance value 250Q 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Input Analog input range Digital Maximum Digital Maximum output value resolution output value resolution 0 to 10V 2 5mV 0 to 16000 0 625mV 0 to 5V 0 to 4000 1 25mV 0 416mV 0 to 12000 1 to 5V 1 0mV 0 333mV As concept of gain value is Volt li i de 1000 to 4500 1 0mV 3000 to 13500 0 333mV changed refer to Q68AD G Expanded mode User s Manual and then 10 to 10V 2 5mV 16000 to 16000 0 625mV gt iai 4000 to 4000 confirm the I O characteristics Users range setting 0 375mV 12000 to 12000 0 333mV 0 to 20mA 5uA 1 66 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 4 to 20mA 4uA 1 33pA Current 4 to 20mA 1000 to 4500 4uA 3000 t
307. t Module Alternative Models for Replacement 3 1 32 APOICDAI 3 3 3 2 1 Performance comparison 3 3 3 2 2 Functional COMPANISOM 3 7 3 2 3 signal comparison to programmable controller CPU 3 8 3 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison ssssssssssseeneeeeene eene nnne 3 9 3 3 AB TODA do ntc MEI EI 3 11 3 3 1 Performance COMPARISON 3 11 3 3 2 Functional COmpariSOF nx b E Re ARR RR RR 3 15 3 3 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU 3 16 3 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison sssssssessseeeeeeeene eene 3 17 3 4 A62DA Replacement to the Q62DAN ssssssssseeeeeeeeeeene enne enne nnns 3 19 3 4 1 Performance comparison i itt ined E RIA ELA FAR A RR AERA dA TNR RR eA 3 19 3 4 2 Functional comparison ee eene nee nnne nn nennen nene 3 23 3 4 3 signal comparison to programmable controller CPU 3 24 3 4 4 Buffer m
308. t value 117 CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value R W 118 CH1 Rate alarm warning detection period to 125 CH8 Rate alarm warning detection period 126 CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value 127 CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value to 140 CH8 Rate alarm upper limit value 141 CH8 Rate alarm lower limit value CH1 Input signal error detection setting 142 value CH1 Input signal error detection lower limit setting value to 150 CH1 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value to 158 I Mode switching setting R W 159 to 200 Save data classification setting R W 201 System area Not used 202 CH1 Factory default offset value 203 CH1 Factory default gain value to R W 232 CH8 Factory default offset value 233 CH8 Factory default gain value 2 26 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 5 A68AD S2 Upgrade to Q68ADV Q68ADI 2 5 1 Performance comparison Item A68AD S2 Voltage 10 to O to 10VDC Anela inoui Input resistance value Hardware version or later 1M9 Hardware version J or earlier 30kQ CU 4 to 20mADC Input resistance value 2500 Usable current input 20 to 0 to 20mA Digital output 16 bit signed binary 2048 to 2047 Analog input Digital output 10V 2000 I O characteristics 5V or 20mA 1000 OV or 4 0 5V or 12mA 1000 10V 2000 Voltage 5mV 1 2000 Current 20pA 1 1000 Maximum resolution Overall accuracy Accuracy in respect to maximu
309. tarts according to the positioning speed set beforehand by one start signal then the operation switches to position control by Speed position switching command signal If the operation stopped by Stop signal after the input of Speed position switching command signal the positioning can be continued by Speed position mode restart signal In addition the positioning address movement amount can be changed if it is before the input of Speed position switching command signal Refer to Section 7 6 6 JOG operation Positioning is executed in the specified direction at specified speed while a JOG operation command is on Turning on the signal starts operation at a specified speed and speed control operation is continued until Stop signal is input OPR control A workpiece is returned to an original point following an OPR start command from a CPU module and the current value is corrected to an OP address after the completion of OPR Multiplication setting This function multiplies the feedback pulse frequency from the pulse generator by 4 2 1 or 1 2 Electronic gear function This function controls moving distance and speed by multiplying command pulse output Deviation counter clear function This function clears the accumulated pulses in the deviation counter When the servomotor power is turned off due to an emergency stop during positioning clearing the accumulated pulses in the deviation counter prevents ser
310. tch flag X1C Y1C X1D Y1D RFRP RTOP instruction Not used 1 _ interlock signal X1F Y1F 3 16 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memories differs For details of the buffer memories and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A616DAV Q68DAVN Address Address Name Read write Name Read write decimal decimal 0 D A conversion enable disable channel 0 D A conversion enable disable 1 Analog output enable disable channel FI 1 CH1 Digital value 2 2 CH2 Digital value 3 3 CH3 Digital value 4 4 CH4 Digital value R W 5 5 CH5 Digital value 6 6 CH6 Digital value 7 7 CH7 Digital value 8 8 CH8 Digital value 9 System area Not used 9 10 10 System area Not used 11 11 CH1 Setting value check code 12 12 CH2 Setting value check code 13 13 CH3 Setting value check code 14 14 Setting value check code 15 15 CH5 Setting value check code 16 CHO Digital value 16 CH6 Setting value check code R 17 CH1 Digital value 17 CH7 Setting value check code 18 CH2 Digital value 18 CH8 Setting value check code 19 CH3 Digital value 19 Error code 20 CHA Digital value 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 21 CH5 Digital value 21 Setting range CH5 to CH8
311. te I O station the analog output will not be synchronized because of a link scan delay if the synchronous output function is specified Analog output HOLD CLEAR function Retains an analog value that was output when the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status or an error occurs 1 On Q68DAIN the setting of HOLD CLEAR is carried out for each channel 2 For the Q68DAIN this function is set with the intelligent function module switch setting 3 Refer to Analog output status combination list in the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual to check the execution status of output Analog output test while the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status Outputs the analog value converted from a digital value when Output enable disable flag is forcibly turned on while the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status D A conversion Enabl Disabl Setting enable disable isable combin Output ation enable disable Enable Disable Enable Disable flag Not Analog output test Allowed 7 Not allowed allowed Resolution mode Switches the resolution mode according to the application The resolution can be selected from 1 4000 or 1 12000 The resolution mode is batch set for all channels Online module replacement 3 55 Replaces a module without stopping the system Replaceable modules during on
312. telligent 16 points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm x Wiring change is required FG terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Terminals other than FG R1 25 3 x Sleeved solderless terminal cannot be used The recalculation of internal current 0 38A A consumption 5VDC is required 3 60 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A68DAV Voltage 21 6 to 26 4VDC External Current v Power SUREY consumption Inrush current Weight 0 6kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68DAVN Compatibility Precautions for replacement 24VDC 20 15 Ripple spike 500mVp p or less 0 20A O 2 5A 230us or less 0 20kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 9 2 Functional comparison Item D A conversion enable disable function Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the D A conversion for each channel O Available Not available A68DAV Q68DAVN Precautions for replacement On Q68DAVN by disabling the D A conversion for the channels that are not used the conversion speed can be shortened D A output enable disable function Specifies whether to output the D A conversion value or the offset value for each channel The conversion speed stays constant regardless of whether D A output is enabled or disabled On Q68DAVN the o
313. tem of AD75MD QD75MC Cd 32 Interrupt request during 1181 1231 1281 1520 1620 1720 continuous operation 1184 1234 1284 1508 1608 1708 Cd 33 New acceleration time value 1185 1235 1285 1509 1609 1709 1186 1236 1286 1510 1610 1710 Cd 34 New deceleration time value 1187 1237 1287 1511 1611 1711 Cd 35 Acceleration deceleration time change during speed change enable 1188 1238 1288 1512 1612 1712 disable selection Deceleration start flag valid 1905 Stop command processing for deceleration _ 1907 stop selection Servo amplifier data read 1553 1653 1753 T 37 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of AD75MO AD75MLI QD75MLI Da 1 Operation pattern Da 2 Control system 1300 2300 3300 2000 8000 14000 Da 3 Acceleration time No Da 4 Deceleration time No Da 9 M code condition data 1301 2301 3301 2001 8001 14001 Da 8 Dwell time JUMP destination positioning data No 1 1302 2302 3302 2002 8002 14002 r No t Empty 1303 2303 3303 2003 8003 14003 E 1304 2304 3304 2004 8004 14004 Band command speed 1305 2305 3305 2005 8005 14005 T Da5 Positioning address 1306 2306 3306 2006 8006 14006 1307 2307 3307 2007 8007 14007 1308
314. terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels non isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59Necm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 15A Voltage 21 6 to 26 4VDC External Current on consumption f Inrush current Weight 0 65kg 53 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68DAIN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Max 100 000 times O Available Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between output channels non isolation o Between external power supply and analog output transformer isolation Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more 16 points I O assignment intelligent 16 points The number of occupied I O points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block 0 3 to 0 75mm FG terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1
315. the flash write 26 times from the O sequence program an error occurs The error reset enables to perform the flash write 32 points 32 points Occupied I O points O I O assignment special 32 points assignment intelligent 32 points No of module occupied 1 1 O slots QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75P4N 0 14kg 0 14kg 0 16kg Weight 0 35kg QD75D1N QD75D2N QD75D4N 0 15kg 0 15kg 0 16kg f POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75P4N Precautions for AD75P1 S3 AD75P2 S3 AD75P3 S3 QD75D1N QD75D2N QD75D4N ibility replacement When using both the speed position switching control and the external STRT signal O E x integrated into CHG a Start input the igna integrated into External Startsignal external start signal to the interrupt module and start using the direct I O signal for output external devi External command signal External evices CHG signal Speed position switching signal start or speed position switching selectable with parameters No INP signal A When it is required in Position INP O for monitor x A for monitor monitor using the input module Signal logic The default logic of Command pulse output signal only O O switching pulse output differs Connection via
316. there is temperature drift compensation the time calculated by adding 160 us will be O import on Q68ADV I can be used regardless of the number of channels used imported as analog signal In this case use the averaging processing function to remove the effect of noise 15V 30mA O 2 12 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item Analog input points A68AD 8 channels module Maximum number of writes for E2PROM Isolation method Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels non isolated Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59N cm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 83 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 5VDC Hardware version K or later 0 39A Hardware version J or earlier 0 9A Weight Hardware version K or later 0 3kg Hardware version J or earlier 0 6kg 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68ADV Q68ADI Compatibility Precautions for replacement 8 channels module O Max 100 000 times O Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation O Between channels non isolated Between the I O termin
317. thout stopping the system Replaceable modules during online are the Process CPU and the Redundant CPU 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 2 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Thermocouple Input Module Channel Isolated Thermocouple Micro Voltage Input Module User s Manual A616TD Q64TD Device Device Device i Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No XO Watchdog timer error YO Module READY YO Not used CH1 Offset gain setting CH1 Offset setting X1 A D conversion READY Y1 Y1 status signal request CH2 Offset gain setting X2 flag Y2 Y2 CH1 Gain setting request status signal Disconnection error CH3 Offset gain setting CH2 Offset setting X3 Y3 Y3 detection status signal request Digital output value out CHA Offset gain setting f X4 Y4 Y4 CH2 Gain setting request of range detection status signal Detected t t Offset setting X5 value out of range 5 Y5 request detection Not used X6 Y6 Not used Y6 CH3 Gain setting request CHA Offset setting XT Y7 Y7 request X8 Y8 Y8 CH4 Gain setting request Operating condition Operating condition X9 Y9 Y9
318. tion Read the scaling value of Channel 1 from the buffer memory DO Buffer memory areas of the Q68AD G Description Default Read Write 35h 53 Scaling enable disable setting OOFF R W 364 54 CH1 Scaling value 0 374 55 CH2 Scaling value 0 38H 56 CH3 Scaling value 0 39H 57 CH4 Scaling value 0 58 CH5 Scaling value 0 3By 59 CH6 Scaling value 0 3Cy 60 CH7 Scaling value 0 3Dy 61 CH8 Scaling value 0 3Ey 62 CH1 Scaling lower limit value 0 63 CH1 Scaling upper limit value 0 ERI 404 64 CH2 Scaling lower limit value 0 414 65 CH2 Scaling upper limit value 0 1 For details of the scaling function refer to the user s manual for the module used App 7 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Ter
319. tion method Pu 2 Between platinum rogramimapie Photocoupler 1780VimsACIS cycles 10MQ or controller isolation altitude 2000m more using power supply 500VDC insulation Between platinum resistance RTD input and Non isolation tester channel Detected per channel O 16 points The number of occupied I O points I O assignment intelligent 16 points e has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm E Wiring change is required 1 25 3 R1 25 3 Sleeved solderless terminal cannot be used 4 52 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A68RD4N Set the total resistance value of a conductor where the current runs to 70Q or less Example When connecting Pt100 to CH1 and CH2 4 Conductor a1 A68RD4N Cable between module and platinum RTD o b2 a3 Lay wiring so that the following condition is met 1 2 3 4 lt 70 Q indicates the direction of current Internal current consumption 5VDC Weight 0 43kg 0 41A 4 53 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64RD Compatibility Precautions for replacement The conductor resistance value must meet the condition of 1 2 lt 2kO or less In the case of 3 conductor type the difference between 1 and 2 in the conductor resistance value must be 100 or less
320. tions comparison with external devices 7 52 7 6 6 X Precautions for the replacement of the AD70 by the QD73A1 7 53 CHAPTER 8 UPGRADE OF THE POSITION 8 1to8 2 Bhs AG WES E PUT 8 1 8 2 AG2ZLS S5 and A63LS Mn 8 2 43 APPENDICES App 1 to App 8 Appendix 1 External Dimensions ee ee eee ce ceaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceaaaacaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesansaaeeees App 1 Appendix 2 Spare parts storage App 2 Appendix Related Manuals aaan App Appendix 3 1 Replacement Handbooks App 3 Appendix 3 2 A QnA series eren Ene App 4 Appendbc3 3 seres uie extento Rd cren RR PX AE Rea seed Rus App 4 Appendix 3 4 Programming tool tte nbn t Rede ht n xad dd PE App 5 Appendix 4 How to Change Resolution After Analog I O Module is Replaced App 7 14 For the products shown in handbooks for transition catalogues and transition examples refer to the manuals for the relevant products and check the detailed specifications precautions for use and restrictions before replace
321. to 0 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ to 20mADC Input resistance value 2500 A The minus current cannot be input Analog output voltage to the A616AD With AGOMXR equivalent or more Maximum resolution Digital Digital A 2 resolution value be obtained Input Analog input range output value output value 32 bits 16 bits 32 bits 16 bits by setting at the analog inputs 0 to 10V 156 3uV 312 6 range of 10 up to 10V high 0 to 5V 78 2uV 156 4uV resolution mode and User range 1 to 5V 62 5uV 125 0uV 0 to 64000 0 to 32000 while the analog inputs are used at Voltage User seltings 47 4uV 94 8uV the range of 5 up to 5V on Uni polar Q64AD GH ny 91 When using range of 20 up to User range settings 64000 to 64000 32000 to 32000 Bi polar 47 4uV 94 8uV 20mA with AGOMXR negative 0 to 20mA 312 5nA 625 0nA current can not be converted with Q64AD GH Current 410 20mA ee 0 to 64000 0 to 32000 User range settings Use conversion devices to convert 151 6nA 303 2nA Uni polar into a input range 10 0596 A60MXR is the accuracy in respect Reference accuracy Digital output value 32 bit 32 digits O to the full 8689 and Q64AD GH is Digital output value 16 bit 16 digits the accuracy in respect to Temperature coefficient 71 0 00714 maximum digital output value 15V 30mA Consider replacement with 4 channels module A multiple Q64AD GH
322. to 2mm Applicable wire size Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59Necm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 6A 5VDC Voltage 21 6 to 26 4VDC Ext i Current 0 358 ower s e TOM consumption Inrush current 2 4A Weight 0 5kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64DAN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between output channels non isolation Between external power supply and analog output transformer Isolation Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or 16 points A The number of occupied I O points I O assignment intelligent 16 points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block x 2 x Wiring change is required R1 25 3 Sleeved solderless terminal cannot be used 0 34A 24VDC 20 15 Ripple spike 500mVp p or less 0 24 2 5A 260us or less O 0 20kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 7 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available Analog output HOLD CLEAR function Description Retains an analog value before Output ena
323. troller power supply photocoupler isolation Isolation method A616DAI channels non isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance 32 points Number of occupied I O points y po I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 3A 5VDC Voltage 15VDC 15VDC Ext ju Current 15VDC 0 53A power SUPPY consumption 15VDC 0 125A Inrush current Weight 0 69kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68DAIN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between output channels non isolation o Between external power supply and analog output transformer isolation Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute o Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more M 16 points The number of occupied I O points I O assignment intelligent 16 points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm2 FG terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Wiring change is required Terminals other than FG R1 25 3 x S
324. tting one pulse differs Set the parameter so that movement amount may be same Automatic trapezoidal Acceleration acceleration O O deceleration deceleration processing S pattern acceleration O O deceleration Acceleration time and deceleration time can Acceleration time and deceleration time can Acceleration No of patterns be set independently be set independently deceleration 4 patterns each 4 patterns each O action time setting range 1 to 65535ms 1 to 8388608ms switching is 1 to 8388608ms enabled Electronic gears backlash compensation Electronic gears backlash compensation Compensation 2 2 A Refer to 2 near pass near pass E For details of diagnostic Error display 17 segment LED Error LED x use GX Developer The start history during History data storage Start Provided 4 types 16 items module Provided 3 types 16 items module error is integrated into error warning the start history Data storage destination Pese Flash ROM O battery less backup battery less backup 10136 3000VE A6CON1 A6CON4 Soldering type supplied Soldering type sold separately Connection connector 10136 6000EL A6CON2 x Crimping type sold separately Crimping type sold separately As the connectors differ s A6CONG IDC type sold separately wiring change is 10136 3000VE 24 to 30 AWG required 2 A6CON1 A6CON4 0 3mm2 The connectors of approx 0 05 to 0 2mm QD75ML is sold Applicable wire size
325. tting range Offset gain setting 18 Setting data set request 17 System area Not used 19 to System area Not used 18 to 19 CH1 to CH8 Averaging processing selection Disconnection detection enable disable Offset gain setting mode Offset 20 to 27 ME R W 1A PRU specification specification Offset gain setting mode Gain 28 to 2F System area Not used 1B s R W specification 30 to Digital output value temperature setting 1C CH1 Offset temperature setting value Disconnection detection channel number R W 40 to 47 1D CH1 Gain temperature setting value storage 48 to System area Not used to Digital output value out of range 2B CH8 Gain temperature setting value R W 50 to 57 R W Channel number storage 2C System area Not used Q68TD G H02 Cold junction compensation R 58 to 5F System area Not used 2D setting state Q68TD G H01 System area 60 to 67 Detected temperature value out of range RW 2E Warning output enable disable setting R W Channel number storage 2F Warning output flag Process alarm 68 to 6F System area Not used 30 Warning output flag Rate alarm Q68TD G H02 Disconnection detection flag R INPUT channel 31 Q68TD G H01 Disconnection status TOto7F R Digital output value storage monitor flag 32 to 39 CH1 to CH8 Scaling value 80 to FF Error correction value setting RIW 3A Scaling valid invalid setting R W 100 to 17F Thermocouple type setting to 3D System area Not used MX CH c
326. ty devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTS are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS Print Date Apr 2005 Oct 2005 Oct 2008 Jul 2011 Mar 2013 Handbook Number The handbook number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Revision L NA 08046ENG A First edition L NA 08046ENG B L NA 08046ENG C L NA 08046ENG D L NA 08046ENG E Addition Appendix 1 Partial correction Contents Appendix 1 gt Appendix 2 Model addition Q64DAN Q64RD G Q68RD3 G Q68TD G H01 Model change QD62 QD62 H01 QD62 H02 Q62DA Q62DAN Q68DAV gt Q68DAVN Q68DAI gt Q68DAIN Term revision whole SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Chapter 3 whole Chapter 4 whole Section 6 1 to Section 6 3 Section 7 1 Section 9 1 2 Section 9 1 4 Appendix 2 1 to Appendix 2 3 Model addition Q68AD G Q
327. u Seoul 157 801 Korea MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE LTD 307 Alexandra Road Mitsubishi Electric Building Singapore 159943 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FACTORY AUTOMATION THAILAND CO LTD 12th Floor SV City Building Office Tower 1 No 896 19 and 20 Rama 3 Road Kwaeng Bangpongpang Khet Yannawa Bangkok 10120 Thailand MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC VIETNAM COMPANY LIMITED Hanoi Branch 6 Floor Detech Tower 8 Ton That Thuyet Street My Dinh 2 Ward Nam Tu Liem District Hanoi Vietnam PT MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDONESIA Gedung Jaya 11th Floor JL MH Thamrin No 12 Jakarta Pusat 10340 Indonesia MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDIA PVT LTD Pune Branch Emerald House EL 3 J Block M I D C Bhosari Pune 411026 Maharashtra India MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 348 Victoria Road P O Box 11 Rydalmere N S W 2116 Australia MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Tel Fax Tel 1 847 478 2100 1 847 478 2253 Tel 52 55 3067 7500 Tel 55 11 4689 3000 Fax 55 11 4689 3016 Tel 49 2102 486 0 Fax 49 2102 486 1120 Tel 44 1707 28 8780 Fax 44 1707 27 8695 Tel 353 1 4198800 Fax 353 1 4198890 Tel 39 039 60531 Fax 39 039 6053 312 Tel 34 935 65 3131 Fax 34 935 89 1579 Tel 33 1 55 68 55 68 Fax 33 1 55 68 57 57 Tel 420 251 551 470 Fax 420 251 551 471 Tel 48 12 630 47 00 Fax 48 12 630 47 01 Tel 46 8 625 10 00 Fax 46 46 39 70 18 Tel 7 812 633 3497 Fax 7 812 633 3499 Tel 90 216 5
328. ue storage 35 CH4 Scaling value 80 to FF Error correction value setting RW 36 to 3D System area Not used 100 to 17F Thermocouple type setting 3E CH1 Scaling range lower limit value 180 to 4FF MX CH channel 3F CH1 Scaling range upper limit value Digital output value storage R 40 CH2 Scaling range lower limit value MX CH channel 41 CH2 Scaling range upper limit value 200 to 27F R W Detected temperature value storage 42 CH3 Scaling range lower limit value 43 CH3 Scaling range upper limit value 44 Scaling range lower limit value 45 Scaling range upper limit value 46 to 4D System area Not used 4E CH1 Scaling width lower limit value 4F CH1 Scaling width upper limit value 50 CH2 Scaling width lower limit value 51 CH2 Scaling width upper limit value 52 CH3 Scaling width lower limit value RW 53 CH3 Scaling width upper limit value 54 CH4 Scaling width lower limit value 55 Scaling width upper limit value 56 CH1 Warning output lower lower limit value 57 CH1 Warning output lower upper limit value 4 9 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64TD Address Read write hex 58 CH1 Warning output upper lower limit value 59 CH1 Warning output upper upper limit value 5A CH2 Warning output lower lower limit value 5B CH2 Warning output lower upper limit value 5C CH2 Warning output upper
329. uest XE YE Not used YE Not used XF YF Error flag YF Error clear request X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 CPU selection signal X19 Y19 Sign of CH1 digital input X1A Y1A Sign of CH2 digital input X1B Y1B Output enable X1C MIC X1D Y1D Not used X1E 3 32 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 5 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memories and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A62DA Q64DAN Address decimal 0 CH1 Digital value CH2 Digital value CH1 Voltage setting value check code CH2 Voltage setting value check code CH1 Current setting value check code aj A N 33 CH2 Current setting value check code Read write R W Address decimal D A conversion enable disable Read write CH1 Digital value CH2 Digital value R W CH3 Digital value CH4 Digital value System area Not used CH1 Setting value check code CH2 Setting value check code CH3 Setting value check code Setting value check code System area Not used Error code Setting range CH1 to CH4 System area Not used Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Offset gain setting mode Gain specification R
330. ule setting monitoring tool GX Configurator CT High speed counter module setting monitoring tool GX Configurator QP Positioning module setting monitoring tool Using the utility package is not a must However the utility package allows not only for the followings to do but also reduces sequence programs Initial setting is possible without a program The auto refresh setting allows to read write buffer memory data of intelligent function module automatically from to the CPU device memory Checking of the setting status or operating status of intelligent function module is simplified 1 INTRODUCTION 1 2 Precautions for Transition from Large sized A QnA Series to Q Series 1 Be sure to confirm its functions specifications and instructions by referring the manual of the corresponding Q series module prior to use 2 Be sure to check the operation of whole system before the actual operation 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 1 List of Analog Input Module Alternative Models for Replacement Production discontinuation Transition to Q series Product Model Model Remarks Restrictions 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Changed 2 modules are required 3 Program Occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory address Q68ADV A616AD are changed Q68ADI 4 Performance specifications change 8CH module input signals Either V or inpu
331. ure drift compensation function can be performed at A D conversion time for all channels 160us The resolution can be switched according to Resolution mode the application The resolution mode is batch set for all the channels 1 Replaceable modules during A module change is made without the Online module change O online are a process CPU and a system being stopped redundant CPU 1 For the A68ADN the resolution for voltage and current can be set to 1 4000 1 8000 or 1 12000 For the Q68ADV I the resolution for voltage and current is 1 4000 in the normal resolution mode while the resolution for the voltage from 10 to 10V is 1 16000 and the resolution for the voltage in other ranges and current is 1 12000 in the high resolution mode 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 7 3 I O signal comparison to programmable controller CPU Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual A68ADN Q68ADVII Device Device Device Device Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No No XO Watchdog timer error YO XO Module READY YO Temperature drift X1 A D conversion READY Y1 X1 Y1 compensation flag X2 Error flag Y2 X2 Y2
332. urrent consumption 5VDC 59 0 15A 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68DAVN Compatibility Precautions for replacement 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 10 to 10VDC External load resistance value 1kQ to 1MQ O Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Analog output TE e range Digital input Maximum Digital input Maximum value resolution value resolution 0 to 5V 1 25mV 0 416mV 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 1 to 5V 1 0mV 0 333mV Voltage 10 to 10V 2 5mV 16000 to 16000 0 625mV yid Nus aida 0 75 12000 to 12000 0 333mV settings Ambient temperature 25 5 C within 0 1 10mV Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C within 0 3 30 80us channel O 12V O 8 channels module O Max 100 000 times O Available O Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between output channels non isolation Between external power supply and analog output transformer isolation Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more 16 points The number of occupied I O points I O assignment in
333. used gt The input response time for the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN is shorter Kissen Input resistance 4 7 4 3 than the MSD TSP HS3 Response time 4ms gt 1ms If a sensor which the chattering time when the near point watchdog signal Input is turned on is long is used an error may occurs due to the false detection of the ON OFF status Check specifications for the sensor HM Input resistance 4 7kKQ gt 7 7kQ Speed position switching signal A Response time 4ms gt 1ms Input resistance 3 5kQ gt 4 7kQ at input of 24V Zero signal 0 5kQ gt 0 62kQ at input of 5V Including the response time R i je ms differences reconfirming is required esponse time 0 8ms 1ms ON voltage 2 5V 2 0V at input of 5V Manual pulse generator ON current 3 5mA gt 2mA O Pulse Output Deviation counter clear O 1 For the external start and in position signal of which QD75PLIN QD75DLIN does not have they are not described 2 The column of interface specifications differences is described as the form Specifications of AD75PLI S3 gt Specifications of QD75PLIN QD75DLIN 3 The response time difference 0 2 ms of AD75PLI S3 and QD75PLIN QD75DLIN is the time difference of 1pls part for creep speed of 5000pps When the accuracy is required it is required for the creep speed to be low enough value 4 If the chattering time is long when the near point watchdog
334. ut range Voltage V Current mA Analog output voltage V 0 to 10 0 to 20 Oto 5 0 to 20 1to 5 4 to 20 to 10 10 to 10 20 to 20 5to 5 20 to 20 I O characteristics 0 to 10 0 to 20 Oto 5 Oto 5 0 to 20 1to 5 4 to 20 1to 5 10 to 10 20 to 20 10 to 10 5to 5 20 to 20 10 to 10 20 to 20 5to 5 5to 5 20 to 20 Overall accuracy 0 3 Digital output value 12 Absolute Voltage 15V maximum input Current 30mA Analog input points 16 channels module Multiplexer element Mercury plunger relay Between the input terminal and programmable controller photocoupler isolation Between channels mercury plunger relay isolation Isolation method Between channels PA 500VDC accuracy guarantee 500VDC dielectric withstand voltage 16 points treated as empty slots e ied I O point uu D d 0 point setting is possible by I O assignment Connected terminal 38 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59N cm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 5A 5VDC Weight 0 6kg 5 9 5 MULTIPLEXER REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64AD GH Compatibility Precautions for replacement 10
335. ution mode mode Digital input Maximum Digital input Maximum value resolution value resolution 0 to 5V 0 to 1 25mV 0 to 0 416mV 1 to 5V 4000 12000 Analog output range 10 to 10V 0006 4000 16000 User range 4000 12000 to settings 12000 0 to 20mA 0 to 0 to 4 to 20mA 4000 12000 Userrange 4000 to 12000 to settings 4000 12000 Ambient temperature 25 5 C within 0 1 voltage 10mV current 20pA Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C within 0 3 9 voltage 30mV current 60JA 80yus channel Voltage 12 21 2 channels module O Max 100 000 times O Available 36 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A62DA S1 Between the output terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Isolation method Between channels non isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Number of occupied I O points seins u upi i I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 20 point terminal block 0 75 to 2mm Applicable wire size Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59Necm Applicable solderless terminal V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 6A 5VDC Voltage 21 6 to 26 4VDC Ext i Current 0 358 ower s e TOM consumption Inrush current 2 4A Weight 0 5kg
336. utput enable disable is set with Y signal CHO Output enable disable flag Synchronous output function Obtains analog output synchronized with the programmable controller CPU The analog output will be updated after Synchronous output request YD is set to ON and the time specified as programmable controller CPU processing time 120ys has elapsed However the analog output will be fixed to CH1 and other channels CH2 to CH8 cannot be used When the module is mounted on a remote I O station the analog output will not be synchronized because of a link scan delay if the synchronous output function is specified Analog output HOLD CLEAR function Retains an analog value that was output when the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status or an error occurs 1 On Q68DAVN the setting of HOLD CLEAR is carried out for each channel 2 For the Q68DAVN this function is set with the intelligent function module Switch setting 3 Refer to Analog output status combination list in the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual to check the execution status of output Analog output test while the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status Outputs the analog value converted from a digital value when CHLI Output enable disable flag is forcibly turned on while the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status D A conversion Setting enable disable combi CHO Output nation ena
337. vomotor rotation at power recovery Speed change function This function forces to change speed from a program during positioning control or JOG operation Refer to Section 7 6 6 Current value change function This function changes the current feed value to a specified value from a sequence program on the condition other than while BUSY Refer to Section 7 6 6 In position function This function turns on In position signal while the accumulated pulse amount in the deviation counter is within the specified in position range In position signal can be used as the signal right before positioning completion Zero gain adjustment T 45 This function adjusts analog voltage contained in accumulated pulses Refer to Section 7 6 6 7 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 Positioning execution time BUSY signal X14 ON to Positioning complete signal X15 ON of the QD73A1 and AD70 may differ because their internal processing methods are different As a result the timing when In position signal X16 turns on may also vary Adjust positioning execution time using the following methods if the difference of the positioning execution time or the timing when In position signal X16 turns on affects the system Adjusting the QD73A1 s positioning parameter Pr 6 Acceleration time or Pr 7 Deceleration time Increasing gain by changing the accumulated pulse amount setting through the
338. ware stroke limit check during speed control is carried out in the following cases When the software stroke limit is applied to the current feed value with Pr 14 and the current feed value is updated with Pr 21 When the software stroke limit is applied to the machine feed value 3 If an attempt is made to change the current value but the designated address is out of the software stroke limit range the attempt is considered as an error and the current value is not changed 4 Error code change AD75PLI S3 There are 3 types of errors for each upper and lower stroke limit error code 509 to 512 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Errors for the software stroke upper limit are integrated in to error code 507 Errors for the lower limit are integrated in to error code 508 Error codes 509 to 512 are deleted Current value changing M code function An error occurs when the designated new current value is out of the software stroke limit range 2 The M code setting value is valid during the positioning data current value changing instruction Acceleration deceleration speed control 1 An error occurs when the command frequency value calculated from the speed limit value exceeds the maximum command frequency of the positioning module being used 2 Only two word type 1 to 8388608ms can be used as the setting value for the acceleration deceleration time Stop process and restart after stop positioning
339. with scaling positioning and switch output functions VS Q62B Converter type with position detection function Replacement Q series ABSOCODER sensor Positioning module Position detection module VS Q262 VS Q262B Existing A series positioning module MRE 32SP062SAC MRE GLISP062FAC VS Q262 M2PG VS Q262B M2PG L1 64 128 160 256 320 VS Q262 Positioning type with scaling positioning and switch output functions VS Q262B Converter type with position detection function ABSOCODER sensor cable The existing cables can be reused A new wiring is not necessary I O cables should be replaced because connectors are different Parameter setting software Please select V8 Q62 Q262 EDW the parameter setting software for VS Q62 series VS Q62B A62LS S5 A1S62LS VS T62 VS Q62 Q262 EDW Parameter setting software Accessory Please contact SG Corporation Overseas division of NSD Group if you need the details of upgrading or VS Q62 series Contact SG Corporation Overseas division Tel 81 0 52 261 2352 Fax 81 0 52 252 0522 E mail foreign nsdcorp co jp 8 2 APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions For external dimensions of modules shown in this handbook refer to the user s manual for each module App 1 Appendix 2 Spare parts storage 1 The general specifications of programmable controllers are as follows Please do not 2 3 4 5 store sp
340. y isolation 1780VrmsAC 3 cycles 500V DC Transformer Altitude 2000m 10MQ or more Between analog channels f isolation 16 points Q64AD GH cannot set to O point I O assignment intelligent 16 points with I O assignment 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm x Wiring change is required R1 25 3 A solderless terminal with sleeve can not be used x The recalculation of internal 0 89A A current consumption 5VDC is required 0 2kg 5 6 5 MULTIPLEXER REPLACEMENT 1 Analog output voltage to the A616AD processing analog input values of the AG0MX The I O characteristics and the maximum resolution are to be the same as in the specifications of the A616AD as below Voltage V Analog input range Maximum resolution 0 to 10 2 5mV 1 4000 Oto 5 1 25mV 1 4000 1 to 5 1 0mV 1 4000 10 to 10 5 0mV 1 4000 5 to 5 2 5mV 1 4000 Digital output value 0 to 4000 2000 to 2000 5 MULTIPLEXER REPLACEMENT Memo 5 8 5 MULTIPLEXER REPLACEMENT 5 3 A60MXR As regarding AGOMXR non isolated multiplexer module consider replacement using multiple Q64AD GH 5 3 1 Performance comparison Item A60MXR Voltage 10 to 0 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ Analog input 20 to 0 to 20mMADC Current Input resistance value 2500 Analog output voltage 10 to 0 to 10VDC Analog inp
341. y or the programmable controller Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction 1 Configure external safety circuits such as an emergency stop circuit protection circuit and protective interlock circuit for forward reverse operation or upper lower limit positioning 2 When the programmable controller detects the following problems it will stop calculation and turn off all output in the case of a In the case of b it will hold or turn off all output according to the parameter setting Note that the AnS series module will turn off the output in either of cases a and b a The power supply module has over current protection equipment and over voltage Output OFF Output OFF protection equipment b The CPU module self diagnosis functions such Hold or turn off all output as the watchdog timer error detect problems according to the parameter Output OFF setting Also all outputs may be turned on if an error occurs in a part such as an I O control part where the CPU module cannot detect any error To ensure safety operation in such a case provide a safety mechanism or a fail safe circuit external to the programmable controller For a fail safe circuit example refer to LOADING AND INSTALLATION in the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of an output module relay or transistor Configure an external circuit f

Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents